• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Discipline
  • Chapters on Monastic Discipline
  • Toh 1-6

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh1-6.pdf

སྨན་གྱི་གཞི།

The Chapter on Medicines
Chapter Two

Bhaiṣajya­vastu
འདུལ་བ་གཞི་ལས། སྨན་གྱི་གཞི།
’dul ba gzhi las/ sman gyi gzhi
“The Chapter on Medicines” from The Chapters on Monastic Discipline
Vinaya­vastuni Bhaiṣajya­vastu

Toh 1-6

Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 277.b–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–50.a

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Palgyi Lhünpo
  • Sarvajñādeva
  • Vidyākaraprabha
  • Dharmākara
  • Paltsek

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2021

Current version v 1.1.5 (2025)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 10.27am on Monday, 20th January 2025 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgements
i. Introduction
tr. The Translation
+ 11 chapters- 11 chapters
p. General Summary of the Contents of the Chapter on Medicines
1. Chapter One
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· I. The Authorization of Medicines
· II. Fat
· III. Scabies
· IV. Collyrium
· V. A Man Gone Mad
· VI. Pilinda
· VII. Revata
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. Rice Flour and Guḍa
· B. Barley Flour and Guḍa
· VIII. Sauvīraka
2. Chapter Two
+ 6 sections- 6 sections
· I. Mahāsenā
· II. Flesh
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. Elephant Flesh
· B. Nāga Flesh
· III. Hemorrhoids
· IV. One Who Has a Wind Illness
· V. Pūrṇa
· VI. Agnidatta
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Story of the Two Nāga Kings and King Bimbisāra
· B. The Quarrel between the Brahmin Agnidatta and the Citizens of Rājagṛha
3. Chapter Three
+ 7 sections- 7 sections
· I. Rājagṛha
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Disaster of Rājagṛha and Its End
· B. The Epidemic in Vaiśālī
· II. Nālandā
· III. Veṇuyaṣṭikā
· IV. Pāṭali Village
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· A. The Sermon at Pāṭali Village
· B. The Donation by the Brahmin Varśākāra
· C. The Donation of Parasols
· D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana
· V. The Ganges
· VI. Mahāpraṇāda
+ 7 sections- 7 sections
· A. The Appearance of King Mahāpraṇāda’s Pillar
· B. The Former Life of the Monk Bhaddālin
· C. The Prediction of the Appearance of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha
· D. The Former Lives of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha
· E. The Sermon in Kuṭi Village
· F. The Sermon in Nādikā
· G. The Invitation by Āmrapālī
· VII. Vaiśālī
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. The Visit of Āmrapālī
· B. The Visit of the Licchavis
· C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī
· D. The Former Lives of the Licchavis
· E. The End of the Epidemic in Vaiśālī
4. Chapter Four
+ 13 sections- 13 sections
· I. Veṇu
· II. Middle Village
· III. Mithilā
· IV. Videha
· V. Sālā
· VI. The Well
· VII. Bhārgava
· VIII. Kāṣāya
· IX. Crown of the Head
· X. Kanthaka
· XI. Gośālaka
· XII. Pāpā
· XIII. Kuśinagarī
5. Chapter Five
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· I. The Axe
· II. Devadṛśa
· III. Lumbinī
· IV. Kapila
· V. Where There Is Cotton
· VI. Kanakamuni
· VII. Kārṣaka
· VIII. A Robe
· IX. Bath
· X. Sikatin
6. Chapter Six
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· I. Icchānaṅgalā
· II. Utkaṭā
· III. Saptaparṇa
· IV. Sunrise
· V. Śrāvastī
· VI. Valaya
· VII. Where There Is Ground
· VIII. Lion Village
· IX. New Village
· X. City
· XI. Pīṭha
· XII. Nyagrodhikā
7. Chapter Seven
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· I. Kimpilā
· II. Ahicchattra
· III. Mathurā
· IV. Rāṣṭrapāla
· V. Hastināpura
· VI. The Great City
· VII. Śrughnā
· VIII. Brahmin Village
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. A Fire Caused by an Old Man from the Śākya Clan
· B. The Former Life of the Old Man
· IX. The City of Kāla
· X. Rohitaka
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· A. Offerings of the Yakṣa Elephant Power
· B. Departure to the Northern Region
· C. Awakened Power in Heaped Up
· D. Dharma Power in Retuka
· E. Great Cup in the Indus, Feet
· F. Having a Shaved Head and Water Jar
· G. Apalāla
· H. The Nāga Huluḍa
· I. Bhraṣṭolā, Ṛṣi, Āpannaka
· J. Kanthā
· K. In Dhānyapura, Converting the Mother of Best Army
· L. The Potter in Naitarī
· XI. Śādvalā
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Great Yakṣa of Śādvalā
· B. Pālitakūṭa
· XII. Nandivardhana
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. Bhavadeva’s, Caṇḍālī’s Seven Sons’, and the Yakṣa Earth-Protector’s Conversion in Nandivardhana
· B. Giving an Image to Nāgas, Aśvaka, and Punarvasuka
· C. Converting Nāḍikā and Naḍadaryā
· D. In the City of Kuntī, the Yakṣiṇī Named Kuntī
· E. Kharjūrikā and the Stūpa Made of Dirt
8. Chapter Eight
+ 9 sections- 9 sections
· I. Ādirājya
· II. Bhadrāśva
· III. Mathurā
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. The Prediction about Upagupta
· B. The Former Life of Upagupta
· C. The Brahmin Nīlabhūti
· D. The Obstruction of the Buddha’s Way by a Goddess
· E. The Yakṣa Gardabha
· IV. Otalā Park
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Visit of the Brahmin Otalāyana
· B. Kacaṅgalā
· V. Vairambhya
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· A. The Brahmin in a Park
· B. King Agnidatta’s Offer
· C. Breaking a Hut
· D. A Brahmin Who Abused the Buddha Vipaśyin
· VI. Ayodhyā
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Simile of a Log and the Going Forth of Nanda, the Herdsman
· B. The Former Lives of Nanda and the Frog
· VII. The Ganges
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles
· B. The Former Lives of the Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles
· VIII. Hungry Ghosts
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Conversation with the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts
· B. The Previous Lives of the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts
· IX. Velāma
9. Chapter Nine
+ 13 sections- 13 sections
· I. Kumāravardhana
· II. Krauñcāna
· III. Aṅgadikā
· IV. Maṇivatī
· V. Sālabalā
· VI. Sālibalā
· VII. Suvarṇaprastha
· VIII. Sāketā
· IX. Rice Soup
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· A. The Peasants’ Going Forth and the Oxen’s Rebirth in Heaven
· B. The Former Lives of the Peasants and Oxen
· C. Toyikā
· X. Śrāvastī
+ 13 sections- 13 sections
· A. A Leprous Beggar Woman’s Offering of Water Used for Boiling Rice
· B. The Offerings by King Prasenajit
· C. The Former Life of King Prasenajit
· D. The Offering of a Lamp by a Beggar Woman
· E. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Offerings Made by the Buddha in His Former Lives
· F. Former Life Stories I
+ 11 sections- 11 sections
· 1. Māndhātṛ
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· a. The Story of King Māndhātṛ
· b. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: The Son of the Head of a Guild
· c. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: A Grain Merchant
· 2. Mahāsudarśana
· 3. Velāma
· 4. Kuśa
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. The Story of Prince Kuśa
· b. The Former Life of Prince Kuśa
· 5. Triśaṅku
· 6. Mahādeva
· 7. King Nimi
· 8. Ādarśamukha
· 9. Sudhana
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. The Story of King Sudhana
· b. The Story of Prince Sudhana
· 10. Viśvantara
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. Viśvantara’s Story I
· b. Viśvantara’s Story II
· 11. Saṃdhāna
· G. Former Life Stories II
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Bālāha
· 2. A King
· 3. The Snake
· 4. Two Heads
· 5. The Lapwing
· 6. The Parrot
· 7. The Banquet
· 8. The Turtle
· 9. Susena
· 10. Merchants
· H. Former Life Stories III
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· 1. Six Tusks
· 2. The Rabbit
· 3. Parents
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. The Story of Śyāma
· b. Breaking Wrong Laws
· 4. Water Born
· 5. Words of the Forest
· 6. The Elephant
· 7. The Nāga
· 8. Dhṛtarāṣṭra
· I. The Bodhisattva as Four Teachers
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· 1. The Story of the Teacher Sunetra
· 2. The Story of the Teacher Mūkapaṅgu
· 3. The Story of the Teacher Araṇemi
· 4. The Story of the Teacher Govinda
· J. The First Resolution and the First Veneration of a Buddha
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· 5. The Story of King Prabhāsa
· 6. The Story of the Potter Bṛhaddyuti
· K. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Veneration of Past Buddhas
· L. The Question of Ānanda or Section of Many Buddhas
· M. The Insult by the Brahmin Girl Cañcā
· XI. Anavatapta
+ 7 sections- 7 sections
· A. The Buddha’s Visit to Lake Anavatapta
· B. The Contest of Magical Power between Śāriputra and Mahā­maudgalyāyana
+ 6 sections- 6 sections
· 1. A Story of the Present
· 2. A Story of the Past: The Painter and the Mechanic
· 3. A Story of the Past: The Two Painters
· 4. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (1)
· 5. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (2)
· 6. A Story of the Past: The Ivory Carver and the Painter
· C. Verses of the Elders I
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Kāśyapa
· 2. Śāriputra
· 3. Maudgalyāyana
· 4. Śobhita
· 5. Sumanas
· 6. Koṭīviṃśa
· 7. Vāgīśa
· 8. Piṇḍola
· 9. Svāgata
· 10. Nandika
· D. Verses of the Elders II
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Yaśas (1)
· 2. Śaivala
· 3. Bakkula
· 4. Sthavira
· 5. The Three
· 6. Yaśas (2)
· 7. Jyotiṣka
· 8. Rāṣṭrapāla
· 9. Svāti
· 10. Jaṅghākāśyapa
· E. Verses of the Elders III
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Panthaka
· 2. Sarpadāsa
· 3. Aniruddha
· 4. Kāla
· 5. Rāhula
· 6. Nanda
· 7. Dravya
· 8. Upasena
· 9. Bhadrika
· 10. Lavaṇabhadrika
· F. Verses of the Elders IV
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· 1. Madhuvāsiṣṭha
· 2. Hetu
· 3. Kauṇḍinya
· 4. Upālin
· 5. Prabhākara
· 6. Revata
· 7. The Sugata (prose)
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· a. The Son of a Householder
· b. A Caravan Leader
· c. A Young Brahmin
· d. Bharadvāja
· e. The Cause of the False Slander by Cañcā
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· I) A Brahmin
· II) Mṛṇāla
· f. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha
· g. Uttara
· h. A Physician
· i. The Son of a Fisherman
· j. A Wrestler
· 8. The Sugata (verse)
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· a. Introduction
· b. Mṛṇāla
· c. A Brahmin
· d. Bharadvāja
· e. The Son of a Householder
· f. A Caravan Leader
· g. The Son of a Fisherman
· h. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha
· i. A Physician
· j. A Wrestler
· k. Uttara
· l. Conclusion
· G. The Invitation by Viśākhā
· XII. Nagarabindu
· XIII. Vaiśālī
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· A. The Invitation by Dhanika and His Family
· B. The Former Lives of Dhanika and His Family
· C. The Rules on Food
10. Chapter Ten
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· I. The Sick
· II. Foods
· III. Breakfast
· IV. Leftovers
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· A. Alms-Food Obtained Previously
· B. Leftovers Taken by Monks to the Monastery
· C. Leftovers Brought by Laymen
· V. Fruits Growing in the Forest
· VI. Lotus
· VII. Lotus Roots
· VIII. Miṇḍhaka
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. The Conversion of Miṇḍhaka
· B. Invitation after Mealtime
· C. The Acceptance of Money
· D. The Acceptance of Guḍa
· E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family
11. Chapter Eleven
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· I. The Drink Offered by Kaineya Was Received
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Prose)
+ 6 sections- 6 sections
· 1. The Sermon to the Four Great Kings
· 2. The Former Lives of the Four Great Kings
· 3. Kaineya Offers Drinks to the Blessed One
· 4. Śaila and Kaineya Go Forth
· 5. The Instruction by Three Disciples of the Buddha
· 6. The Former Lives of the Three Disciples
· B. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Verse)
· II. The Town of Kāśi, Barley Porridge
· III. Khādyaka in Pāpā
· IV. Doubts
· V. Foul Foods
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. A Story of the Present about the Great Peacock Charm
· B. Stories of the Buddha’s Former Lives Related to the Great Peacock Charm
ab. Abbreviations
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· 1. A Work Referred to in the Bhaiṣajyavastu
· 2. Works Related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu
· 3. Works Referred to in the Introduction, Notes, etc.
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Bhaiṣajyavastu, “The Chapter on Medicines,” is a part of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, the corpus of monastic law of one of the most influential Buddhist schools in India. This chapter deals with monastic regulations about medicines. At the same time, it also includes various elements not restricted to such rules: stories of the Buddha and his disciples, a lengthy story of the Buddha’s journey for the purpose of quelling an epidemic and converting a nāga, a number of stories of the Buddha’s former lives narrated by the Buddha himself, and a series of verses recited by the Buddha and his disciples about their former lives. Thus, this chapter preserves not only interesting information about medical knowledge shared by ancient Indian Buddhist monastics but also an abundance of Buddhist narrative literature.


ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

This text was translated by the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team. Fumi Yao translated the Tibetan text into English and prepared the ancillary materials. Shayne Clarke proofread the translation and ancillary materials.

The translation has been completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


ac.­2

We gratefully acknowledge the generous sponsorship of Leo Tong Chen and his family; Zhang Wei, Li Mo, Zhang Mo Tong and Zhang Mo Lin; (Chi Xian Ren) Mao Gui Rong and Chi Mei; and Joseph Tse 謝偉傑, Patricia Tse 鄒碧玲 and family, in dedication to all eczema sufferers. Their support has helped make the work on this translation possible.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The Bhaiṣajyavastu, “The Chapter on Medicines,” is the sixth chapter of the Vinayavastu, “The Chapters on Monastic Discipline,” of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya. The Mūlasarvāstivāda was one of the most influential Buddhist schools in India, and its Vinaya, the corpus of monastic law, is reported to have circulated not only in various parts of the Indian subcontinent but also in Southeast Asia, at least in the late seventh century. When this Vinaya was composed is an unresolved question, and we are presently unable to say more than that the corpus seems to have taken its present shape in the first few centuries of the common era.1


Text Body

The Translation
From The Chapters on Monastic Discipline
The Chapter on Medicines

p.

General Summary of the Contents of the Chapter on Medicines

[V1] [F.277.b]


p.­1
Medicines, Mahāsenā,
Rājagṛha, Veṇu,
Carpenter, Icchānaṅgalā,
Kimpilā, Ādirājya,
Kumāravardhana, Sick People, and Kaineya.
p.­2

The entire chapter is thus summarized.


1.

Chapter One

1.­1

Summary of Contents:

The Authorization of Medicines,
Fat, Scabies, Collyrium,
A Man Gone Mad, Pilinda,
Revata, and Sauvīraka.

I. The Authorization of Medicines

1.­2

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was staying in the Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park. On that occasion some monks [F.278.a] caught an autumn disease. Because they had caught an autumn disease, they turned pale, became emaciated, lost their strength, and were weakened.

II. Fat

III. Scabies

IV. Collyrium

V. A Man Gone Mad32

VI. Pilinda33

VII. Revata

A. Rice Flour and Guḍa

B. Barley Flour and Guḍa

VIII. Sauvīraka


2.

Chapter Two

2.­1

Summary of Contents:

Mahāsenā, Flesh, Hemorrhoids,
One Who Has a Wind Illness, Pūrṇa,
Agnidatta, be’i ra to,
One Who Has Clouds, and Crows.38

I. Mahāsenā

2.­2

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was once traveling through the country of Kāśi and arrived in Vārāṇasī. He stayed in the Deer Park at Ṛṣivadana near Vārāṇasī.


2.­3

A householder named Mahāsena was living in Vārāṇasī. He was rich and had great wealth and many possessions. His wife’s name was Mahāsenā. Both he and his wife were pious and good and had virtuous dispositions. Mahāsena heard that the Buddha, the Blessed One, had arrived in Vārāṇasī, having traveled through the country of Kāśi, and that he was staying in the Deer Park at Ṛṣivadana near Vārāṇasī. When Mahāsena heard that, he thought, “Although the Blessed One has been invited to my house many times and has had meals, he has never been offered all the requisites. Now I will offer the Blessed One all the requisites for three months.” [F.284.b]

2.­4

He went to the Blessed One, and when he arrived, he bowed down until his forehead touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then he sat down to one side.39 When he had sat down to one side, the Blessed One, through talk consistent with the Dharma, instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted the householder Mahāsena. After he had instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted him in a variety of ways through talk consistent with the Dharma, the Blessed One remained silent. Then the householder Mahāsena praised and rejoiced in the words of the Blessed One. He rose from his seat, draped his upper robe over one shoulder, made the gesture of supplication to the Blessed One, and said to him, “May the Blessed One together with the community of monks assent to my offer of the requisites for three months: namely, robes, almsfood, bedding and seats, and medicines for the sick.”

2.­5

The Blessed One assented to the householder Mahāsena by remaining silent. The householder Mahāsena again praised and rejoiced in the words of the Blessed One. He bowed down until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, then rose from his seat and departed.

2.­6

The Blessed One together with the community of monks was then provided by the householder Mahāsena with the requisites, namely, robes, almsfood, bedding and seats, and medicines for the sick, for three months. The householder Mahāsena always rose at dawn, bowed down until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, and visited the monks. There was a monk who was ill, seriously ill, afflicted with a painful illness. [F.285.a] The physician told him, “Drink meat broth.” At that time, the householder Mahāsena went to that monk. When Mahāsena arrived, he bowed down until his forehead touched the feet of the monk, and he asked, “Noble one, what did the physician prescribe for you?”

2.­7

“The physician said to drink meat broth,” replied the sick monk.

Then the householder Mahāsena went to his own house and said to his wife, “Since the physician told Master So-and-so to drink meat broth, prepare it and give it to him.”

2.­8

The householder Mahāsena’s wife handed money to a girl and sent her to the market. However, the king’s son was born on that day, and the following prohibition was proclaimed with the ringing of bells: “Nobody may kill beings. Whoever kills any living being will be severely punished.” Therefore, the girl could not get meat in the market even with the money.

2.­9

When the girl reported this matter in detail to the householder Mahāsena, the householder Mahāsena’s wife thought, “Since we have offered the community of monks headed by the Buddha all the requisites, it would not be good if a monk dies because of a lack of medicine.” She took a sharp knife, entered the house, cut off some flesh from her thigh, handed it to the girl, and said, “Girl, make broth from this flesh and take it to the noble one So-and-so.”

2.­10

The girl took the broth to him, and the monk consumed the broth and recovered his health. [B23] The monk knew that the householder’s wife had served him with her own flesh in that way and thought, “It is not appropriate for me to be lying down after consuming what was given with faith. Now I will exert myself in order to attain what I have not attained, realize what I have not realized, and actualize what I have not actualized.” He then became diligent. Exerting himself, endeavoring and striving, he came to understand saṃsāra’s ever-revolving40 five cycles; [F.285.b] overthrew all conditioned states by nature subject to degradation, decline, dispersal, and destruction; abandoned all defilements; realized the state of an arhat; and became an arhat. He was free from desire for the three realms‍—one for whom a lump of dirt was equal to gold, for whom space was equal to the palm of his hand, who accepted being cut by an adze and being anointed with sandal paste as the same, and whose knowledge had shattered the eggshell of ignorance. He attained knowledge, supernormal knowledge, and discerning wisdom; he turned his back on worldly profit, desires, and honors; and he became an object of veneration, respect, and praise for the gods including Indra and Upendra.

2.­11

There is nothing, even in the slightest, that the buddhas, the blessed ones, do not know, see, comprehend, or understand. Early the next morning, the Blessed One dressed, took his bowl and his robe, and, surrounded by a group of monks, went to the house of the householder Mahāsena, followed by the community of monks. When the Blessed One arrived, he sat on the seat prepared for him in front of the community of monks. When he had sat down, the Blessed One said to the householder Mahāsena, “Householder, the householder’s wife Mahāsenā is nowhere to be seen. Where is she?”

“Blessed One, she is in the innermost apartment because she cannot move.”

2.­12

The majesty of the buddhas, the blessed ones, is inconceivable. The Blessed One exercised his magical power so that her wound healed and her own color, skin, and hair returned. Faith then having arisen in the householder Mahāsena’s wife, she appeared at the door and touched the Blessed One’s feet. [F.286.a] The Blessed One asked, “Why has this householder’s wife experienced the power of a bodhisattva?”


2.­13

She spoke this verse in reply:

“In saṃsāra, with no effort
A body is exceedingly easy to attain.
But even during ten billion eons,
It is exceedingly difficult to meet a person worthy of gifts.”
2.­14

The householder Mahāsena then knew that the community of monks headed by the Buddha had sat down in comfort, and with his own hands he served and satisfied them with a pure and fine meal. When, with his own hands, he had served and satisfied them in a variety of ways with a pure and fine meal, and knowing that the Blessed One had finished his meal and washed his hands and his bowl, the householder took a low seat and sat before the Blessed One in order to hear the Dharma. Then the Blessed One, through talk consistent with the Dharma, instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted the householder Mahāsena. After having instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted the householder Mahāsena in a variety of ways through talk consistent with the Dharma, the Blessed One rose from his seat and departed.

2.­15

Then the Blessed One went to the monastery and sat on the seat prepared for him in front of the community of monks. When he had sat down, the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, human flesh is the worst of all kinds of flesh. Therefore, monks should not eat human flesh. If a monk eats human flesh, he becomes guilty of a sthūlātyaya offense. I will now establish rules of customary behavior for an elder monk of the community. [F.286.b] If flesh is offered, an elder monk of the community should ask, ‘What flesh is this?’ If the elder monk of the community cannot, the second elder monk should ask. If the elder monk of the community does not act in accordance with the established rules of customary behavior, he becomes guilty of an offense.”

2.­16

All of the monks, feeling doubtful, inquired of the Buddha, the Blessed One, the one who severs all doubts, “How is it, O Honored One, that the householder Mahāsena’s wife served this monk with her own flesh, and, in dependence upon Mahāsenā, this monk abandoned all the defilements and actualized the state of an arhat?”

2.­17

“Listen well, monks,” the Blessed One replied, “and bear in mind how, not only in the present but also in the past, she served this monk with her own flesh, and how this monk actualized the five kinds of supernormal knowledge. I will tell you about it.

2.­18

“A long time ago, monks, there was a householder named Mahāsena who lived in Vārāṇasī, and his wife’s name was Mahāsenā. At that time, a brahmin schoolteacher was teaching brahmanical mantras to five hundred sons of brahmins. Faith in the brahmin having arisen in the householder Mahāsena, he offered all the requisites to him and his attendants. The householder Mahāsena honored the brahmin and his attendants.

2.­19

“The householder always used to rise at dawn and look after the sick. A young brahmin then became seriously ill, afflicted with a painful illness. The physician told him, ‘Drink meat broth.’ Then the householder Mahāsena went to the young brahmin. When he arrived, he bowed and asked, ‘Young brahmin, what did the physician prescribe for you?’

2.­20

“ ‘The physician told me to drink meat broth,’ the young brahmin replied.

“Then the householder Mahāsena [F.287.a] went to his own house and said to his wife, ‘Since the physician told the young brahmin So-and-so to drink meat broth, prepare it and give it to him.’

2.­21

“The householder Mahāsena’s wife handed money to a girl and sent her to the market. However, the king’s son was born on that day, and the following prohibition was proclaimed with the ringing of bells: ‘Nobody may kill beings. Whoever kills any being will be severely punished.’ Therefore, the girl could not get meat in the market even with the money.

2.­22

“When the girl reported this matter in detail to the householder Mahāsena’s wife, the householder Mahāsena’s wife thought, ‘Since we have offered this brahmin and his attendants all the requisites, it would not be good if a young brahmin dies because of a lack of medicine.’ She took a sharp knife, entered the house, cut off some flesh from her thigh, handed it to the girl, and said, ‘Girl, make broth from this flesh and take it to the young brahmin So-and-so.’

2.­23

“The girl took it to him and the young brahmin consumed it and recovered his health. The young brahmin knew that the householder’s wife had served him with her own flesh in that way and thought, ‘It is not appropriate for me to be lying down after consuming what was given with faith. Now I will endeavor to attain what I have not attained, realize what I have not realized, and actualize what I have not actualized.’ He then went to a quiet place and actualized the five kinds of supernormal knowledge.

2.­24

“What do you think, monks? The one who was the householder Mahāsena’s wife at that time, on that occasion, was indeed this householder Mahāsena’s wife. The one who was the young brahmin at that time, on that occasion, was indeed this monk. She then served this monk with her own flesh and he, in dependence upon her, actualized the five kinds of supernormal knowledge. [F.287.b] Now, too, she served this monk with her own flesh, and this monk, in dependence upon her, abandoned all defilements and actualized the state of an arhat.

2.­25

“Therefore, monks, the maturation of entirely negative actions is entirely negative; the maturation of entirely positive actions is entirely positive; the maturation of those that are mixed is mixed. Therefore, monks, henceforth you should abandon entirely negative and mixed actions, and you should seek entirely positive actions. Monks, that is how you must train.”

II. Flesh41

A. Elephant Flesh

2.­26

The following took place in Śrāvastī.


2.­27

At a certain time all the elephants of King Prasenajit of Kosala had died. Since a famine had broken out, brahmins and householders started to eat elephant flesh. Early in the morning, the group of six monks dressed, took their bowls and their robes, and entered Śrāvastī for alms. When they entered a house where a householder was cooking elephant flesh in a pot, the householder’s wife said, “Noble ones, we have nothing to offer you. Please leave.”

2.­28

“Is there something cooking in this pot?” asked the monks.

“Noble ones, this is elephant flesh. Do you eat elephant flesh?”

“Our lives depend on you. If you eat it, please give it to us, too.”

2.­29

She then offered the elephant flesh to them. When they had gone out with their bowls full, they were seen by the other monks who were going for alms. When the other monks saw the group of six monks, they asked them, “O group of six, if your bowls are full, what’s in them?”

“We have some elephant flesh,” they replied.

2.­30

“Do you eat elephant flesh?”

“Venerables, a famine has broken out. If we cannot get anything else, should we die of hunger?” [F.288.a]

2.­31

When the monks reported this matter to the Blessed One, the Blessed One said, “Monks, since all the king’s elephants have died, if the king hears that you ate elephant flesh, will he not think, ‘Because the noble ones eat elephant flesh, my elephants have died,’ because there are gods, nāgas, humans, and other nonhuman creatures who have faith in you?42 Monks should not eat elephant flesh. If a monk eats elephant flesh, he becomes guilty of an offense. Horse flesh is the same as elephant flesh.”

B. Nāga Flesh

2.­32

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was once staying on the bank of Ṛṣi Gargā Pond in the country of Campā.


2.­33

The nāga of Campā was pious and good and had a virtuous disposition. On the eighth and the fourteenth days of every month, he left his abode, practiced the eightfold abstinence, illuminated the place, expanded his body, and gave it to others. He never harmed or frightened any beings in the world.

2.­34

Since a famine had broken out, people who had lost their livelihoods, namely, herdsmen, shepherds, herb gatherers, wood gatherers, people making a living properly, and people making a living improperly, started to cut off pieces of the nāga’s flesh and eat them.

2.­35

Early in the morning the group of six monks dressed, took their bowls and their robes, and entered the town for alms. When they entered a house where a householder was cooking nāga flesh in a pot, the householder’s wife said, “Noble ones, we have nothing to offer you. Please leave.”

2.­36

“Is there something cooking in this pot?” asked the monks.

“Noble ones, this is nāga flesh. Do you eat nāga flesh?”

“Our lives [F.288.b] depend on you. If you eat it, please give it to us, too.”

2.­37

She then offered the nāga flesh to them. Most of the other people then started to eat nāga flesh too, thinking, “Even the noble ones eat it.” At that time, the wife of the nāga of Campā thought, “Because even these noble ones eat nāga flesh, most people now eat it too. How long does my husband have to bear his pain? I will ask the Blessed One.”

2.­38

Then the wife of the nāga of Campā, after the first watch of that night,43 went to the Blessed One, showing her noble figure. When she arrived, she bowed down until her forehead touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then she sat down to one side. At that time, the figure of the wife of the nāga of Campā radiated light, the vast splendor of which filled the entire neighborhood of Ṛṣi Gargā Pond. After she sat down, the wife of the nāga of Campā said to the Blessed One, “Honored One, my husband is pious and good and has a virtuous disposition. On the eighth and the fourteenth days of every month, he leaves his abode, practices the eightfold abstinence, and gives his body to others. He never harms or frightens any beings in the world. Since a famine has broken out, people who have lost their livelihoods, namely, herdsmen, shepherds, herb gatherers, wood gatherers, people making a living properly, and people making a living improperly, cut off pieces of the nāga’s flesh and eat them. The noble ones saw this and they too started to eat the flesh. Because the noble ones eat it, most people have also started to cut it off and eat it. How long does my husband have to bear his pain? Alas, Blessed One, please have compassion and devise some reason for the noble ones to resolve not to eat nāga flesh.” [F.289.a]

2.­39

The Blessed One assented to the wife of the nāga of Campā by remaining silent. The wife of the nāga of Campā, knowing that the Blessed One had assented by remaining silent, bowed down until her forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet and then disappeared from that very place. Then, when the night had passed, the Blessed One sat on the seat prepared for him in front of the community of monks. When he had sat down, the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, last night the wife of the nāga of Campā came to me after the first watch of the night, showing her noble figure. When she arrived, she bowed down until her forehead touched my feet, and then she sat down to one side. At that time, the figure of the wife of the nāga of Campā radiated light, the vast splendor of which filled the entire neighborhood of Ṛṣi Gargā Pond. After she had sat down, the wife of the Nāga of Campā said to me, ‘Honored One, my husband is pious and good and has a virtuous disposition. On the eighth and the fourteenth days of every month, he leaves his abode, practices the eightfold abstinence, and gives his body to others. He never harms or frightens any beings in the world. Since a famine has broken out, people who have lost their livelihoods, namely, herdsmen, shepherds, herb gatherers, wood gatherers, people making a living properly, and people making a living improperly, cut off pieces of the nāga’s flesh and eat them. When they began to eat the flesh, the noble ones also started to eat it. Because the noble ones also eat the flesh, most people have also started to cut it off and eat it too. How long does my husband have to bear his pain? Alas, Blessed One, please have compassion and devise some reason for the noble ones to resolve not to eat nāga flesh.’ [F.289.b] I assented to the wife of the nāga of Campā by remaining silent, and the wife of the nāga of Campā, knowing that I had assented by remaining silent, bowed down until her forehead touched my feet and then disappeared from that very place. Now the gods also criticize, insult, and disparage the monks who ate the nāga flesh, saying, ‘Those monks, the sons of the Śākyans, have fallen away from the virtuous dharmas.’ This incident is not good, not appropriate. Therefore, monks, monks should not eat nāga flesh. If a monk eats nāga flesh, he becomes guilty of an offense.”

III. Hemorrhoids

2.­40

The Blessed One was once traveling through the country of Magadha and arrived at Rājagṛha. He stayed in Kalandaka­nivāpa44 Bamboo Grove near Rājagṛha.


2.­41

When King Śreṇya Bimbisāra of Magadha heard that the Buddha, the Blessed One, was traveling through the country of Magadha, had arrived at Rājagṛha, and was staying in Kalandaka­nivāpa Bamboo Grove near Rājagṛha, he thought, “Although I have invited the Blessed One many times and the Blessed One has had meals, he has never been offered all the requisites for three months. Now I will offer the Blessed One all the requisites for three months, and I will also send Jīvaka, the chief physician.”

2.­42

The king went to the Blessed One displaying royal treasures and great royal power. When the king arrived, he bowed down until his forehead touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then he sat down to one side. When he had sat down to one side, the Blessed One, through talk consistent with the Dharma, instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted King Śreṇya Bimbisāra of Magadha. [F.290.a] After he had instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted the king in a variety of ways through talk consistent with the Dharma, the Blessed One remained silent. Then King Śreṇya Bimbisāra of Magadha rose from his seat, draped his upper robe over one shoulder, knelt on his right knee, made the gesture of supplication to the Blessed One, and said, “May the Blessed One together with the community of monks assent to my offer of the requisites, namely, robes, almsfood, bedding and seats, and medicines for the sick, along with Jīvaka, the chief physician, for three months.”

2.­43

The Blessed One assented to King Śreṇya Bimbisāra of Magadha by remaining silent. King Śreṇya Bimbisāra of Magadha, knowing that the Blessed One had assented by remaining silent, rose from his seat, bowed down until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, and departed. The Blessed One together with the community of monks was provided by King Śreṇya Bimbisāra of Magadha with all the requisites, namely, robes, almsfood, bedding and seats, and medicines for the sick, along with Jīvaka, the chief physician, for three months.

2.­44

When King Prasenajit of Kosala heard that the Blessed One together with the community of disciples had been provided by King Śreṇya Bimbisāra of Magadha with all the requisites, along with Jīvaka, the chief physician, for three months, he thought, “He is an anointed kṣatriya king, and I am also an anointed kṣatriya king. His chief physician is Jīvaka, and my chief physician is Ātreya.45 [F.290.b] So, I will offer the Blessed One together with the community of disciples all the requisites, along with Ātreya, the chief physician, when the Blessed One comes to Śrāvastī.”

2.­45

The Blessed One stayed at Rājagṛha during the rainy season. When the three months of the rainy season had passed, he finished mending his robes, took his bowl and his robe, and traveled through the country toward Śrāvastī, surrounded by a group of monks and followed by the community of monks. In due course, the Blessed One, traveling through the country, arrived in Śrāvastī and stayed in Śrāvastī, in the Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park.

2.­46

When King Prasenajit of Kosala heard that the Blessed One, traveling through the country of Kosala, had arrived in Śrāvastī and was staying in Śrāvastī, in the Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park, he left Śrāvastī and went to the Blessed One. When the king arrived, he bowed down until his forehead touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then he sat down to one side. When he had sat down to one side, the Blessed One, through talk consistent with the Dharma, instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted King Prasenajit of Kosala. After he had instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted him in a variety of ways through talk consistent with the Dharma, the Blessed One remained silent. Then King Prasenajit of Kosala rose from his seat, draped his upper robe over one shoulder, knelt on his right knee, made the gesture of supplication to the Blessed One, and said, [F.291.a] “May the Blessed One together with the community of monks assent to my offer of the requisites, namely, robes, almsfood, bedding and seats, and medicines for the sick, along with Ātreya, the chief physician, for three months.”

2.­47

The Blessed One assented to King Prasenajit of Kosala by remaining silent. King Prasenajit of Kosala, knowing that the Blessed One had assented by remaining silent, rose from his seat, bowed down until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, and departed. The Blessed One together with the community of monks was provided by King Prasenajit of Kosala with all the requisites, along with Ātreya, the chief physician, for three months.

2.­48

King Prasenajit of Kosala always rose at dawn, bowed down until his forehead touched the feet of the Blessed One, and visited the sick monks.

2.­49

At that time, a monk had hemorrhoids and turned pale, became emaciated, lost his strength, and was weakened. King Prasenajit of Kosala saw him and asked, “Noble one, why have you turned pale, become emaciated, lost your strength, and been weakened?”

“Your Majesty, I have hemorrhoids,” answered the monk.

2.­50

The king then ordered Ātreya, the chief physician, “Treat this monk.”

“Certainly, Your Majesty,” Ātreya replied.

2.­51

Because Ātreya was impious, he did not treat the monk. Later, the king saw the monk again and asked him, “Noble one, were you not treated by Ātreya?”

“I was not, Your Majesty,” answered the monk.

2.­52

Then the king became enraged. He summoned Ātreya by messenger and warned, “If you treat this monk, all will be fine. But if you do not, I will curtail your allotment.”

2.­53

Ātreya, who was naturally impious, himself became very angry and thought, [F.291.b] “His Majesty will curtail my allotment because of this shaven-headed śramaṇa.” Ātreya tied the monk up at the gate of the Jetavana and began surgery. The monk, growing afraid, fearful, and hurt, and experiencing acute, intolerable, and unpleasant pain, wondered to himself, “Does the Blessed One not observe me afraid, fearful, and hurt?”

2.­54

There is nothing, even in the slightest, that the buddhas, the blessed ones, do not know, see, comprehend, or understand. When the Blessed One, spurred by great compassion, went there, Ātreya, the chief physician, saw the Blessed One arrive. Upon seeing him, Ātreya, fiercely angry, called out to the Blessed One, “Come here, śramaṇa, son of a slave woman‍—look at your disciple’s anus cut open!”

2.­55

Then the Blessed One left, returned to the monastery, and sat on the seat prepared for him. When he had sat down, the Blessed One smiled.46

2.­56

It naturally occurs that whenever the buddhas, the blessed ones, smile, rays of blue, yellow, red, and white light emanate from their mouths. Some of the rays stream downward and some stream upward.

2.­57

Those rays that stream downward go to the hells of Reviving, Black Cord, Being Crushed, Scream, Great Scream, Heat, Intense Heat, Incessant, Blisters, Burst Blisters, Aṭaṭa, Hahava, Huhuva, Water Lily, Lotus, and Great Lotus. They alight on and cool those in the hot hells and alight on and warm those in the cold hells. [F.292.a] Thus, each of the various pains of those beings in hell ceases. When those beings think, “Sirs, have we died here and been reborn elsewhere?” the blessed ones send an emanation to engender their faith. Seeing it, they think, “Sirs, we have not died here and been reborn elsewhere. Each of our various pains ceased on account of the power of this being we have never seen before.” Their minds filled with faith in the emanation, they exhaust the karma that led them to experience the hells and are reborn among gods and humans as vessels for seeing the truths.

2.­58

Those rays that stream upward go to the gods attendant on the Four Great Kings, the Thirty-Three Gods, the gods of Yāma, Tuṣita, Nirmāṇarati, and Para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin, the gods attendant on Brahmā, and the gods of Brahma­purohita, Mahābrahman, Parīttābha, Apramāṇābha, Ābhāsvara, Parīttaśubha, Apramāṇaśubha, Śubhakṛtsna, Anabhraka, Puṇyaprasava, Bṛhatphala, Abṛha, Atapa, Sudṛśa, Sudarśana, and Akaniṣṭha. They resonate with the words “impermanent,” “subject to suffering,” “empty,” and “selfless,” and they proclaim these two verses:

2.­59
“Take action! Go forth!
Apply yourself to the Buddha’s teachings!
As an elephant destroys a house made of reeds,
Destroy the army of Death!
2.­60
“Those who, with great care,
Exert themselves in this Dharma and Vinaya
Abandon the course of rebirth
And bring an end to suffering!”47
2.­61

Then the rays of light, [F.292.b] after unfurling through the worlds of the great billionfold universe, later return to the Blessed One. The rays disappear into the space behind the Blessed One when the Blessed One intends to explain actions of the past. They disappear into the space in front of the Blessed One when the Blessed One intends to explain the future. They disappear into the soles of his feet when the Blessed One intends to explain rebirth in the hells. They disappear into his heels when the Blessed One intends to explain rebirth as an animal. They disappear into his big toe when the Blessed One intends to explain rebirth as a hungry ghost. They disappear into his knees when the Blessed One intends to explain rebirth as a human. They disappear into his left palm when the Blessed One intends to explain rebirth as a wheel-turning king of power.48 They disappear into his right palm when the Blessed One intends to explain rebirth as a wheel-turning king. They disappear into his navel when the Blessed One intends to explain rebirth as a god. They disappear into his mouth when the Blessed One intends to explain the awakening of a disciple. They disappear into the circle of hair between his eyebrows when the Blessed One intends to explain the awakening of a self-awakened one. They disappear into the crown of his head when the Blessed One intends to explain complete and perfect awakening.

2.­62

The rays of light then circled the Blessed One three times and disappeared into the soles of his feet.49 The venerable Ānanda made the gesture of supplication to the Blessed One and said:

2.­63
“A mass made brilliant by thousands of colors
Came forth from your mouth,
Like the sun rising,
Shining in every direction.”
2.­64

And Ānanda then spoke these verses:

“One who has become a buddha, the supreme cause in the world,
Free from restlessness, discouragement, and self-satisfaction,
A victor who has subdued enemies‍—
Not without cause does he flash a smile,
White like a lotus root or a conch shell.
2.­65
“Therefore, O resolute one, please know when the time is right, [F.293.a]
O lord of victors, supreme Muni,
And resolve the doubts of your listeners who desire to hear
With words that are reliable, sublime, and excellent.
2.­66
“Protectors, perfectly awakened ones,
Who are steady like the mountains in the middle of the ocean,
Do not smile accidentally.
These many people desire to hear
For what reason the resolute one smiles.”
2.­67

“Ānanda,” said the Blessed One, “that is exactly it! Tathāgatas, arhats, perfectly awakened ones do not smile without cause or condition. Ānanda, Ātreya, the chief physician, is degenerate and will meet an untimely end. He said ‘son of a slave woman’ to the Tathāgata, who has had no fault in his conduct since he assumed Mahāsammata’s lineage. In seven days Ātreya will die, vomiting blood. With the destruction of his body, he will be reborn among the hell beings. Therefore, monks, you should not treat Ātreya or others like Ātreya with respect. You should not surgically remove hemorrhoids. Treatment for hemorrhoids should be done in two ways: mantras50 and medicines. If a monk surgically removes hemorrhoids or treats Ātreya or others like Ātreya with respect, the monk becomes guilty of an offense.”

2.­68

The monk died from the particular harm done by Ātreya. The ministers reported to King Prasenajit, “Your Majesty, Ātreya said ‘son of a slave woman’ to the Blessed One and that monk died of the particular harm done by Ātreya.”

2.­69

The king was then very much enraged and shouted to his ministers, “Sirs, I have renounced Ātreya, the chief physician. [F.293.b] Go!”51

2.­70

“Your Majesty,” said the ministers, “why would you want to kill he who is already dead? The Blessed One predicted, ‘In seven days he will die, vomiting blood. With the destruction of his body, he will be reborn among the hell beings.’ ”

“Then banish him from my country,” ordered the king.

2.­71

The ministers banished Ātreya and he went to a country called Sāketā. The gods living in Sāketā greatly reviled him: “You stupid man, why should you who has said ‘son of a slave woman’ to the protector of the three realms stay here?” And so they expelled Ātreya. Then he went to Vārāṇasī. Then, having been expelled from there, he went to Vaiśālī. Then, having been expelled from there, he went to Campā. Then, having been expelled from there, he went to Rājagṛha. Then, having been expelled from there, he dwelt under a tree. Then, having been expelled from there by the gods living in the tree, Ātreya went to the shores of a river, a lake, and a pond. Even there he could not find an opportunity to stay and thought, “Although even foxes find opportunities to stay on this continent of Jambu, I have nowhere to stay even under a tree, at a lake, or at a pond.” Then, the fierce agony arose for him in which one dies vomiting blood. As soon as he died, he was reborn in the great hell of Incessant.


2.­72

Then the Blessed One spoke these verses about that incident:

“Words, like an axe, hurtle forth from the mouth
Of a person who has been reborn.
Those who speak ill
Cut themselves with the words they say.
2.­73
“Those who praise those who are worthy of reproach
And reproach those who are worthy of praise
Offend with the mouth,
Because of which they fail to obtain happiness.
2.­74
“The loss of one who, in this world,
Loses his own wealth by gambling is small. [F.294.a]
The loss of one who
Thinks ill of the sugatas is great.
2.­75
“After reproaching52 the noble ones and, with body and speech,
Doing evil, he will go to the hell of Burst Blisters
And stay there for one hundred thousand years. Then he will go to the hell of Blisters
And stay there for forty-one thousand years.”53 54

IV. One Who Has a Wind Illness

2.­76

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was once traveling through the country of Kāśi and stayed overnight in a town where the boundary had not been fixed. There the Blessed One caught a wind illness. The venerable Ānanda thought, “Although I have attended to the Blessed One at my own discretion many times, I have never asked a physician for advice. Now I will ask a physician for advice.” He went to a physician and said, “Sir, since the Blessed One has a disease like this, prescribe medicine for him.”

2.­77

“Noble one,” said the physician, “have him eat the three spices55 boiled with a good amount of ghee,56 and he will recover his health.”

Then the venerable Ānanda himself prepared and cooked the food and offered it to the Blessed One.

2.­78

The buddhas, the blessed ones, ask though they already know. The Buddha, the Blessed One, asked the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, what is this?”

Ānanda said, “Honored One, I thought, ‘Although I have attended to the Blessed One at my own discretion many times, I have never asked a physician for advice. Now I will ask a physician for advice.’ When I consulted a physician, he said, ‘Noble one, have him eat the three spices boiled with a good amount of ghee, and he will recover his health.’ So I myself prepared and cooked it.”

2.­79

“Ānanda, where did you make it?”

“Within the boundary.”57

2.­80

“Where did you put it?”58

“Within the boundary.”

2.­81

“Who cooked it?”

“I did, [F.294.b] within the boundary.”

2.­82

“Ānanda, what was cooked within the boundary and was left within the boundary should not be eaten. What was cooked within the boundary and was left outside the boundary should not be eaten. What was cooked outside the boundary and was left within the boundary should not be eaten. What was cooked outside the boundary and was left outside the boundary may be eaten. Ānanda, what was cooked by a monk, whether within the boundary or outside the boundary, should not be eaten in any situation.”

The Blessed One concluded, “What was cooked by a monk should not be eaten in any situation.”

2.­83

A householder living in Śrāvastī went to the Blessed One. When the householder arrived, he bowed down until his forehead touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then he sat down to one side. When he had sat down to one side, the Blessed One, through talk consistent with the Dharma, instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted the householder. After he had … delighted him in a variety of ways … the Blessed One remained silent. Then the householder rose from his seat, draped his upper robe over one shoulder, made the gesture of supplication to the Blessed One, and said to him, “May the Blessed One together with the community of monks assent to my offer of a meal at my house tomorrow.” … Then the householder let the Blessed One know the time by messenger: “Honored One, the time has arrived. May the Blessed One know that the meal is ready.”

2.­84

Early in the morning the community of monks dressed, took their bowls and their robes, and [F.295.a] went to the house of the householder. The Blessed One refrained from going for almsfood.

2.­85

The buddhas, the blessed ones, refrain from going for almsfood for five reasons. What are the five? Wishing to look after the sick, wishing to look after the living quarters, wishing to go into seclusion, wishing to teach the Dharma to the gods, and wishing to establish a rule of training in the Vinaya for the disciples. In this case, the Blessed One refrained from going for almsfood because he wished to establish a rule of training in the Vinaya for the disciples.

2.­86

The venerable Ānanda was in charge of receiving almsfood for the Blessed One. He was there given boiled rice, which was not fully cooked, and he thought, “It has not been long since the Blessed One recovered, and this rice is not fully cooked. So, if he has this rice, his illness may return. Although the Blessed One has not authorized cooking such food, it is probable that this situation will lead him to authorize cooking it.” Ānanda took a pitcher, poured water into the boiled rice, and cooked it until it was done. Then he offered the boiled rice to the Blessed One.

2.­87

The buddhas, the blessed ones, ask though they already know. The Buddha, the Blessed One, asked the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, does the entire community have the same boiled rice as this?”

“No, they do not, Honored One. Theirs is not fully cooked.”

2.­88

“Then where did it come from?”

When Ānanda related to the Blessed One in detail what had happened, the Blessed One said, “Good, good, Ānanda! [F.295.b] You know even what I have not authorized. On account of that, I authorize monks to receive boiled rice that is not fully cooked and to cook and eat it.”

2.­89

After the Blessed One said “monks may receive boiled rice that is not fully cooked and cook and eat it,” the group of six monks received raw rice59 and began to cook and eat it.

2.­90

When the monks reported this matter to the Blessed One, the Blessed One said, “You may receive, cook, and eat boiled rice, one third of which is cooked. You may receive and eat vegetables, flowers, fruits, fish, and meat after their color changes. You may receive, boil, and drink liquids such as milk when they have been boiled two or three times. You should not have any regrets about consuming such things. If you consume them in other ways, you become guilty of an offense.”

V. Pūrṇa60

2.­91

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was once staying in the Jetavana, in the Park of Anāthapiṇḍada.


2.­92

At that time a householder named Bhava was living in a city called Sūrpāraka. He was rich and had great wealth and many possessions, with holdings both vast and extensive. He possessed wealth equal to that of Vaiśravaṇa, rivaling that of Vaiśravaṇa. Bhava took a wife from a family of equal rank, and Bhava and his wife played, made love, and enjoyed themselves, and thus the wife conceived a child. After eight or nine months, a boy who was well proportioned, attractive, and pleasant to behold was born. At the birth, the householder held a great celebration for twenty-one days and, to give the baby a name, he asked, “What name shall we give this boy?”

2.­93

His kinsmen [F.296.a] suggested, “Since this boy is the son of the householder Bhava, let us name him Bhavila.” Thus the boy was named Bhavila.

2.­94

Then the couple again played, made love, and enjoyed themselves, and another boy was born and named Bhavatrāta.

And then again a boy was born to the householder and was named Bhavanandin.

2.­95

Later, the householder Bhava caught an illness and spoke very harsh words, and thus his wife and sons abandoned him. He had a servant girl, and she thought, “Although my master won possessions through hundreds of thousands of means, he now has an illness and was abandoned even by his wife and sons. If I61 give up on my master, that would not be appropriate for me.”

2.­96

She went to a physician and asked, “Master, do you know the householder Bhava?”

“Yes, I do. What happened to him?”

2.­97

“He has such-and-such kind of illness, and he was abandoned by his wife and sons. Prescribe medicine for him.”

2.­98

“You said he was abandoned by his wife and sons. Then who attends to him?” asked the physician.

2.­99

“I attend to him. Please prescribe inexpensive medicine.”

The physician prescribed it, saying, “This is his medicine.”

2.­100

Then the servant girl, taking some food for Bhava from her own provisions and also taking some from the house, attended to him, and he recovered his health. Bhava thought, “I was abandoned by my wife and sons and I owe my life to this girl. I should do something for her in return.” Bhava said to her, “Girl, I was abandoned by my wife and sons and I owe my life to you. So I will give you whatever you most want. Tell me what you want.”

2.­101

“Master, [F.296.b] if you are satisfied with me, I would like to have sex with you.”

Bhava said, “What is the use of our having sex? I will give you five hundred kārṣāpaṇas and liberate you from servitude.”

2.­102

“Master, I am nothing but a slave whether I am far from here or in the next life,” she replied. “If I have sex with you, Master, I am not a slave.”62

Bhava, knowing she would insist, said, “Girl, tell me when the time is right and you are fertile.”63

2.­103

Later, when the time was right and she was fertile, she told him. Then the two, the householder Bhava and the servant girl, enjoyed themselves together, and she conceived a child. From the very day the child was conceived, all the wealth and all the business of the householder Bhava became abundant and fulfilled. After eight or nine months, a boy was born. He was well proportioned, attractive, and pleasant to behold, with a golden complexion, his head like a parasol, long arms, a broad forehead, eyebrows that meet, a prominent nose, and every major limb and minor appendage of his body complete. From the time he was born, all the wealth and all the business of the householder Bhava again became abundant and fulfilled. At the birth, the householder held a great celebration for twenty-one days and, to give the baby a name, … “Let us name him Pūrṇa (Fulfilled).” Thus the boy was named Pūrṇa.

2.­104

The boy Pūrṇa was entrusted to eight nursemaids: two nursemaids to change his diapers … (The passage should be recited in detail, up to:)64 He grew quickly like a lotus shooting up in a pond. When Pūrṇa grew up, he was taught letters, calculation, numbers, counting by hand, [F.297.a] and how to deal with loans and two different types of deposits,65 and he became fully learned in eight kinds of analysis: the analysis of land, the analysis of cloth, the analysis of jewels, the analysis of wood, the analysis of elephants, the analysis of horses, the analysis of boys, and the analysis of girls. He also mastered other kinds of analysis and reading, and became one whose actions are clear.

2.­105

Later, the householder Bhava made his sons get married one by one, beginning with Bhavila.66 The sons were so attached to their own wives that they abandoned the family business and settled down, smitten with physical beauty alone. Therefore, the householder Bhava was plunged into grief, resting his cheek on his hand. His sons noticed him and asked, “Father, why are you plunged into grief, resting your cheek on your hand?”

2.­106

“Sons,” he replied, “I did not get married until I had a hundred thousand pieces of gold. You have abandoned the family business and settled down, smitten with physical beauty alone. After my death, my family will be full of misery. How could I not be plunged into grief?”

2.­107

Bhavila, taking off his jeweled earrings and putting on wooden earrings (dārukarṇikā), promised, “I will not put on jeweled earrings until I acquire a hundred thousand pieces of gold.”

2.­108

The next one, putting on lac67 earrings (stavakarṇikā), made the same promise.

Then the third one, putting on lead earrings (trapukarṇikā), made the same promise too.

2.­109

Although they had been known by the names Bhavila, Bhavatrāta, and Bhavanandin, those names disappeared, and they came to be known by the names Dārukarṇin, Stavakarṇin, and Trapukarṇin.

2.­110

When the three sons took to the great ocean carrying merchandise, Pūrṇa said, “Father, I will take to the great ocean, too.”

His father replied, “Son, [F.297.b] because you are a child, you should stay here and do what needs to be done in the store.”

2.­111

And so Pūrṇa stayed. His elder brothers returned, having been successful on their voyage. After they were fully rested, they said, “Father, please calculate the value of our merchandise.” Their father calculated the value and found that each of the three sons had acquired a hundred thousand pieces of gold.

2.­112

Pūrṇa had also lawfully earned more than a hundred thousand pieces of gold. He threw himself at his father’s feet and said, “Father, please calculate the money I earned at the store, too.”

2.­113

“Son, you have remained here,” replied his father. “What is there to calculate for you?”

“Father, at any rate, please calculate it and you will understand,” said Pūrṇa.

2.­114

His father calculated it and found that there were, except for the capital, more than a hundred thousand pieces of gold obtained properly. The householder Bhava, being pleased and delighted, thought, “This creature appears to be one who has the great power of merit. Just remaining here, he has acquired a hundred thousand pieces of gold.”

2.­115

Later, the householder Bhava caught an illness. He thought, “After my death, my sons will go their separate ways. So I must devise a plan to keep them together.” He said to them, “Sons, prepare firewood.” When the sons had prepared firewood, he said, “Kindle a fire.” When the sons had kindled a fire, he said, “Pull out, one by one, the pieces of wood.” When the sons had pulled out, one by one, the pieces of wood, the fire was extinguished. He asked, “Sons, did you see that?”

“We did, father,” said his sons.


2.­116

Bhava then recited a verse:

“Fire burns when pieces of wood are gathered together.
Brothers together are just the same.
If you separate the pieces of wood, the fire is extinguished.
People are just like that.”
2.­117

“Sons, after my death, [F.298.a] you should not listen to the words of women.

“Families are divided because of women.
Those who are clever are divided by words.
Mantras increase68 when they are badly chanted.
Friends are divided because of desire.”
2.­118

The sons, except for Bhavila, went elsewhere. Bhavila stayed and his father said to him, “Son, whatever happens, you should not abandon Pūrṇa. He has the great power of merit.” Then Bhava passed away, saying:

2.­119
“All accumulation ends in loss;
What is lofty in the end will fall;
All meetings end in separation;
All life ends in death.”69
2.­120

The sons decorated his bier with blue, yellow, red, and white cloth, performed a great ceremony, carried the body to the charnel ground, and cremated it. Then, having assuaged their grief, they said to one another, “When our father was alive, we depended on him for our livelihoods. But now he is dead. If we now70 abandon the family business and settle down, the family will dissolve and we will be reproached by our kinsmen. So let us go abroad carrying merchandise.”

2.­121

Pūrṇa said, “Then I will go, too.”

“You should stay here and do what needs to be done in the store,” said the brothers. “Only we three will go.” The three brothers then went abroad carrying merchandise. Pūrṇa, entrusted with all the other responsibilities, stayed behind. [B24]

2.­122

It is commonplace that in a wealthy family each member of the family is given money for everyday expenses. The wives of the three elder brothers sent their female slaves to Pūrṇa to receive the money for everyday expenses. But since Pūrṇa was surrounded by merchants, [F.298.b] businessmen, caravan leaders, and servants, the female slaves did not find an opportunity to receive the money for everyday expenses. After the guests had stood up and left, the female slaves were then given the money for that day. When the female slaves returned late, they were scolded: “Hey, girl, why are you so late?”

2.­123

“Pūrṇa was surrounded by merchants, businessmen, caravan leaders, and servants, and his brightness was blazing like the light of the sun,” they replied. “When everyone else had stood up and left, we were given the money.”

“Such a thing occurs when sons of slave women come into power in someone’s house,” remarked the wives.

2.­124

The wife of Bhavila asked her female slave, “Why are you so late?”

When the female slave had explained the matter in detail, the wife of Bhavila said, “Thank you. You should go when you know the time is right.”

2.­125

Because the female slave knew when the time was right and went then, she quickly received the money. The other female slaves took a long time. They asked the first one, “How did you come back so quickly?”

2.­126

She explained everything, and the other female slaves began to go to Pūrṇa with her. Pūrṇa was again surrounded by merchants, businessmen, caravan leaders, and servants, and when they left, he gave the female slave of Bhavila’s wife the day’s money. The other two female slaves also quickly obtained the money. Their mistresses asked, “How is it that you came back so quickly this time?”

2.­127

They said, “May the eldest mistress be free from illness. When her female slave goes, Pūrṇa gives the money to her. So we go with her.”

Unable to bear it, the two wives again remarked, [F.299.a] “Such a thing occurs when sons of slave women come into power in someone’s house.”

2.­128

Later, Bhavila, Bhavatrāta, and Bhavanandin returned from the great ocean, joyfully, having succeeded on their voyage. Bhavila asked his wife, “Good lady, did Pūrṇa protect you well?”

“He was as good to me as a brother or a son,” she replied.

2.­129

When the other two husbands asked their wives the same, the wives remarked yet again, “These are things that occur when sons of slave women come into power in someone’s house.”

The two brothers thought, “Women usually split friends apart.”

2.­130

Later, immediately after the store of cloth from Kāśi was opened, Bhavila’s son came, and Pūrṇa dressed him with a piece of cloth from Kāśi. The wives of the two younger brothers saw the cloth and asked, “Child, who gave you this?”

“Uncle gave it to me,” answered the child.

2.­131

Having seen such cloth, the other wives also sent their own sons. But, unfortunately for them, the store of cloth from Kāśi was closed and only the store of rough cloth was open, and so Pūrṇa dressed them in rough cloth. Seeing this, the wives of the two younger brothers complained to their husbands, “Did you see that? He gives cloth from Kāśi to one while he gives rough cloth to the others.”

2.­132

The husbands answered, “That is definitely because when the boys arrived the store of cloth from Kāśi was closed, but the store of rough cloth was open.”

“Give it more thought,” said their wives.

2.­133

Later, when the store of śarkarā was opened, Bhavila’s son came and got a bowl full of śarkarā. [F.299.b] When Bhavila’s son returned home carrying the śarkarā, the wives of the younger brothers saw him and asked, “Child, who gave you this?”

“Uncle gave it to me,” answered the child.

2.­134

The two wives also sent their own sons. But unfortunately for them, the store of śarkarā was closed and only the store of guḍa was open. Since they came when only the store of guḍa was open, they got guḍa. “Did you see that?” the wives complained again. “Pūrṇa gives śarkarā to the one while he gives guḍa to the others.”

2.­135

Having seen all that, the wives tried to alienate their husbands from one another in order to split up the household. The two younger brothers discussed the matter together: “Since our household has been ruined for good, we should divide it.”

2.­136

One suggested, “Let’s call our eldest brother.”

The other replied, “For the time being, let’s consider how to divide the household ourselves.”

2.­137

The two then considered it independently and thought, “One will take what there is in the house and what there is in the farm, another will take what there is in the store and what there is abroad, and the third will take Pūrṇa. If our eldest brother takes what there is in the house and what there is in the farm, we will be able to live on what there is in the store and what there is abroad. And if our eldest brother takes what there is in the store and what there is abroad, we will be able to live on what there is in the house and what there is in the farm, and we will also be able to torment Pūrṇa.”

2.­138

Thus the two brothers discussed the matter. They went to Bhavila and said, “Since our family relations have dissolved, we are going to divide the household.”

“I think we should do this after we have carefully analyzed the situation,” Bhavila replied, “because it is usually women who break up households.”

2.­139

“We have already analyzed the situation,” said the other two, [F.300.a] “so we are going to divide the household.”

“Then call five arbitrators,” said Bhavila.

2.­140

“Why do we need five arbitrators when we have already figured out the division of the household?” asked the two brothers. “One will take what there is in the house and what there is in the farm, another will take what there is in the store and what there is abroad, and the third will take Pūrṇa.”

2.­141

“Why do you not give Pūrṇa his share?” asked Bhavila.

“Who gives a share to the son of a slave woman?” the other two answered. “Not only that, he himself is one of the things we have apportioned. If you want Pūrṇa, take him.”

2.­142

Bhavila thought, “Father ordered me: ‘You should not abandon Pūrṇa even if you part with your entire estate.’ So I should take Pūrṇa.” He then said, “If that is how it is, then I will provide for Pūrṇa.”

2.­143

The brother who took possession of what there was in the house and what there was in the farm went quickly to the house and called out, “Sister, get out of here!”

When Bhavila’s wife stepped out, he shouted, “Don’t come back again!”

2.­144

“Why?”

“Because we have divided what belongs to the household.”

2.­145

The brother who took possession of what there was in the store and what there was abroad went quickly to the store and called out, “Pūrṇa, come down!”

When Pūrṇa came down, the brother said, “You cannot go up to the store anymore.”

2.­146

“Why?”

“We divided the household. What there is abroad and what there is in the store are mine.”

2.­147

“Give me my share,” said Pūrṇa.

The brother retorted, “Why should we give a share to you, the son of a slave woman? Not only that, you yourself are one of the things we have apportioned. You have been taken by our eldest brother.”

2.­148

When Bhavila’s wife went with Pūrṇa to the house of a kinsman, her children [F.300.b] began to cry from hunger. She implored him, “Pūrṇa, give my children something to eat.”

2.­149

“Give me a kārṣāpaṇa,” said Pūrṇa.

“You earned a hundred thousand pieces of gold,” she replied. “Do you not have something for the children to eat?”

2.­150

“How could I have known that your family would come to be needy like this?” said Pūrṇa in return. “If I had known that, I would have prepared hundreds of thousands of gold pieces.”

2.­151

It is commonplace for women to carry a few brass coins wrapped in the hems of their garments. Bhavila’s wife gave Pūrṇa a brass coin and said, “Bring something to eat.”

2.­152

Taking the coin with him, Pūrṇa went to the market, where he saw a man carrying a bundle of wood that had been cast ashore by the ocean waves. The man was shivering with cold, and Pūrṇa asked him, “Say, why are you shivering like this?”

“I don’t know,” answered the man, “but I grow cold like this whenever I carry this bundle of wood even briefly.”

2.­153

Pūrṇa, who was learned in the analysis of wood, began to analyze the wood and found in it a piece of gośīrṣacandana. He asked the man, “Say, how much would you sell this for?”

“For five hundred kārṣāpaṇas.”

2.­154

Pūrṇa took the bundle of wood, extracted the piece of gośīrṣacandana, went to the market, sawed it into four pieces, sold just the sawdust for a thousand kārṣāpaṇas, and gave the man five hundred kārṣāpaṇas, saying, “Since Bhavila’s wife is staying at such-and-such a house, take this bundle of wood there and say that Pūrṇa sent it.”

2.­155

When the man had brought the wood and told her what happened, Bhavila’s wife, beating her breast, cried out, “So did Pūrṇa also lose his mind after he lost his estate? I sent him to find something to be cooked. [F.301.a] Instead, he sent something to kindle a fire with, but nothing to be cooked!”

2.­156

Later, the king of Sūrpāraka came down with a serious fever and was semiconscious. The physician prescribed gośīrṣacandana for him, and so the ministers began to look for gośīrṣacandana. They heard talk in the market and went to Pūrṇa. The ministers asked him, “Do you have gośīrṣacandana?”

“I do.”

2.­157

“How much would you sell it for?”

“For a thousand kārṣāpaṇas.”

2.­158

The ministers bought the gośīrṣacandana for a thousand kārṣāpaṇas, and when they anointed the king with it, he recovered his health. The king thought, “What sort of house has gośīrṣacandana in it?” The king asked his ministers, “Where did this come from?”

“From Pūrṇa, Your Majesty,” answered the ministers.

2.­159

“Call Pūrṇa here.”

A messenger went to Pūrṇa and told him, “Pūrṇa, His Majesty will speak with you.”

2.­160

Pūrṇa wondered, “Why would the king speak with me?” He then thought further, “Since he recovered his health on account of gośīrṣacandana, he would speak with me about gośīrṣacandana. So I should take all the gośīrṣacandana with me.”

2.­161

Pūrṇa wrapped three pieces of gośīrṣacandana with cloth, held another piece in his hand, and went to the king. The king asked, “Pūrṇa, do you have any gośīrṣacandana?”

“Your Majesty, here it is,” Pūrṇa answered.

2.­162

“What is the price of this?”

“A hundred thousand pieces of gold.”

2.­163

“Do you have any more?”

“I do, Your Majesty,” Pūrṇa said, showing him, one by one, the three other pieces of gośīrṣacandana. The king ordered his ministers, “Pay Pūrṇa four hundred thousand pieces of gold.”

2.­164

“Your Majesty,” said Pūrṇa, “give me three hundred thousand. I will present one to Your Majesty as a gift.”

The king gave three hundred thousand pieces of gold to Pūrṇa and said, “Pūrṇa, I am pleased with you. [F.301.b] So, tell me whatever you most want and I will give it to you.”

2.­165

“Your Majesty, if you are pleased with me, I would ask to stay in your country without being harmed by anyone.”

The king ordered his ministers, “Sirs, from now on, you should not give orders to Pūrṇa even if you give orders to princes.”

2.­166

Later, five hundred merchants came to the city of Sūrpāraka, having succeeded on their voyage on the great ocean. The guild of merchants in Sūrpāraka made a private agreement: “None of us should go alone to the foreign merchants. If someone goes alone, a fine of sixty kārṣāpaṇas shall be imposed. We should gather our merchandise together.”

2.­167

One of them said, “We should call Pūrṇa, too.”

“What is the use of calling that poor man?” asked another.

2.­168

At that time Pūrṇa went out and heard that five hundred merchants had come to the city of Sūrpāraka, having succeeded on their voyage on the great ocean. Pūrṇa, without entering the city, went to the foreign merchants and asked, “Sirs, what are these goods?”

“They are this and that,” they answered.

2.­169

“What is their price?”

“Caravan leader, wherever you go you only ask questions.71”

2.­170

“Even so, tell me the price,” Pūrṇa insisted.

The merchants priced the goods at one million, eight hundred thousand pieces of gold. Pūrṇa said, “Sirs, here are three hundred thousand pieces of gold for a deposit. This merchandise is mine. I will pay the balance when I get home.”

2.­171

“Please do so,” they said, and Pūrṇa paid three hundred thousand pieces of gold as a deposit, placed his own seal on the merchandise, and departed.

2.­172

Later, the guild of merchants sent servants, telling them, “Go see what goods there are.”

2.­173

They went and asked, “What are these goods?”

“They are this and that.”

2.­174

“Our [F.302.a] treasury and warehouse are full of such things.”

“Whether full or not, these goods have already been sold,” said the foreign merchants.

2.­175

“To whom did you sell them?”

“To Pūrṇa.”

2.­176

“You must have made a great profit if you sold it to Pūrṇa.”

The merchants said, “You would not pay even for full price what he paid as a deposit.”

2.­177

“How much did he pay as a deposit?”

“Three hundred thousand pieces of gold.”

2.­178

“He must have stolen the gold from his brothers.”

The servants went back and reported to the guild of merchants, “Those goods have already been sold.”

2.­179

“To whom?”

“To Pūrṇa.”

2.­180

“They must have made a great profit if they sold it to Pūrṇa.”

“You would not pay even for full price what he paid as a deposit.”

2.­181

“How much did he pay as a deposit?”

“Three hundred thousand pieces of gold.”

“He must have stolen the gold from his brothers.”

2.­182

They called Pūrṇa and said, “Pūrṇa, why did you take the merchandise when the guild of merchants had an agreement: ‘None should take the merchandise alone, but72 only the guild of merchants should take it’?”

2.­183

“Sirs,” he replied, “when you made the agreement, did you tell me or my brothers? You made the agreement without me. You alone should keep it.”

2.­184

The guild of merchants then became angry. They seized Pūrṇa and placed him in the sun so that he would pay sixty kārṣāpanas. The king’s men witnessed this and told the king.

“Sirs, summon them,” ordered the king.

2.­185

When the king’s men had summoned the merchants, the king asked them, “Sirs, why did you seize Pūrṇa and place him in the sun?”

“Your Majesty, we did so because the guild of merchants had an agreement that none should trade by themselves, but he engaged in trade by himself.”

2.­186

“Your Majesty,” said Pūrṇa, “please ask them whether they told me or my brothers when they made the agreement.” [F.302.b]

“Sirs, Pūrṇa’s claim is fair,” said the king.

2.­187

The merchants were ashamed, and they freed Pūrṇa.

Later, when the king needed an item, he summoned the guild of merchants and ordered them, “Sirs, since I need such-and-such an item, present it to me.”

2.­188

“Your Majesty, Pūrṇa has it,” they replied.

“Since I cannot order him,” said the king, “buy it from him and present it to me.”

2.­189

The merchants sent a messenger to Pūrṇa, who told him, “The guild of merchants calls you.”

“I will not go,” answered Pūrṇa.

2.­190

Then all the members of the guild of merchants assembled, went to Pūrṇa’s house, stood at the door, and sent him a message: “Pūrṇa, the guild of merchants is at your door. Come out!”

2.­191

When Pūrṇa came out arrogantly, with pride and haughtiness, the guild of merchants said, “Caravan leader, please sell your merchandise at the price you paid for it.”

“If I sell my merchandise at the price I paid for it, I would surely be such a great merchant, wouldn’t I?” said Pūrṇa.

2.­192

The merchants replied, “Sell it at twice the price and the guild of merchants will be honored.”

“The guild of merchants should be honored,” thought Pūrṇa. He then sold it at twice the price of one million, five hundred thousand.

2.­193

After Pūrṇa hid the remaining money in his house, he thought, “How can I fill a vessel with dew drops? I will take to the great ocean.” In order to take to the great ocean, he issued a proclamation in the city of Sūrpāraka with the ringing of bells: “Sirs, merchants living in the city of Sūrpāraka, listen! The caravan leader Pūrṇa will take to the great ocean. Whoever among you who wants to take to the great ocean with the caravan leader Pūrṇa, free from taxes, duties, and boatman’s fees, should prepare your merchandise to carry across the great ocean.” [F.303.a]

2.­194

Five hundred merchants prepared their merchandise to carry across the great ocean. Then the caravan leader Pūrṇa, after performing rituals that bring good fortune, blessings, and well-being, took to the great ocean with his retinue and the five hundred merchants, and then returned to the city of Sūrpāraka, having succeeded on his voyage.

2.­195

Six times Pūrṇa took to the great ocean and returned, having succeeded on each voyage.

Everywhere it was said, “Six times Pūrṇa took to the great ocean and returned, having succeeded on each voyage.” Then, the merchants of Śrāvastī came to the city of Sūrpāraka bearing their merchandise. After they were fully rested, they went to the caravan leader Pūrṇa. When they arrived, they said, “Caravan leader, let us leave for the great ocean.”

2.­196

“Sirs,” Pūrṇa replied, “have any of you ever seen or heard of anyone who, six times, returned from the great ocean after succeeding on each voyage, and was going a seventh time?”

2.­197

“Pūrṇa, we came a long way to see you. If you do not go, we will not go either because you are the authority,” the merchants said.

Pūrṇa thought, “Although there is no wealth at all that I need, I will go for the sake of these people.” Then Pūrṇa left for the great ocean together with the merchants.

2.­198

At dawn the merchants recited the Udāna, Pārāyaṇa, Satyadṛś, Sthaviragāthā, Sthavirīgāthā, Śailagāthā, Munigāthā, and Arthavargīya Sūtras.73 Pūrṇa heard them and said, “Sirs, you are singing good songs.”

2.­199

“Caravan leader,” they replied, “these are not songs.”

“Then what are they?”

“They are the words of the Buddha.”74

2.­200

When Pūrṇa heard the sound buddha, a word he had never heard before, the hairs in every pore of his body stood on end. Pūrṇa asked reverently, [F.303.b] “Sirs, who is the Buddha?”

2.­201

The merchants explained, “There is a son of the Śākyans, a śramaṇa75 of the Gautama family, who went forth from his home into homelessness with true faith, having shaved off his hair and beard and donned saffron robes. He awoke to supreme, complete awakening. Caravan leader, he is the Buddha.”

2.­202

“Sirs, where is that blessed one now?”

“Caravan leader, he is staying in Śrāvastī, in the Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park.”

2.­203

Keeping this in mind, Pūrṇa took to the great ocean together with them and came back, having succeeded on his voyage.

2.­204

His brother Bhavila thought, “He is tired from continually traveling the great ocean. He should get married.” He then asked Pūrṇa, “Tell me, which daughter of which76 merchant, businessman, or caravan leader shall I request for you?”

“I do not want an object of desire,” Pūrṇa replied. “If you allow it, I will go forth.”

2.­205

“You did not go forth when we were not engaged in the family business. Why do you go forth now?” asked Bhavila.

“It was not appropriate then,” replied Pūrṇa. “It is appropriate now.”

Bhavila, knowing he would insist, allowed Pūrṇa to go forth.

2.­206

“Brother,” said Pūrṇa, “there is much danger and little to gain on the great ocean. Many people take to it but only a few of them return. So you should never take to the great ocean. You have abundant wealth gained properly, while your brothers have what was gained improperly. So you should not live with them if they ask you to live together.”

2.­207

Pūrṇa went to Śrāvastī with a servant. He stayed in the park of Śrāvastī and sent his servant as a messenger to the householder Anāthapiṇḍada, saying, “Householder, the caravan leader Pūrṇa is staying in the park of Śrāvastī, hoping to meet you.” [F.304.a]

2.­208

Anāthapiṇḍada thought, “He must have come in a carriage, having grown tired of traveling by boat.” Then Anāthapiṇḍada asked, “Say, how much merchandise has he brought with him?”

“What merchandise? He came only with me, a servant.”

2.­209

“It would not be appropriate for me to invite that important person to my house without honoring him,” thought Anāthapiṇḍada. So, he invited Pūrṇa to his house with great honor: he offered him a massage, let him bathe, and gave him food. When they sat down, talking pleasantly, Anāthapiṇḍada asked, “Caravan leader, what is the purpose of your coming here?”

“Householder, I wish to go forth and be ordained a monk in the well-taught Dharma and Vinaya.”

2.­210

Then the householder Anāthapiṇḍada stretched his upper body, raised his right hand, and spoke an inspired utterance: “O Buddha, O Dharma, O Saṅgha! O well-taught Dharma! A great person like this, abandoning a great many relatives and friends and full treasuries and warehouses, now wishes to go forth and be ordained a monk in the well-taught Dharma and Vinaya.”

2.­211

Then the householder Anāthapiṇḍada took the caravan leader Pūrṇa to the Blessed One. At that time the Blessed One was teaching the Dharma, seated before an audience of many hundreds of monks. When the Blessed One saw the householder Anāthapiṇḍada coming with a gift, he said to the monks, “Monks, the householder Anāthapiṇḍada is coming with a gift. For the Tathāgata, there is no gift equal to this, a person to be tamed.” [F.304.b]

2.­212

The householder Anāthapiṇḍada bowed low until his forehead touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then he sat down to one side together with the caravan leader Pūrṇa. When Anāthapiṇḍada had sat down, he said to the Blessed One, “Honored One, the caravan leader Pūrṇa wishes to go forth and be ordained a monk in the well-taught Dharma and Vinaya. May the Blessed One let him go forth and ordain him.”

2.­213

The Blessed One assented to the householder Anāthapiṇḍada by remaining silent. Then the Blessed One said to the caravan leader Pūrṇa, “Come, monk, lead the pure life.” As soon as the Blessed One said this, Pūrṇa’s hair fell out and he was clad in his outer robe, with but a week’s worth of hair and beard, his bowl and pitcher in his hand, and standing like a monk who had been ordained a hundred years earlier.

2.­214
Because the Tathāgata said “Come,”
His hair fell out and he was clad in his outer robe,
His faculties at once calmed,
And his body swathed in the Buddha’s mind.77
2.­215

At another time, the venerable Pūrṇa went to the Blessed One. When Pūrṇa arrived, he bowed low until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, and then he sat down to one side.78 When he had sat down to one side, the venerable Pūrṇa implored the Blessed One, “Blessed One, please preach to me a condensed Dharma so that after I have listened to the condensed Dharma from the Blessed One, I will come to dwell alone, in solitude, carefully and diligently, directing myself toward myself. If I dwell alone, in solitude, carefully and diligently, directing myself toward myself, I will, in this life, by my own supernormal knowledge, actualize and accomplish the supreme end of the pure life for which the sons of noble families go forth from their homes into homelessness with true faith, having shaved off their hair and beards [F.305.a] and donned saffron robes, and I will understand, ‘My births have been exhausted. The pure life has been lived. What is to be done has been done. I will not know another existence after this one.’ ”

2.­216

When the venerable Pūrṇa had finished speaking, the Blessed One said to him, “Good, good, Pūrṇa! Pūrṇa, it was good that you said this: ‘Please preach to me a condensed Dharma . . . . I will not know another existence after this one.’ Therefore, listen well and keep this in mind and I will preach to you.

2.­217

“Pūrṇa, there are visual objects to be cognized by the eye that are attractive, desirable, delightful, pleasing to behold, and connected with desire, and that give rise to clinging. If a monk sees these visual objects and rejoices in, welcomes, clings to, and remains attached to them,79 joy will arise in he who rejoices in, welcomes, clings to, and remains attached to them. If there is joy, the joy will turn into delight and pleasure. If there is delight and pleasure, it will turn into clinging. If there is clinging, it will turn into a fetter. A monk who has come to have delight, clinging, and fetters, Pūrṇa, is said to be far from nirvāṇa.

2.­218

“Pūrṇa, there are auditory objects to be cognized by the ear, olfactory objects to be cognized by the nose, gustatory objects to be cognized by the tongue, tangible objects to be cognized by the body, and [F.305.b] mental objects to be cognized by the mind that are attractive, desirable, delightful, pleasing to behold, and connected with desire, and that give rise to clinging. If a monk knows these objects … he is said to be far from nirvāṇa.

2.­219

“Pūrṇa, there are visual objects to be cognized by the eye that are attractive, desirable, delightful, pleasing to behold, and connected with desire, and that give rise to clinging. If a monk sees these visual objects and does not rejoice in, welcome, cling to, or remain attached to them, joy will not arise in he who does not rejoice in, welcome, cling to, or remain attached to them. If there is no joy, there will be no delight or pleasure. If there is no delight or pleasure, there will be no clinging. If there is no clinging, there will be no fetter. If there are no fetters, a monk who has neither delight, nor clinging, nor fetters, Pūrṇa, is said to be near nirvāṇa.

2.­220

“Pūrṇa, there are auditory objects to be cognized by the ear, olfactory objects to be cognized by the nose, gustatory objects to be cognized by the tongue, tangible objects to be cognized by the body, and mental objects to be cognized by the mind that are attractive, desirable, delightful, pleasing to behold, and connected with desire, and that give rise to clinging. If a monk knows these objects … he is said to be near nirvāṇa.

2.­221

“Pūrṇa, since I have entrusted you with this condensed instruction, then where do you want to dwell? Where do you want to live?”

“Honored One, since the Blessed One has entrusted me with this condensed instruction, I would like to go to Śroṇāparāntaka.”

2.­222

“Pūrṇa, [F.306.a] the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are fierce, impetuous, rough, abusive, short tempered, and disparaging. Pūrṇa, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka directly abuse, ridicule, and disparage you with bad, coarse, and intolerable words, what will you think?”

2.­223

“Honored One, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka directly abuse, ridicule, and disparage me with bad, coarse, and intolerable words, I will think, ‘Ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are proper. Ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are intelligent. Although they abuse, ridicule, and disparage me with bad, coarse, and intolerable words, they do not strike me with their hands or with clods of dirt.’ ”

2.­224

“Pūrṇa, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are fierce … and disparaging. Pūrṇa, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka strike you with their hands or with clods of dirt, what will you think?”

2.­225

“Honored One, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka strike me with their hands or with clods of dirt, I will think, ‘Ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are proper. Ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are intelligent. Although they strike me with their hands or with clods of dirt, they do not strike me with sticks or swords.’ ”80

2.­226

“Pūrṇa, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are fierce … and disparaging. Pūrṇa, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka strike you with sticks or with swords, what will you think?”

2.­227

“Honored One, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka strike me with sticks or with swords, I will think, ‘Ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are proper. Ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are intelligent. Although they strike me with sticks or with swords, they do not take my life.’ ”

2.­228

“Pūrṇa, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are fierce … and disparaging. Pūrṇa, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka [F.306.b] attempt to take your life, what will you think?”

2.­229

“Honored One, if the people of Śroṇāparāntaka attempt to take my life, I will think, ‘Among the Blessed One’s81 disciples there are those who, because of this purulent body, are grieved and ashamed and self-loathing, and who cut themselves with swords, ingest poison, hang themselves, or throw themselves from a cliff to their deaths.82 Therefore, ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are proper. Ah, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are intelligent. They liberate me from this purulent body with little trouble.’ ”

2.­230

“Good, good, Pūrṇa! Pūrṇa, it is good that you who possess such patience and gentleness are able to dwell in Śroṇāparāntaka. Pūrṇa, go and liberate those who have not been liberated. Release those who have not been released. Relieve those who have not been relieved. Emancipate those who have not been emancipated.”

2.­231

The venerable Pūrṇa praised and rejoiced in the words of the Blessed One. The venerable Pūrṇa then bowed low until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, and he departed from the Blessed One’s presence.

2.­232

After that night had passed, early in the morning the venerable Pūrṇa dressed, took his bowl and his robe, and entered Śrāvastī for alms. He took a meal of almsfood in Śrāvastī and returned after the meal. He put in order the bedding and the seat he had used, took his bowl and his robe, and set out for Śroṇāparāntaka. [F.307.a] Traveling through the country, he arrived in due course at Śroṇāparāntaka.

2.­233

Then, early in the morning the venerable Pūrṇa dressed, took his bowl and his robe, and entered Śroṇāparāntaka for alms.

2.­234

A hunter, carrying his bow and arrows and going to hunt deer, saw Pūrṇa and thought, “It is inauspicious that I saw this shaven-headed śramaṇa.”

When the hunter, his bow drawn, charged at the venerable Pūrṇa, the venerable Pūrṇa caught sight of him. Upon seeing him, Pūrṇa removed his upper robe and said, “Shoot this, sir, since I entered this place for the sake of this that is hard to fill up,” and then he spoke this verse:

2.­235
“Quick, shoot an arrow into this stomach with its many ills,
For the sake of which birds wander in the sky, beasts are ensnared,
People wielding arrows, spears, and lances are killed in battle,
And fish, swimming around from hunger, affliction, and deprivation, are caught with fishhooks.”
2.­236

The hunter thought, “This mendicant has such patience and gentleness. Why should I shoot him with an arrow?” When he thought thus, the hunter’s mind was filled with faith in the venerable Pūrṇa. Then the venerable Pūrṇa preached the Dharma to him and established him in the refuges and the rules of training. The venerable Pūrṇa also made five hundred other huntsmen lay brothers and five hundred women lay sisters. Five hundred monastery buildings were offered to him, and hundreds of couches, stools, cushions, pillows, and square blankets were also offered. After three months had passed, the venerable Pūrṇa actualized with his body the threefold knowledge and became an arhat. He was free from desire for the three realms; … 83 and he [F.307.b] became an object of veneration, respect, and praise for the gods including Indra and Upendra.84

2.­237

Later, the two brothers of Dārukarṇin, having consumed and exhausted their possessions, came to Dārukarṇin and said, “Since that creature who was our misfortune has left our home, come, let us live together.”

2.­238

“Who is that creature that you say was our misfortune?” asked Dārukarṇin.

“Pūrṇa, of course.”

2.­239

“He is not a creature who brings misfortune; rather, he brought good fortune to my home.”

Dārukarṇin’s two brothers said, “Whether good fortune or misfortune, come, let us live together.”

2.­240

“Your wealth was not gained properly while mine was gained properly,” replied Dārukarṇin. “Because of this difference, we cannot live together.”

2.­241

“The son of a slave woman took to the great ocean many times and helped you gain your possessions, which you spend and boast about. How were you able to take to the great ocean?” asked Dārukarṇin’s two brothers.

2.­242

Dārukarṇin, his pride hurt by his two brothers, thought, “I will take to the great ocean, too.” Having thought this … Dārukarṇin took to the great ocean. His ship was driven by a tail wind to a forest of gośīrṣacandana.

The guide said, “Sirs, this is the forest of gośīrṣacandana. So, choose and take wood from here.”

2.­243

At that time, there was a yakṣa named Maheśvara, who was master of the forest of gośīrṣacandana, and he was away at a meeting of yakṣas. The merchants began to cut down the gośīrṣacandana trees with five hundred axes. When a yakṣa named Apriya saw the gośīrṣacandana trees being cut down with the five hundred axes, he went to the yakṣa Maheśvara and said to him, “Sir, please be informed [F.308.a] that the forest of gośīrṣacandana is being destroyed by five hundred axes. Thus, please do your duty, or what you ought to do.”

2.­244

Then the yakṣa Maheśvara canceled the meeting of yakṣas, and, unable to bear it, caused a violent storm and set out for the forest of gośīrṣacandana.

The guide said, “Sirs, merchants of the continent of Jambu, listen. Since this is the very thing that is known as the fear of a great storm, think of a countermeasure.”

2.­245

Then the merchants were frightened, terrified, dejected, and, with the hairs in every pore of their bodies standing on end, started to beg the gods for help, saying:

2.­246
“O Śiva, Varuṇa, Kubera, Vāsava, and others,
Gods, humans, serpents, yakṣas, masters of the asuras,85
Since we are utterly tormented and frightened,
May the fearless ones help us!”
2.­247
Some bow to the husband of Śacī.
Others bow to Brahmā, Hari, and Śaṅkara.
To the deities who reside in the earth, in the trees and forest,
Those who are caught in a fiendish storm bow down, hoping for their protection.86
2.­248

Dārukarṇin stood undisturbed. The merchants asked him, “Caravan leader, why do you stand undisturbed while we are in intolerable pain and fear?”

2.­249

“Sirs,” replied Dārukarṇin, “my younger brother told me, ‘Brother, there is much danger and little to gain on the great ocean. Many people driven by desire take to it but only a few of them return. So, you should never take to the great ocean.’ I disobeyed my younger brother’s words and took to the great ocean. So what can I do now?”

2.­250

“Who is your younger brother?”

“He is Pūrṇa.”

2.­251

“Sirs,” said the merchants, “the noble one Pūrṇa has the great power of merit. Let us seek refuge in him.”

Then they all, with one voice, exclaimed, “Homage to the noble one Pūrṇa! [F.308.b] Homage, homage to the noble one Pūrṇa!”

2.­252

Gods who were delighted with the venerable Pūrṇa then went to him. When they arrived, they said to the venerable Pūrṇa, “Noble one, your elder brother87 feels intolerable pain and fear. Please consider rescuing him.”

2.­253

The venerable Pūrṇa considered this, and entered a meditative state by which, directing his mind, he disappeared from Śroṇāparāntaka and appeared seated with his legs crossed on the edge of the ship in the great ocean.88 The storm was then turned back as if it had struck Mount Sumeru and was thwarted. The yakṣa Maheśvara thought, “Though, in the past, ships that were hit by a storm were tossed like a piece of cotton and broken apart, now the storm has been turned back as if it had struck Mount Sumeru and was thwarted. What was the cause of that?”

2.­254

The yakṣa Maheśvara looked around and then discovered the venerable Pūrṇa seated with his legs crossed on the edge of the ship. When the yakṣa Maheśvara had discovered the venerable Pūrṇa, he asked, “Noble one Pūrṇa, why do you harass me?”

2.­255

“O you whose nature is to grow old, why do I harass you?” asked the venerable Pūrṇa in return. “You are harassing me.89 Had I not attained a number of good qualities like these, you would have killed my brother, and only his name would have remained.”

2.­256

“Noble one,” replied Maheśvara, “I am protecting this gośīrṣacandana for the wheel-turning king.”

“Sir, what do you think?” asked the venerable Pūrṇa. “Which is greater, a tathāgata, an arhat, a perfectly awakened one, or a wheel-turning king?”

2.­257

“Noble one, has the Blessed One appeared in the world?”

“He has.”

“If so, then fill your ship that is not yet full.”

2.­258

Their lives having been saved, the minds of the merchants were then filled with faith in Pūrṇa. [F.309.a] They filled the ship with gośīrṣacandana, set out again, and arrived in due course at the city of Sūrpāraka.

2.­259

Pūrṇa then said to his brother, “Since your treasures belong to the one by whose name you, having succeeded on your voyage, were able to return, you should distribute them to these merchants. With this gośīrṣacandana, I will build a palace garlanded with sandalwood90 for the Blessed One.”

2.­260

Dārukarṇin distributed his treasures to the merchants. The venerable Pūrṇa then began to build a palace with a hall of gośīrṣacandana. He called the craftsmen together and asked them, “Sirs, would you like to take five hundred kārṣāpaṇas every day or take one viḍālapada of gośīrṣacandana dust?”

“Noble one,” they replied, “we would like to take one viḍālapada of gośīrṣacandana dust.”

2.­261

The palace garlanded with sandalwood was then quickly built and made clean. The wood chips and remaining dust of gośīrṣacandana were crushed into powder and smeared on the palace walls.

2.­262

Pūrṇa reconciled with his eldest brother and his other two brothers and said, “Invite the community of monks headed by the Buddha and offer a meal.”

2.­263

“Noble one Pūrṇa, where is the Blessed One?”

“In Śrāvastī.”

2.­264

“How far is that?”

“To Śrāvastī, it is more than one hundred yojanas.”

2.­265

“We will ask His Majesty for permission.”

“You should do so.”

2.­266

The brothers went to the king and said, “Your Majesty, we would like to invite the community of monks headed by the Buddha and offer a meal. Please help us.”

“Excellent, I will do so.”

2.­267

The venerable Pūrṇa then went up to the roof, looked in the direction of the Jetavana, dropped to his knees, scattered flowers, burned incense, made a layman hold a golden pitcher, [F.309.b] and began to pray:91

2.­268
“O you of pure conduct, one with greatly pure intellect,
One who always seeks to benefit at mealtimes,
Please look upon those who are masterless‍—
Have compassion and come.”
2.­269

Then the flowers, by the awakened power of the buddhas and the divine power of the gods, formed the shape of a flower pavilion, and that flower pavilion came to abide at the elders’ dwelling in the Jetavana. The smoke of the incense was woven together like a cloud. The water assumed the shape of a lapis lazuli vessel. Since the venerable Ānanda was familiar with omens, he made the gesture of supplication and asked the Blessed One, “Honored One, where is this invitation from?”

“From Sūrpāraka, Ānanda.”

2.­270

“Honored One, how far is Sūrpāraka from here?”

“More than a hundred yojanas, Ānanda. Go and give this order to the monks: ‘Those who, among you, will go to the city of Sūrpāraka and have a meal there tomorrow should take a counting stick.’ ”

2.­271

“Certainly, O Honored One,” replied the venerable Ānanda, and he took the counting sticks and sat down before the Blessed One. The Blessed One and the monks who were the most venerable of the elders took counting sticks.

2.­272

At that time, the venerable elder Pūrṇa,92 who was an elder from Kuṇḍopadāna and had been liberated through wisdom, was sitting in the assembly. When the venerable elder Pūrṇa also tried to take a counting stick, the venerable Ānanda spoke this verse to him:

2.­273
“Venerable one, this meal is not a meal
In the court of the king of Kosala,
The house of Sudatta,
Or the house of Mṛgāra.93
2.­274
“We are going to a city called Sūrpāraka,
More than a hundred yojanas distant from here,
With our magical power.
Pūrṇa, remain here silently.” [F.310.a]
2.­275

Although the venerable elder Pūrṇa had been liberated through wisdom, he had not attained magical power. Therefore he asked himself, “Why am I disheartened by lack of magical power even like that of the non-Buddhist ascetics when I have searched for the whole collection of defilements within myself, discarded all the defilements, abandoned them, and driven them away?”

2.­276

The venerable elder Pūrṇa exerted his vigor and gave rise to magical power. He stretched his arm, which was like the trunk of an elephant, and took a counting stick before the venerable Ānanda passed a counting stick to a third elder, and the venerable elder Pūrṇa spoke this verse:

2.­277
“O Gautama, in this world, the six sorts of supernormal knowledge
Are not attained by fame,94 learning,
Various types of military force,
Words, or a great wish.
2.­278
“Those who realize as I do,
Even if their youth has been diminished by old age,
Become endowed with the six sorts of supernormal knowledge
By the power of tranquility, moral conduct, insight, and the various powers of dhyāna.”
2.­279

On that occasion the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, this is the best of my monks, the best of my disciples for taking a counting stick for offerings. The elder Pūrṇa, who is an elder from Kuṇḍopadāna, is the best of those who take a counting stick.”

2.­280

Then the Blessed One instructed the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, go and say to the monks, ‘Though I have said, “Monks, you should live not displaying your virtue and not hiding your evil,” those among you who have attained magical power should go by means of that power to the city of Sūrpāraka and have a meal, because there are non-Buddhist ascetics in the city.’ ”

2.­281

“Certainly, O Honored One,” replied the venerable Ānanda to the Blessed One, and he said to the monks, “Venerables, the Blessed One said, ‘Though I have said, “Monks, you should live not displaying your virtue and not hiding your evil,” … because there are non-Buddhist ascetics in the city.’ ” [F.310.b]

2.­282

The king had beautified the city of Sūrpāraka by removing stones, pebbles, and gravel, sprinkling sandalwood water, setting out sweet-smelling censers, hanging many silk tassels, and scattering flowers around the city.

2.­283

There were eighteen gates around the city of Sūrpāraka, and the king had seventeen sons. At each surrounding gate a prince stood with the highest majesty. At the largest gate stood the king, the ruler of Sūrpāraka, with the great majesty of kings, together with the venerable Pūrṇa, Dārukarṇin, Stavakarṇin, and Trapukarṇin.

2.­284

The king then saw those handing out leaves, those handing out grass, and those handing out receptacles coming by means of their magical power and asked, “Reverend Pūrṇa, is the Blessed One coming?”

2.­285

Pūrṇa replied, “This is not the Blessed One but rather those handing out leaves, those handing out grass, and those handing out receptacles.”

2.­286

At that time the monks who were the most venerable of the elders came by practicing dhyāna, and the king again asked, “Reverend Pūrṇa, is the Blessed One coming?”

“No,” Pūrṇa replied. “They are the monks who are the most venerable of the elders who have come by practicing dhyāna.”


2.­287

A lay brother then spoke this verse:

“Some come riding lions, tigers, elephants, horses, nāgas, or bulls;
Some come seated on heavenly vehicles made from jewels, mountains, trees, or beautiful chariots;
And others come through the sky, like clouds adorned by garlands of lightning, joyfully,
As if going to the palace of the gods, by means of magical power.
2.­288
“Some appear on the ground, breaking through the surface of the earth,
Some descend from the center of the sky,
And some emerge from their seats.
Look at the ability of those with magical power.”
2.­289

Then the Blessed One [F.311.a] washed his feet outside the monastery, entered inside, sat on the prepared seat, stretched his back, and focused his mind on a point in front of himself. When the Blessed One put his foot down with a specific intention in the perfume chamber, the great earth quaked in six ways. This great earth quaked, quaked furiously, and quaked absolutely furiously. It roared, roared furiously, and roared absolutely furiously. When the eastern side rose, the western side sank. When the western side rose, the eastern side sank. When the southern side rose, the northern side sank. When the northern side rose, the southern side sank. When the periphery rose, the middle sank. When the middle rose, the periphery sank. The king asked Pūrṇa, “Noble one Pūrṇa, what is this?”

2.­290

Pūrṇa answered, “Because the Blessed One put his foot down with a specific intention in the perfume chamber, the great earth quaked in six ways.”

2.­291

The Blessed One then emanated a ray of light colored like the radiance of gold, by which the continent of Jambu blazed like molten gold. Again the king stared in surprise95 and asked, “Noble one Pūrṇa, what is this?”

Pūrṇa answered, “Great King, the Blessed One emanated a ray of light colored like the radiance of gold.” [V2] [F.1.b] [B25]

2.­292

The Blessed One then went to Sūrpāraka together with five hundred arhats, himself tamed and his assembly tamed, himself pacified and his assembly pacified.

2.­293

A god who lived in the Jetavana followed the Blessed One, holding a branch of vakula with which he provided shade for him. The Blessed One knew the god’s thinking, proclivity, disposition, and nature, preached the Dharma that was appropriate for him, and caused him to penetrate the four truths of the noble ones. When the god had heard the Dharma, he leveled the twenty high peaks of the mountain chain of the false view of individuality with the vajra of knowledge and actualized the fruit of stream-entry.

2.­294

There then lived in another place about five hundred widows, and they saw the Blessed One, who was fully ornamented with the thirty-two marks of a great man, illuminated by the eighty minor marks, [F.2.a] ornamented with a fathom-wide halo, and beautiful like a moving mountain of jewels whose light surpasses a thousand suns. As soon as the five hundred widows saw him, great faith in the Blessed One arose in them.

2.­295

It is commonplace that when beings who possess the cause of having accumulated roots of merit look at the Buddha for the first time, they experience far greater pleasure than that of those who have practiced tranquility of mind for a dozen years, those who gain a son after having been childless, those who look upon treasure after having been poor, or those who are anointed as king after having longed for kingship.

2.­296

After that, the Blessed One knew that it was the right time to train the widows, and sat on the seat prepared for him in front of the community of monks. The women bowed low until their foreheads touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then they sat down to one side. The Blessed One knew their thinking, proclivities, dispositions, and nature … and they actualized the fruit of stream-entry. After seeing the four truths of the noble ones, they spoke an inspired utterance three times: “Honored One, what the Blessed One has done for us is what has never been done for us by our mothers, our fathers, a king, gods, our husbands, our kinsmen and relatives, ancestral spirits, śramaṇas, or brahmins. [F.2.b] You have dried up the ocean of blood and tears, liberated us from the mountain of bones, shut the gate to inferior states of existence,96 opened the gates to liberation and heaven, and placed us among gods and humans. O Honored One, we have been exalted, truly exalted! Since we seek refuge in the Blessed One, the Dharma, and the community of monks, may the Blessed One accept us as lay sisters.”

2.­297

They rose from their seats, made the gesture of supplication to the Blessed One, and implored the Blessed One, “O Blessed One, please give us something to worship.”

2.­298

The Blessed One97 then cut off his hair and nails by means of his magical power and gave his hair and nails to the widows. They built a stūpa for the hair and nails of the Blessed One. After that, the god who lived in the Jetavana planted a vakula tree along the stūpa’s circumambulatory path, and then the god who lived in the Jetavana said to the Blessed One, “Blessed One, I will stay here, worshiping this stūpa.”

2.­299

The god who lived in the Jetavana stayed there. Some people named the place the widows’ stūpa, and other people named it the circumambulatory path of the vakula. Monks who worship the stūpa worship the place even now.

2.­300

The Blessed One then departed.98 At that time, there lived five hundred ṛṣis in a hermitage. Since the hermitage was abundant in flowers, fruits, and water, the ṛṣis were intoxicated with those things and were without worries. The Blessed One then knew that it was the right time to train the five hundred ṛṣis and went to the hermitage. When the Blessed One arrived, with his magical power he destroyed the flowers and fruits of the hermitage, dried up the water, dug up the meadow, and smashed the residence to pieces. The ṛṣis were then plunged into grief, resting their cheeks on their hands. [F.3.a]

2.­301

The Blessed One asked, “Why are you plunged into grief?”

“Blessed One,” they replied, “after you, a human field of merit, came here, we were placed in a grievous situation.”

2.­302

The Blessed One then asked, “Ṛṣis, why was the hermitage, which was abundant in flowers, fruits, and water, ruined? Shall I make the hermitage as it was before?”

“Blessed One, please do so.”

2.­303

The Blessed One then ceased his magical power, and the hermitage became as it had been before. Thus, the five hundred ṛṣis were very much astonished, and their minds were filled with faith in the Blessed One. The Blessed One knew their thinking, proclivities, dispositions, and natures, and preached the Dharma that was appropriate for them. When the five hundred ṛṣis had heard the Dharma, they actualized the fruit of a never-returner and achieved magical power. They then made the gesture of supplication to the Blessed One and said, “Honored One, we wish to go forth and be ordained monks in the well-taught Dharma and Vinaya. We will lead the pure life in the presence of the Blessed One.”

2.­304

Then the Blessed One, using the “Come, monk” formula of ordination, said, “Come, monks, lead the pure life.” As soon as the Blessed One said this, their hair fell out and they were clad in their outer robes, with but a week’s worth of hair and beards, their bowls and pitchers in their hands, standing like monks who had been ordained a hundred years earlier.

2.­305
Because the Tathāgata said “come,”
Their hair fell out and they were clad in their outer robes,
Their faculties at once calmed,
And their bodies swathed in the Buddha’s mind.99 [F.3.b]
2.­306

Exerting themselves, endeavoring and striving, they came to understand saṃsāra’s ever-revolving five cycles, overthrew all conditioned states … and the five hundred ṛṣis became objects of veneration, respect, and praise for the gods including Indra and Upendra. The ṛṣi who was their leader said, “Blessed One, I deceived many people in this guise. I will go forth after making the people’s faith arise.”

2.­307

Then the Blessed One, surrounded, in the shape of a half-moon, by the five hundred ṛṣis and monks who had been monks from the beginning, soared with them into the air from there using his magical power, and arrived in due course at Mount Musalaka.

2.­308

At that time there lived a ṛṣi on Mount Musalaka named Vakkalin.100 He saw the Blessed One, who was fully ornamented with the thirty-two marks of a great man . . . . As soon as Vakkalin saw the Blessed One, his mind was filled with faith in the Blessed One. When Vakkalin’s faith had arisen, he thought, “Now I will descend from the mountain and go to meet the Blessed One. The Blessed One may pass through here out of consideration for people to be trained. Therefore, I will now throw myself off the mountain.”

2.­309

Thinking thus, Vakkalin threw himself from the top of the mountain. Since the buddhas, the blessed ones, have a watchful nature, the Blessed One caught him with his magical power. The Blessed One knew his thinking, proclivity, disposition, and nature and preached the Dharma that was appropriate for him. When Vakkalin had heard the Dharma, he actualized the fruit of a never-returner and achieved magical power. Then Vakkalin said to the Blessed One, “Honored One, I wish to go forth and be ordained a monk in the well-taught Dharma and Vinaya . . . .” [F.4.a]


2.­310

Then the Blessed One, saying “Come, monk,” . . . . 

…
And his body swathed in the Buddha’s mind.
2.­311

Then the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, it is he, the monk Vakkalin, who is the best of the monks who were emancipated by faith.”

2.­312

After that, the Blessed One, surrounded by a thousand monks, performing miracles, went to the city of Sūrpāraka. The Blessed One thought, “If I enter from one gate, those who are at the other gates will be disappointed. Thus, I will enter by using my magical power.”

2.­313

So the Blessed One entered the city of Sūrpāraka from the sky using his magical power. Then the king, the ruler of Sūrpāraka, and the venerable Pūrṇa, Dārukarṇin, Stavakarṇin, and Trapukarṇin, as well as the seventeen princes, went to the Blessed One along with the attendants of each one and hundreds of thousands of other beings.

2.­314

After that, the Blessed One, accompanied by hundreds of thousands of beings, went to the palace garlanded with sandalwood and sat on the seat prepared for him in front of the community of monks. Since the large crowd could not see the Blessed One, the crowd started to destroy the palace garlanded with sandalwood. The Blessed One thought, “If the palace garlanded with sandalwood is destroyed, such destruction will decrease the donors’ merit. Now I will transform this palace into a palace made of crystal.” The Blessed One transformed the palace into a palace made of crystal so that the large crowd could see the Buddha’s body without obstructions blocking the view.

2.­315

The Blessed One knew the audience’s thinking, proclivities, [F.4.b] dispositions, and natures, and so preached the Dharma that was appropriate for them. When the audience had heard the Dharma, hundreds of thousands of beings attained great excellence. Some generated the roots of merit of liberation, some generated the roots of merit of penetration, some actualized the fruit of stream-entry, some the fruit of a never-returner, and some went forth, abandoned all the defilements, and actualized the state of an arhat. Some generated the intention for the awakening of disciples, some the intention for the awakening of a self-awakened one, and some the intention for complete and supreme awakening.

2.­316

Most of the audience became absorbed in the Buddha, devoted to the Dharma, and inclined to the Saṅgha.

2.­317

Dārukarṇin, Stavakarṇin, and Trapukarṇin then prepared a pure and fine meal, arranged seats, set up a jeweled pitcher, and let the Blessed One know the time by messenger: “Honored One, the time has arrived. May the Blessed One know that the meal is ready.”101

2.­318

At that time there lived in the great ocean two nāga kings named Kṛṣṇa and Gautama. They both thought, “Since the Blessed One is preaching the Dharma in the city of Sūrpāraka, let’s go to listen to the Dharma.” Then they both, along with five hundred nāga attendants, departed for the city of Sūrpāraka, creating five hundred rivers flowing toward the city. Since the buddhas, the blessed ones, have a watchful nature, the Blessed One thought, “If these two nāga kings, Kṛṣṇa and Gautama, come to the city of Sūrpāraka, they will ruin the country.” The Blessed One then said to the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana, [F.5.a] “Maudgalyāyana, accept the alms requiring haste by the Tathāgata. Why, Maudgalyāyana? Because there are five kinds of alms requiring haste.102 What are the five? The almsfood of temporary visitors, of those who are setting forth on a journey, of sick people, of those attending the sick, and of monks responsible for monastic property.”103

2.­319

In this situation, the Blessed One intended that the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana would be the monk who was responsible for monastic property.

2.­320

The Blessed One soared up into the air from there, using his magical power. The two, the Blessed One and the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana, went to the nāga kings Kṛṣṇa and Gautama. When the Blessed One and the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana had arrived, the Blessed One said, “Lords of nāgas, you should be attentive to the city of Sūrpāraka, and you should not destroy the country.”

2.­321

“Honored One,” said the nāga kings, “we have come here with faith, because of which we never harm any beings, even ants, to say nothing of the people living in the city of Sūrpāraka.”

2.­322

After that, the Blessed One preached the Dharma to the nāga kings Kṛṣṇa and Gautama, the hearing of which caused them to seek refuge in the Buddha, Dharma, and Saṅgha, and to accept the rules of training.

2.­323

When the Blessed One had begun his meal, each nāga thought, “Ah, may the Blessed One drink my water!”

The Blessed One thought, “If I drink water from only one individual, it will disappoint the others. Therefore, I must devise a plan to drink the water of everyone.”

2.­324

Then the Blessed One instructed the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana, “Maudgalyāyana, go and bring water from the very point where the five hundred rivers meet.”

2.­325

“Certainly, O Honored One,” replied the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana, and he filled a bowl with water at the very point where the five hundred rivers met and returned to the Blessed One, bringing the water with him. When he arrived, the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana offered the bowl of water to the Blessed One, [F.5.b] and the Blessed One accepted the water and drank it.

2.­326

The venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana thought,104 “The Blessed One once said,105 ‘Monks, fathers and mothers do what is quite difficult to do because they nourish their children, raise them, bring them up, feed them, and teach them everything on the continent of Jambu. Even if a son should try to carry his parents, his mother on one shoulder and his father on the other, for a hundred years; if he should give them the earth’s jewels, pearls, lapis lazuli, glass, coral, silver, gold, agate, amber, ruby, and shells; or if he should put his parents in a position of power, the son cannot truly help or sufficiently repay his father and mother with such efforts. If a person motivates his parents to have complete faith, and leads them to, leads them to enter into, and leads them to stand safely in their faith when they do not have faith; if he motivates them to have completely good conduct when they have disordered conduct; if he motivates them to be completely generous when they are ungenerous; if he motivates them to have complete intelligence, and leads them to, leads them to enter into, and leads them to stand safely in their intelligence when they have disordered intelligence, he comes to truly help and repay his father and mother with just such efforts.’ Since I have not yet repaid my mother, now I will consider where my mother has been reborn.”

2.­327

When the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana considered this, he found that she had been reborn in the Marīcika world. Then he observed by whom she should be trained and found that it was the Blessed One. He thought, “Since I have come here from a distance, I will by all means tell this to the Blessed One.” The venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana said to the Blessed One, “Honored One, the Blessed One once said, ‘Monks, fathers and mothers do what is quite difficult to do.’ [F.6.a] My mother has been reborn in the Marīcika world and she is one who should be trained by the Blessed One. May the Blessed One have compassion and train her.”

2.­328

“Maudgalyāyana, by whose magical power shall we go there?” asked the Blessed One.

“By mine, Blessed One.”

2.­329

Then the Blessed One and the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana departed, stepping on the summit of Mount Sumeru, and arrived in the Marīcika world after seven days.

2.­330

When she, Bhadrakanyā,106 saw the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana from a distance, she was delighted, and she went to him and said, “Ah, I see my son after so long! Ah, I see my son after so long!”

2.­331

Then a large crowd asked, “Sirs, how is this girl the mother of this mendicant who is so old?”

“Sirs,” replied the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana, “this woman bore this body of mine. Thus, she is my mother.”

2.­332

The Blessed One knew Bhadrakanyā’s thinking, proclivity, disposition, and nature, and preached the Dharma that was appropriate for her and that caused her to penetrate the four truths of the noble ones. When Bhadrakanyā had heard the Dharma, she leveled the twenty high peaks of the mountain chain of the false view of individuality with the vajra of knowledge and actualized the fruit of stream-entry. After she had seen the truths, she spoke an inspired utterance three times: “…you placed me among gods and humans.” Again, she said:107

2.­333
“The terrible path to inferior states of existence,
With their many dangers, was closed by you.
The path to the heavens, with their excellent merits,
Was opened, and I found the path to nirvāṇa.
2.­334
“Supported by you, I acquired the pure eye
That is extremely pure and free from fault. [F.6.b]
After obtaining the pacified state that pleases the noble ones,
I will cross over to the far shore beyond the ocean of suffering.
2.­335
“O, you who are venerated by the gods and humans of this world,
Who is free from birth, old age, illness, and death,
Muni who is hard to see even should we be reborn a thousand times,
My encounter with you bore fruit right here and now.
2.­336

“I am exalted, truly exalted. Since I seek refuge in the Blessed One, the Dharma, and the community, may you accept me as a lay sister. From today onward, I embrace my faith as one who seeks refuge throughout my life. Blessed One and Mahā­maudgalyāyana, please assent to my offer of a meal today.”

2.­337

The Blessed One assented to Bhadrakanyā’s request by remaining silent, and Bhadrakanyā understood the Blessed One’s assent. Then Bhadrakanyā knew that the Blessed One and the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana had sat down in comfort, and with her own hands she served and satisfied them with a pure and fine meal. When she had, with her own hands, served and satisfied them in a variety of ways with a pure and fine meal, knowing that the Blessed One had finished his meal and washed his hands and his bowl, she took a low seat and sat before the Blessed One in order to hear the Dharma. The Blessed One then preached the Dharma to Bhadrakanyā. When the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana had taken the Blessed One’s bowl and washed it, the Blessed One said, “Maudgalyāyana, shall we go?”

2.­338

“Blessed One, let us go.”

“By whose magical power?”

2.­339

“The Blessed One’s, please.”

“Then think about the Jetavana.”

2.­340

“Blessed One, have we already arrived there?”

“We have arrived, Maudgalyāyana.”

2.­341

The venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana was astonished and asked, “Blessed One, what is the name of this magical power?”

“Maudgalyāyana, [F.7.a] it is called manojavā (“swift as thought”).”

2.­342

“Honored One, I had not known that the Buddha’s magical power was so profound. If I had known, I would never have turned my mind from the goal of complete and supreme awakening, even if my body had broken into pieces like grains of sesame. Now I am like firewood that has burned out, and I have no more opportunity.”

2.­343

All the monks, feeling doubtful, inquired of the Buddha, the Blessed One, the one who severs all doubts, “Honored One, what karma did the venerable Pūrṇa create that matured to cause his birth in a family that was rich and had great wealth and many possessions? What karma did he create, because of which he was born from a female slave’s womb, went forth, abandoned all the defilements, and actualized the state of an arhat?”

2.­344

“Monks,” the Blessed One replied, “the actions were performed and accumulated by the monk Pūrṇa himself, accruing a heap of karma. The conditions have ripened, and they approach him like a flood, inevitably. Who else but Pūrṇa would experience the actions that he himself performed and accumulated? Monks, actions performed and accumulated do not mature in the earth element, the water element, the fire element, or the wind element, which are outside the body. Virtuous and nonvirtuous actions performed and accumulated like this mature in the aggregates, elements, and sense spheres.

2.­345
“Even after hundreds of eons,
Actions are never lost.
When the time and conditions are right,
They bear fruit in embodied beings.
2.­346

“Monks, once, in this fortunate eon, when people’s lives were twenty thousand years long, there appeared in the world a teacher named Kāśyapa, who was a tathāgata, an arhat, a perfectly awakened one, perfect in knowledge and conduct, a sugata, world knowing, a supreme tamer of people to be tamed, a teacher of gods and humans, [F.7.b] a buddha, and a blessed one. He stayed near the city of Vārāṇasī.

2.­347

“In the teachings of that buddha this Pūrṇa went forth, became well acquainted with the three divisions of the canon, and came to serve as the monk entrusted with the monastery’s business according to the rules. After a little while, an arhat became responsible for monastic property. When he started to clean the monastery, a wind arose and blew the dust hither and thither. The arhat thought, ‘I shall wait for a while until the wind has died down.’

2.­348

“Then the monk entrusted with the monastery’s business saw that the monastery was unclean; fiercely angry, he spoke harshly: ‘Which son of a slave woman is responsible for monastic property?’

2.­349

“The arhat thought, ‘Since this person is angry, I shall wait for a while and make him understand later.’ After the monk’s anger subsided, the arhat went to him and asked, ‘Do you know who I am?’

“ ‘I do,’ said the monk. ‘You and I went forth in the teachings of the Perfectly Awakened One Kāśyapa.’

2.­350

“ ‘That is true,” said the arhat, ‘but I have finished what should be done by a mendicant. While I have been released from all bondage, you performed the action of speaking harshly because you remain bound by all bonds. Confess your sin as a sin and hence the action will diminish, waste away, and disappear.’

2.­351

“The monk confessed his sin as a sin. Hence, although he had been doomed to be born in hell and become the son of a female slave, he was not born in hell but was born in a female slave’s womb for five hundred lives. And now, in his last life, he was also born in a female slave’s womb.

2.­352

“And because he had served the community, he was born into a family that was rich and had great wealth and many possessions. And because he was well acquainted with the aggregates, elements, [F.8.a] sense spheres, and dependent origination through recitation and repetition, he went forth in my teaching, abandoned all the defilements, and actualized the state of an arhat.

2.­353

“ Therefore, monks, the maturation of entirely negative actions is entirely negative; the maturation of entirely positive actions is entirely positive; the maturation of those that are mixed is mixed. Therefore, monks, henceforth you should abandon entirely negative and mixed actions, and you should seek entirely positive actions. Monks, that is how you must train.”

2.­354

Thus spoke the Blessed One, and the monks rejoiced in and praised what the Blessed One had said.

VI. Agnidatta

A. The Story of the Two Nāga Kings and King Bimbisāra108

2.­355

The following took place in Rājagṛha.


2.­356

At that time, there lived in Rājagṛha two nāga kings named Valguka and Giri. Because of their power, five hundred hot springs were always flowing, the fountains, lakes, and ponds never dried up, and the gods brought rain at the appropriate times. Therefore, the harvest was exceedingly abundant.

2.­357

After the Blessed One had converted the two nāga kings Nanda and Upananda,109 they both came every day from the terrace of Mount Sumeru to serve the Blessed One. The nāga kings Valguka and Giri thought, “While these nāga kings Nanda and Upananda come every day from the terrace of Mount Sumeru to serve the Blessed One, it is not good that we, living in this very place, do not serve the Blessed One. Therefore, let us serve the Blessed One, too.”

2.­358

They went to the Blessed One, and when they had arrived, they bowed low until their foreheads touched the feet of the Blessed One, and then they sat down to one side. When they had sat down to one side, [F.8.b] the Blessed One preached the Dharma that was appropriate for them. After they had heard the Dharma, they sought refuge in the Buddha, Dharma, and Saṅgha and accepted the rules of training. Once they had sought refuge in the Blessed One and accepted the rules of training, their bodies and the amount of food they needed for their bodies greatly increased. They both went to the Blessed One, and when they had arrived, they bowed low until their foreheads touched the feet of the Blessed One, and said, “Blessed One, when we sought refuge in the Blessed One and accepted the rules of training, our bodies and the amount of food we needed for our bodies greatly increased. Blessed One, if the Blessed One would authorize it, we will enter the great ocean.”

2.­359

“Lords of nāgas,” replied the Blessed One, “since you are living in the land of the king, ask the king for permission.”

The two considered this and stayed there, saying, “The Blessed One means that he does not give us permission.”

2.­360

The nāga kings Valguka and Giri were always dressed as gods if they went to see the Blessed One at night, and as householders if they went by day. Dressed as householders, they both served the Blessed One every day.

2.­361

Whenever King Bimbisāra went to see the Blessed One, the king, who was proud of his status as a kṣatriya, always sent his retainer ahead, saying, “There must not be anyone who does not stand up when he sees me.” Once, he sent a retainer, saying, “Hey, go and see who is serving the Blessed One.”

2.­362

The retainer went and saw two householders. He thought, “Since these two people are living in the land of His Majesty, why would they not stand up at the sight of His Majesty?” [F.9.a] He said to the king, “Your Majesty, there are two householders, and they are living in the very land of Your Majesty.”

2.­363

King Bimbisāra thought, “Why would those two people not stand up at the sight of me? Therefore, I shall go.” Then he went to the Blessed One.

2.­364

When the nāga kings Valguka and Giri saw King Bimbisāra, they asked the Blessed One, “Blessed One, if King Bimbisāra comes, to which should we show respect, the king or the Dharma?”

2.­365

“Nāga kings, show respect to the Dharma,” replied the Blessed One. “Thus the buddhas, the blessed ones, also respected the true Dharma. The arhats also respected the Dharma.” He then spoke these verses:

2.­366
“Those who were past buddhas,
Those who will be future buddhas,
And he who is the present Buddha
Conquer many sorrows.
2.­367
“Those who have passed, those who will come, and he who is present
All respect the true Dharma.
This is the rule of the buddhas.
2.­368
“Therefore, anyone here who wishes for their own benefit,
Who wishes for a great state for themselves,
Should remember the teachings of the Buddha
And show respect to the true Dharma.”110
2.­369

The two did not stand up, and the king found this unbearable. He requested, “May the Blessed One preach the Dharma.”


2.­370

The Blessed One spoke these verses:

“With thoughts of anger, confusion,
And impiety
You cannot understand the true Dharma
Preached by the Perfectly Awakened One.
2.­371
“One who has controlled his thoughts
Of wrath and carelessness,
And abandoned thoughts of torment here,
Can understand what is well preached.”111
2.­372

The king thought, “Because these two householders came, the Blessed One [F.9.b] interrupted my hearing of the Dharma.” He rose from his seat, bowed low until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, and departed. When he had departed, he instructed his ministers, “Sirs, when those two householders depart from the presence of the Blessed One, order them both to leave my land.”

2.­373

When they had both bowed low until their foreheads touched the Blessed One’s two feet and departed, the ministers ordered them, “This was uttered from His Majesty’s lips: ‘You two must not live in my land.’ ”

“Certainly,” they both answered.

2.­374

The nāga kings then thought, “We both obtained without difficulty the very thing for which we had long hoped.” They then caused a great flood and entered a small valley. Then from the small valley they entered a large valley, from the large valley a small river, from the small river a large river, and from the large river the great ocean. When they entered the great ocean, their bodies and the amount of food they needed for their bodies again greatly increased.

2.­375

Later, the five hundred hot springs and the fountains, lakes, and ponds in Rājagṛha became smaller, depleted, and dried up, and the gods did not bring rain at the appropriate times. Therefore, there was a very poor harvest, a famine, and fear, and it was difficult for beggars in the wilderness to find food. The king thought, “In this Rājagṛha there once lived the nāga kings Giri and Valguka. Thanks to their power, five hundred hot springs were always flowing, the fountains, lakes, and ponds never dried up, the gods brought rain at the appropriate times, and therefore the harvest was abundant. But now the five hundred hot springs, fountains, lakes, and ponds have become smaller, depleted, and dried up, [F.10.a] and the gods have not brought rain at the appropriate times. Therefore, there has been a very poor harvest, a famine, and fear, and it is difficult for beggars in the wilderness to find food. Did the nāga kings Giri and Valguka die? Were they taken away by the king of birds, the garuḍa? Were they captured by a snake charmer? Perhaps they have run away frightened. Still, since the Buddha, the Blessed One, is omniscient, one who sees everything, I shall now ask the Blessed One this question.”

2.­376

He went to the Blessed One, and when he arrived, he bowed low until his forehead touched the Blessed One’s feet, and then he sat down to one side. When he had sat down to one side, King Bimbisāra explained the matter in detail to the Blessed One.

2.­377

“Great King,” said the Blessed One, “neither has died, nor have they been taken away by the king of birds, the garuḍa, nor been captured by a snake charmer, and they have not run away frightened. But you yourself, who are the king, banished them from your land.”

2.­378

“Blessed One, I have never seen either of them, let alone banished them from my land.”

“Great King, I will remind you. Great King, do you remember banishing two householders from your land?”

2.­379

“Blessed One, I remember that.”

“Those two people were the nāga kings Giri and Valguka.”

2.­380

“Honored One, where are they now?”

“They have gone to the great ocean.”

2.­381

“My land will be ruined!”

“Great King, beg the two of them for forgiveness,112 and your land will not be ruined.”

2.­382

“How should I beg them for forgiveness when they are in the great ocean?”

“On the eighth and fourteenth days of the month,113 they both come dressed as householders to bow low until their foreheads touch my feet. At that time, I will make a sign. Then you should beg them for forgiveness.”

2.­383

“Blessed One, should I throw myself at their feet, [F.10.b] or should I not throw myself at their feet?”

“No, reach out your hand and say, ‘O nāga kings, forgive me,’ and you will be forgiven.”

2.­384

The king was sitting patiently when the two nāga kings arrived. Just as they both came dressed as householders into the presence of the Blessed One, the king also came. And when the Blessed One made a sign, the king reached out his hand and said, “O you two nāga kings, please forgive me.”

2.­385

“Great King, you are forgiven.”

“If I am forgiven, please return.”

2.­386

“Great King, since we sought refuge in the Blessed One and accepted the rules of training, our bodies and the amount of food we need for our bodies have increased. If we come here with our present body size, even the whole country of Magadha would not be able to accommodate us.”

2.­387

“Then the country of Magadha will be ruined!”

“It will not be ruined.”

2.­388

“Why will it not?”

“Have two palaces built for us and offer worship every six months, and we will make our attendants stay there and gather together at the time of worship.”

2.­389

The king did as he had been told. The two nāga kings made their attendants stay there, and the nāga kings received his worship themselves.

B. The Quarrel between the Brahmin Agnidatta and the Citizens of Rājagṛha114

2.­390

Later, when their attendants were living in idleness, wicked nāgas took the opportunity to cause hail. In Rājagṛha, there was a brahmin who was familiar with a charm against hail, and he stopped the hail each time. The people living in the country of Magadha gave him an allotment.

2.­391

There was another brahmin named Agnidatta in the southern region who was also familiar with a charm against hail. He heard that there was a country in the northern region named Powerful over which a king named Best Army ruled, that there was the residence of a nāga king named Sundara in that country, [F.11.a] and that there was a medicine that had great potency and surpassed any other medicine. He decided to go there in order to get the medicine. He departed and in due course he arrived at Rājagṛha, where he stayed in the residence of the first brahmin who had the charm against hail. Then, when it hailed a lot, the brahmin who had originally lived there was unable to stop the hail and, at a loss, was going in and out of the house again and again. The brahmin Agnidatta asked him,115 “Sir, why are you going in and out of the house again and again?”

2.­392

“Because I cannot stop the great hail, my son,” said the first brahmin.

“I shall stop it.”

“That would be good, my son.”

2.­393

Agnidatta placed a spell on some water and sprinkled the water, whereupon the cloud broke into a hundred pieces and dispersed. The brahmins and householders in Rājagṛha were very surprised and went to the brahmin’s house, bringing gifts. “Sir,” they said, “the people in Rājagṛha are rejoicing. Please accept our gifts.”

2.­394

“Why?”

“Because you stopped the great hail.”

2.­395

“I did not stop the hail,” he told them, “this brahmin did.”

They went to the brahmin Agnidatta and said, “O young brahmin, please remain here and we shall give you an allotment.”

2.­396

“In that case, I shall live here.”

So, he lived there. He stopped the hail with the charm and for a while it never hailed. The brahmins and householders in Rājagṛha said to each other, “Sirs, since it does not hail thanks to our own merits, why should we give him an allotment?” They stopped giving the allotment.

2.­397

The brahmin Agnidatta then stopped using his charm and went to the country of Powerful, and later it started to hail again. The people went to the brahmin who had originally lived there and asked him, “Sir, where is the young brahmin?”

2.­398

He replied, “Since you did not treat him with respect, he has left.”

“Sir, if he comes back, please let us know.”

“I shall do so.”

2.­399

Agnidatta went in due course to King Best Army. Upon his arrival, he wished King Best Army victory [F.11.b] and long life and said, “Your Majesty, there is a nāga king named Sundara in your land, and there is a medicine named immediate effect in his residence. Your Majesty, please tell me where he is, and I will offer you a portion of the medicine.”

2.­400

“O brahmin,” said the king, “since the nāga king Sundara is fierce, he will certainly defeat you.”

“Your Majesty, for the time being I have the power of a charm and the power of medicine. If the continent of Jambu were to be filled with nāgas like the nāga king Sundara as densely as a thicket of sugarcane or a thicket of reeds, a single hair of mine would not be moved by the nāgas, much less so by the nāga king Sundara alone. By the way, is there any citizen of Your Majesty who is to be executed?”

2.­401

“Yes, there is, brahmin.”

“Your Majesty, please summon him here and make him tell me where the residence of the nāga king is.”

2.­402

The king then summoned the man and ordered him, “Hey, tell this brahmin where the residence of the nāga king Sundara is.”

2.­403

“Certainly, Your Majesty,” replied the man to the king, and he departed, guiding the brahmin. Then, after having traveled for some distance, the man halted and said to the brahmin, “Brahmin, do you see that green forest rising up over there?”

2.­404

“Yes, I do.”

“That is the residence of the nāga king Sundara.”

2.­405

Agnidatta went there and bound the medicine called immediate effect in a bundle, brought it to the country of Powerful, and gave King Best Army his portion of the medicine. He arrived in due course at Rājagṛha and stayed at the house of the original brahmin. Then, when the brahmin had called together the brahmins and householders in Rājagṛha, they brought offerings and said, “O young brahmin, please remain here. We shall give you an allotment.”

2.­406

Agnidatta replied, “Since you did not treat me with respect, I will not remain.”

They started to insist that he stay, entreated him, made a promise, and provided him with sustenance.

2.­407

Since people in the world desire prosperity and abhor decline, Agnidatta [F.12.a] took a wife from a family of equal rank, and he and she played, made love, and enjoyed themselves. Thus, a boy was born, and Agnidatta named his son Mountain. When the couple again played, made love, and enjoyed themselves, a girl was born, and Agnidatta named his daughter Hail. The name of the brahmin’s wife was Free from the Cycle. The name of his son’s wife was Lightning.116

2.­408

Agnidatta thought, “What is the use of my stopping the hail each and every time? I will use a charm to block it for a long time.” Because he used a charm to block the hail for a long time, it did not hail.

2.­409

The brahmins and householders in Rājagṛha said to each other, “Sirs, since it does not hail thanks to our own merits, why should we give him an allotment?” They stopped giving the allotment. The brahmin, out of jealousy, had not taught the words of the charm even to his son, and, attached to his life of ease, he had neither recited the charm nor kept the medicine dry, whereupon he forgot the words of the charm and found the medicine rotten because it had not been dried.

2.­410

Agnidatta, who had once trusted the brahmins and the householders in Rājagṛha but again began to quarrel with them, visited the residences of non-Buddhist ascetics and the forests of ascetics here and there and asked them, “Sirs, is there any means to attain all that I want and seek?”

2.­411

On those occasions, one said, “Enter into a fire”; another one said, “Take poison”; another one said, “Throw yourself from a cliff”; and another one said, “Tie a rope around your neck and hang yourself from the bough of a tree.” All of them thus taught a means of death, not a means of going forth.

2.­412

He went to the Bamboo Grove and saw a monk [F.12.b] and asked him, “Noble one, is there any means to attain all that I want and seek?”

“Go forth in the presence of the Blessed One,” said the monk.

2.­413

“What will I do there?”

“You should, throughout your life, lead the pure life and be engaged in dhyāna and recitation. If you attain omniscience in this present life, you will have arrived at the end of your suffering. On the other hand, should you die with your fetters remaining, you will attain all that you want and seek.”

2.­414

“Noble one, if I cannot do that, is there any other means?”

“Invite the community of monks headed by the Buddha and offer a meal.”

2.­415

“Please tell me another way in case I cannot do that either.”

“Invite the four great disciples who are like a wish-fulfilling vase,117 offer them a meal, and make an aspiration, and you will attain all that you want and seek.”

2.­416

“Noble one, I can do that. I will.”

He invited the four great disciples who are like a wish-fulfilling vase, offered them a meal, and made this aspiration: “May this root of merit cause Sundara to die and disappear from the state of a nāga and allow me be born there, and after that do harm to the people of Rājagṛha!”118

2.­417

His wife asked him, “My dear, what aspiration did you make?”

“I made an aspiration that this root of merit might cause Sundara to die and disappear from the state of a nāga and allow me to be born there, and after that do harm to the people of Rājagṛha.”

2.­418

“Good. May I become your wife when you get your wish!”

His son said, “May I become your son, too!”

2.­419

His daughter said likewise, “May I become your daughter, too!”

And his son’s wife said likewise, “May I become your son’s wife, too!”

2.­420

When they entered an old house [F.13.a] and slept, rain fell from a cloud of five colors, and they were all killed, crushed by a falling wall. After the nāga Sundara had died, they were born there with sixty thousand attendant nāgas. The nāga who had been Agnidatta in his former life then became known as Sundara, too. His wife’s name became Free from the Cycle, his son’s name Mountain, his daughter’s name Hail, and his son’s wife’s name Lightning.

2.­421

It is natural that male nāgas and female nāgas remember three things just after birth: where they died, where they were reborn, and by what action. The nāga observed that he had died in the human world. Where was he born? In the midst of nāgas. By what karma? By the force of an aspiration. For what purpose? For the purpose of doing harm to the people in Rājagṛha.

2.­422

He asked himself, “Which causes greater suffering to people, doing harm to crops that have just sprung up, or to crops that have not yet sprung up?” He saw that doing harm to crops that have not yet sprung up would do less damage than doing harm to crops that have just sprung up. He ordered his attendants, “Sirs, now cause all the crops in the country of Magadha to grow with rain today.” They caused all the crops to grow. Then he, with his sixty thousand attendants, caused rain as thick as the shafts of a plough, which looked as if it would carry away everything down to the last straw. Because of this, the people said to each other, “This nāga carried away even the straw.” The nāga’s name thus became Apalāla (Without a Straw).


3.

Chapter Three

3.­1

Summary of Contents:119

Rājagṛha, Nālandā,
Veṇuyaṣṭikā, Pāṭali Village,120
The Ganges, Massed Cloud,121
Mahāpraṇāda, and Vaiśālī, which is the last.

I. Rājagṛha

A. The Disaster of Rājagṛha and Its End

3.­2

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was once staying in Kalandaka­nivāpa Bamboo Grove near Rājagṛha.


3.­3

When Prince Ajātaśatru was enticed by Devadatta to kill his own father, who was a righteous Dharma king, and crown himself king, he began to perform a number of disrespectful acts toward the Blessed One [F.13.b] and set the elephant Dhanapālaka122 and a fierce dog on the Blessed One in order to kill him.

B. The Epidemic in Vaiśālī126

II. Nālandā131

III. Veṇuyaṣṭikā135

IV. Pāṭali Village

A. The Sermon at Pāṭali Village

B. The Donation by the Brahmin Varśākāra

C. The Donation of Parasols

D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana144

V. The Ganges145

VI. Mahāpraṇāda149

A. The Appearance of King Mahāpraṇāda’s Pillar150

B. The Former Life of the Monk Bhaddālin151

C. The Prediction of the Appearance of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha152

D. The Former Lives of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha156

E. The Sermon in Kuṭi Village159

F. The Sermon in Nādikā160

G. The Invitation by Āmrapālī165

VII. Vaiśālī

A. The Visit of Āmrapālī169

B. The Visit of the Licchavis172

C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī

D. The Former Lives of the Licchavis

E. The End of the Epidemic in Vaiśālī178


4.

Chapter Four

4.­1

Summary of Contents:185

Veṇu, Middle Village,
Mithilā, Videha,
Sālā, The Well, Bhārgava,
Kāṣāya, Crown of the Head, Kanthaka,
Gośālaka, Pāpā,
And Kuśinagarī, which is the last.

I. Veṇu

4.­2

Thereupon the Blessed One said to the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, let us go to Veṇu Village.”

“Certainly, O Honored One,” replied the venerable Ānanda to the Blessed One.

4.­3

Thereupon the Blessed One, traveling through the country of Vṛji, arrived in Veṇu Village, and he stayed in a śiṃśapā forest to the north of Veṇu Village. At that time a famine broke out, a calamity in which it became difficult for a beggar to find food. The Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, now here a famine has broken out, a calamity in which it has become difficult for a beggar to find food.186 Therefore, monks, those of you who have any acquaintances, who have any allies, who have any friends in the villages of Vṛji near Vaiśālī, should enter the rainy-season retreat there. [F.49.b] I will enter the rainy-season retreat, too, in this Veṇu Village with my attendant monk, Ānanda. None of you should want for almsfood.”

II. Middle Village

III. Mithilā194

IV. Videha205

V. Sālā208

VI. The Well210

VII. Bhārgava213

VIII. Kāṣāya214

IX. Crown of the Head215

X. Kanthaka216

XI. Gośālaka218

XII. Pāpā219

XIII. Kuśinagarī


5.

Chapter Five

5.­1

Summary of Contents:227

The Axe, Devadṛśa, Lumbinī,
Kapila, Where There Is Cotton,
Kanakamuni, Kārṣaka, A Robe,
Bath, Sikatin.228 These are the group of ten.

I. The Axe229

5.­2

The Blessed One stayed in Kalmāṣadamya, a village of the people of Kuru. At that time the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, having known and seen that defilements had been exhausted, I said . . . .” (Here the Sūtra of the Parable of the Axe in the section on the aggregates in the Saṃyuktāgama is to be recited in detail).230

II. Devadṛśa231

III. Lumbinī233

IV. Kapila234

V. Where There Is Cotton

VI. Kanakamuni

VII. Kārṣaka

VIII. A Robe

IX. Bath

X. Sikatin


6.

Chapter Six

6.­1

Summary of Contents:237

Icchānaṅgalā, Utkaṭā,
Saptaparṇa, Sunrise, [F.62.b]
Śrāvastī, Valaya, Where There Is Ground,
Lion Village, New Village,
City, Pīṭha,
And Nyagrodhikā, which is the last.
These twelve cities are explained.

I. Icchānaṅgalā238

6.­2

In Icchānaṅgalā, the Blessed One stayed in the Icchānaṅgalā Forest. At one point the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, I will go into seclusion here for three months.239 No monks should come to me except when someone brings me almsfood or when it is the day of poṣadha, which is held every fifteen days.”

II. Utkaṭā242

III. Saptaparṇa

IV. Sunrise316

V. Śrāvastī331

VI. Valaya

VII. Where There Is Ground

VIII. Lion Village

IX. New Village

X. City340

XI. Pīṭha342

XII. Nyagrodhikā349


7.

Chapter Seven

7.­1

Summary of Contents:353

Kimpilā, Ahicchattra,
Mathurā, Rāṣṭrapāla,
Hastināpura, The Great City,
Śrughnā, Brahmin Village,
The City of Kāla, Rohitaka,
Śādvalā, and
Nandivardhana.
These are correctly explained.

I. Kimpilā354

7.­2

The Blessed One arrived in Kimpilā and stayed in Kimpilā Forest.355


7.­3

Thereupon the Blessed One said to the venerable Kimpila, “O Kimpila, I will teach you to meditate on the four applications of mindfulness. Listen to it well and keep it in mind; I shall teach it.”

II. Ahicchattra

III. Mathurā360

IV. Rāṣṭrapāla366

V. Hastināpura378

VI. The Great City

VII. Śrughnā383

VIII. Brahmin Village386

A. A Fire Caused by an Old Man from the Śākya Clan387

B. The Former Life of the Old Man392

IX. The City of Kāla

X. Rohitaka

A. Offerings of the Yakṣa Elephant Power394

B. Departure to the Northern Region401

C. Awakened Power in Heaped Up409

D. Dharma Power in Retuka413

E. Great Cup in the Indus, Feet415

F. Having a Shaved Head and Water Jar416

G. Apalāla418

H. The Nāga Huluḍa426

I. Bhraṣṭolā, Ṛṣi, Āpannaka430

J. Kanthā432

K. In Dhānyapura, Converting the Mother of Best Army433

L. The Potter in Naitarī434

XI. Śādvalā

A. The Great Yakṣa of Śādvalā

B. Pālitakūṭa

XII. Nandivardhana

A. Bhavadeva’s, Caṇḍālī’s Seven Sons’, and the Yakṣa Earth-Protector’s Conversion in Nandivardhana

B. Giving an Image to Nāgas, Aśvaka, and Punarvasuka440

C. Converting Nāḍikā and Naḍadaryā

D. In the City of Kuntī, the Yakṣiṇī Named Kuntī

E. Kharjūrikā and the Stūpa Made of Dirt


8.

Chapter Eight

8.­1

Summary of Contents:451

Ādirājya, Bhadrāśva,
Mathurā, Otalā Park,
Vairambhya,
Ayodhyā, The Ganges,
Hungry Ghosts, and Velāma.

I. Ādirājya

8.­2

Traveling through the country of Śūrasena, the Blessed One then went to Ādirājya. There the Blessed One said to the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, in this place King Mahāsammata, who was the first king, was anointed. Therefore, this place was named Ādirājya (first kingship).”452

II. Bhadrāśva

III. Mathurā

A. The Prediction about Upagupta454

B. The Former Life of Upagupta457

C. The Brahmin Nīlabhūti459

D. The Obstruction of the Buddha’s Way by a Goddess

E. The Yakṣa Gardabha

IV. Otalā Park

A. The Visit of the Brahmin Otalāyana476

B. Kacaṅgalā486

V. Vairambhya

A. The Brahmin in a Park

B. King Agnidatta’s Offer496

C. Breaking a Hut521

D. A Brahmin Who Abused the Buddha Vipaśyin524

VI. Ayodhyā

A. The Simile of a Log and the Going Forth of Nanda, the Herdsman525

B. The Former Lives of Nanda and the Frog

VII. The Ganges

A. Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles

B. The Former Lives of the Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles

VIII. Hungry Ghosts

A. The Conversation with the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts

B. The Previous Lives of the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts

IX. Velāma552


9.

Chapter Nine

9.­1

Summary of Contents:560

Kumāravardhana, Krauñcāna,
Aṅgadikā, Maṇivatī
Sālabalā, Sālibalā,
Suvarṇaprastha, Sāketā
Rice Soup,561 Śrāvastī,
Anavatapta, Nagarabindu,
And Vaiśālī.

I. Kumāravardhana

9.­2

Thereupon the Blessed One arrived in the country of Kumāravardhana, where he said to the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, in this place a king named Upoṣadha was born and grew up.562 Therefore, this city was named Kumāravardhana.”563

II. Krauñcāna

III. Aṅgadikā

IV. Maṇivatī

V. Sālabalā567

VI. Sālibalā

VII. Suvarṇaprastha

VIII. Sāketā568

IX. Rice Soup574

A. The Peasants’ Going Forth and the Oxen’s Rebirth in Heaven577

B. The Former Lives of the Peasants and Oxen581

C. Toyikā584

X. Śrāvastī

A. A Leprous Beggar Woman’s Offering of Water Used for Boiling Rice598

B. The Offerings by King Prasenajit604

C. The Former Life of King Prasenajit605

D. The Offering of a Lamp by a Beggar Woman610

E. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Offerings Made by the Buddha in His Former Lives613

F. Former Life Stories I618

1. Māndhātṛ620

a. The Story of King Māndhātṛ621

b. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: The Son of the Head of a Guild656

c. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: A Grain Merchant661

2. Mahāsudarśana662

3. Velāma668

4. Kuśa672

a. The Story of Prince Kuśa673

b. The Former Life of Prince Kuśa683

5. Triśaṅku685

6. Mahādeva687

7. King Nimi691

8. Ādarśamukha696

9. Sudhana706

a. The Story of King Sudhana707

b. The Story of Prince Sudhana708

10. Viśvantara769

a. Viśvantara’s Story I770

b. Viśvantara’s Story II808

11. Saṃdhāna814

G. Former Life Stories II817

1. Bālāha819

2. A King825

3. The Snake828

4. Two Heads833

5. The Lapwing835

6. The Parrot837

7. The Banquet839

8. The Turtle841

9. Susena842

10. Merchants844

H. Former Life Stories III846

1. Six Tusks848

2. The Rabbit857

3. Parents860

a. The Story of Śyāma861

b. Breaking Wrong Laws864

4. Water Born866

5. Words of the Forest874

6. The Elephant876

7. The Nāga878

8. Dhṛtarāṣṭra880

I. The Bodhisattva as Four Teachers882

1. The Story of the Teacher Sunetra883

2. The Story of the Teacher Mūkapaṅgu884

3. The Story of the Teacher Araṇemi885

4. The Story of the Teacher Govinda895

J. The First Resolution and the First Veneration of a Buddha

5. The Story of King Prabhāsa901

6. The Story of the Potter Bṛhaddyuti903

K. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Veneration of Past Buddhas904

L. The Question of Ānanda or Section of Many Buddhas909

M. The Insult by the Brahmin Girl Cañcā934

XI. Anavatapta938

A. The Buddha’s Visit to Lake Anavatapta939

B. The Contest of Magical Power between Śāriputra and Mahā­maudgalyāyana943

1. A Story of the Present944

2. A Story of the Past: The Painter and the Mechanic947

3. A Story of the Past: The Two Painters950

4. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (1)951

5. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (2)952

6. A Story of the Past: The Ivory Carver and the Painter953

C. Verses of the Elders I957

1. Kāśyapa958

2. Śāriputra961

3. Maudgalyāyana964

4. Śobhita966

5. Sumanas967

6. Koṭīviṃśa969

7. Vāgīśa970

8. Piṇḍola972

9. Svāgata974

10. Nandika976

D. Verses of the Elders II980

1. Yaśas (1)981

2. Śaivala982

3. Bakkula984

4. Sthavira986

5. The Three987

6. Yaśas (2)988

7. Jyotiṣka991

8. Rāṣṭrapāla992

9. Svāti996

10. Jaṅghākāśyapa998

E. Verses of the Elders III1001

1. Panthaka1002

2. Sarpadāsa1004

3. Aniruddha1005

4. Kāla1013

5. Rāhula1015

6. Nanda1017

7. Dravya1019

8. Upasena1020

9. Bhadrika1021

10. Lavaṇabhadrika1022

F. Verses of the Elders IV1024

1. Madhuvāsiṣṭha1025

2. Hetu1026

3. Kauṇḍinya1027

4. Upālin1030

5. Prabhākara1033

6. Revata1034

7. The Sugata (prose)1036

a. The Son of a Householder1037

b. A Caravan Leader1040

c. A Young Brahmin1042

d. Bharadvāja1044

e. The Cause of the False Slander by Cañcā

I) A Brahmin1049

II) Mṛṇāla1050

f. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha1053

g. Uttara1054

h. A Physician1063

i. The Son of a Fisherman1065

j. A Wrestler1066

8. The Sugata (verse)1067

a. Introduction

b. Mṛṇāla

c. A Brahmin

d. Bharadvāja

e. The Son of a Householder

f. A Caravan Leader

g. The Son of a Fisherman

h. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha

i. A Physician

j. A Wrestler

k. Uttara

l. Conclusion

G. The Invitation by Viśākhā

XII. Nagarabindu

XIII. Vaiśālī

A. The Invitation by Dhanika and His Family1075

B. The Former Lives of Dhanika and His Family

C. The Rules on Food


10.

Chapter Ten

10.­1

Summary of Contents:1077

The Sick, Foods,
Breakfast, Leftovers,
Fruits from Forests, Lotus,
Lotus Roots, and Miṇḍhaka.

I. The Sick

10.­2

The following took place in Śrāvastī.


10.­3

There once was a sick monk in Śrāvastī. He requested a doctor, “Sir, prescribe medicine for me.”

Having asked the cause of the disease, the doctor said, “O noble one, have rice soup, and you will recover your health.”

II. Foods1087

III. Breakfast

IV. Leftovers

A. Alms-Food Obtained Previously

B. Leftovers Taken by Monks to the Monastery

C. Leftovers Brought by Laymen

V. Fruits Growing in the Forest

VI. Lotus

VII. Lotus Roots

VIII. Miṇḍhaka1097

A. The Conversion of Miṇḍhaka

B. Invitation after Mealtime

C. The Acceptance of Money

D. The Acceptance of Guḍa

E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family1112


11.

Chapter Eleven

11.­1

Summary of Contents:1122

The Drink Offered by Kaineya Was Received,1123 The Town of Kāśi, Barley Porridge,1124
Khādyaka in Pāpā,1125 Doubts, and Foul Foods.

I. The Drink Offered by Kaineya Was Received1126

A. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Prose)

11.­2

The Blessed One was once staying in the dwelling place in Ādumā.

1. The Sermon to the Four Great Kings1127

2. The Former Lives of the Four Great Kings1144

3. Kaineya Offers Drinks to the Blessed One

4. Śaila and Kaineya Go Forth

5. The Instruction by Three Disciples of the Buddha

6. The Former Lives of the Three Disciples

B. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Verse)1153

II. The Town of Kāśi, Barley Porridge

III. Khādyaka in Pāpā

IV. Doubts

V. Foul Foods1184

A. A Story of the Present about the Great Peacock Charm

B. Stories of the Buddha’s Former Lives Related to the Great Peacock Charm


ab.

Abbreviations

AA Aṅguttara­nikāya-Aṭṭhakathā. Edited by Walleser and Kopp (1924–56).
AG Anavatapta­gāthā.
AKBh Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya. Edited by Pradhan = Pradhan 1967.
AKUp Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā. (Section numbers are based on Honjō 1984 and 2014.)
AN Aṅguttara­nikāya = Morris et al. 1885–1961.
AdhvG Adhikaraṇa­vastu. Edited by Gnoli (1978).
Ap Apadāna = Lilley 2000.
BAK Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā = Chandra Das and Vidyābhūshana 1940.
BHSD Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. Vol. II Dictionary = Edgerton 1953.
Bhv Bhaiṣajya­vastu.
BhvY Bhaiṣajya­vastu. Japanese translation by Yao = Yao 2013a.
CPD The Critical Pāli Dictionary = Trenckner et al. 1924–92.
Ch. Chinese translation.
ChDas Tibetan English Dictionary = Das 1902.
Crv Carma­vastu.
Cīv Cīvara­vastu.
D Degé xylograph (scanned and published by the Buddhist Digital Resource Center).
DA Dīgha­nikāya-Aṭṭhakathā = Rhys Davids et al. 1968–71.
DN Dīgha­nikāya = Rhys Davids and Carpenter 1890–1911.
DPPN Dictionary of Pāli Proper Names = Malalasekera 1937.
DhpA Dhamma­padattha­kathā = Norman 1906.
Divy Divyāvadāna = Cowell and Neil [1886] 1987.
DĀ Dīrghāgama.
DĀ 35 Ambāṣṭha­sūtra. Edited by Melzer (2010a).
DĀc Dīrghāgama. Chinese translation (Taishō no. 1 Chang ahan jing 長阿含經).
EĀc Ekottarikāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 125 Zengyi ahan jing 増壹阿含經).
GBhv The Bhaiṣajya­vastu in the Gilgit manuscript = GMNAI i, 46–134.
GM Gilgit manuscripts of the Vinaya­vastu edited by Dutt = Dutt 1942–50 (page numbers of Bhv, which is in part i, is referred to just with “GM,” and those of other vastus with “GM ii, iii, and iv,” with part numbers).
GMNAI i Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 1, Vinaya Texts = Clarke 2014.
H Hemis manuscript.
J Jātaka = Fausbøll [1877–96] 1962–64.
Jäschke Tibetan English Dictionary = Jäschke 1881.
KA Kaṭhināvadāna = Degener 1990.
Kṣv Kṣudraka­vastu.
MN Majjhima­nikāya = Trenckner et al. [1888–1925] 1974–79.
MPS Mahā­parinirvāṇa-sūtra = Waldschmidt 1950–51.
MSA Mahā­sudarśanāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
MSV Mūla­sarvāstivāda Vinaya.
MW A Sanskrit-English Dictionary = Monier-Williams 1899.
MdhA Māndhātāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
Merv-av Avadāna anthology from Merv = Karashima and Vorobyova-Desyatovskaya 2015.
Mma Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī-sūtra = Skilling 1994–97, 608–22.
Mmvr Mahā­māyūrī­vidyā­rajñī = Takubo 1972.
Mv Mahā­vastu = Senart 1882–97.
Mvy Mahā­vyutpatti = Sakaki 1916.
MĀc Madhyamāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 26 Zhong ahan jing 中阿含經).
N Narthang xylograph.
NBhv The newly identified Bhaiṣajya­vastu fragments held in a private collection, Virginia, and the Schøyen Collection.
Negi Tibetan–Sanskrit Dictionary = Negi 1993–2005.
P Peking xylograph.
PLv Pāṇḍulohitaka­vastu.
PTSD PTS’s Pāli–English Dictionary = Rhys Davids and Stede 1921–25.
Ph phug brag manuscript.
Prjv Pravrajyāvastu. Translation in Miller 2018.
PrjvVW Pravrajyāvastu edited by Vogel and Wille. I: Vogel and Wille 1984; II: 1992; III: 1996; IV: 2002 (all these files are now available in one pdf file online, Vogel and Wille 2014).
R Ragya printed Kangyur.
S Stok Palace Manuscript.
SHT Sanskrithandschriften aus den Turfanfunden.
SN Saṃyutta­nikāya = Feer [1884–98] 1975–2006.
SWTF Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden = Waldschmidt et al. 1973–2018.
Sbhv Saṅghabheda­vastu.
SbhvG Saṅghabheda­vastu. edited by Gnoli (1977–78).
Sh Shey Palace manuscript.
Skt. Sanskrit.
Sn Sutta­nipāta = Andersen and Smith [1913] 1984.
Sumav Sumāgadhāvadāna = Iwamoto 1979.
SĀc Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 99 Za ahan jing 雜阿含經).
SĀc2 Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 100 Bieyi za ahan jing 別譯雜阿含經).
SĀc3 Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 101 Za ahan jing 雜阿含經).
T Tokyo manuscript.
Taishō Taishō shinshū daizōkyō 大正新脩大藏經. 100 vols. Tokyo: Taishō Issaikyō Kankōkai 大正一切經刊行會, 1924–34.
TheraG Theragāthā = Oldenberg and Pischel 1883.
Tib. Tibetan translation.
U Urga printed Kangyur .
Ud  Udāna = Steinthal 1982.
Ug Uttara­grantha.
Uv Udāna­varga = Bernhard 1965–68, i.
UvTib Udāna­varga in Tibetan translation = Champa Thupten Zongtse 1990.
VS Vinaya­sūtra transliterated by Study Group of Sanskrit Manuscripts in Tibetan dBu med Script.
Vin Vinayapiṭaka in Pāli = Oldenberg [1879–83] 1982–1997.
Viś I The first story of Viśvantara in the Bhv.
Viś II The second story of Viśvantara in the Bhv.
Viś III The story of Viśvantara in the Sbhv.
Viś IV Viśvantarāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
Vvbh Vinaya­vibhaṅga.
ms Manuscript.
Śav Śayanāsana­vastu.
ŚavG Śayanāsana­vastu. Edited by Gnoli (1978).

n.

Notes

n.­1
For an overview of the entire Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, see Clarke 2015, 73–81.
n.­2
Folios 91–293: GM i; GMNAI i plates 46–134.
n.­3
For details, see Yao 2018 and literature referred to therein.
n.­4
8.­22–8.­61 in the Tibetan version; see note to the corresponding translation.
n.­5
See Hiraoka 1998.
n.­6
Taishō no. 1448, Genben shuoyiqieyoubu pinaiye yaoshi 根本説一切有部毘奈耶藥事, Taishō 24.1a1–97a24.
n.­7
See the Pedurma edition, bka’ ’gyur ii 745, 867n14–15.
n.­8
Csoma [1836] 1984.
n.­32
Cf. the Nidāna in the Ug, pa F.81.a.6–81.b.1; Taishō no. 1456, 24.420a7–12 (Kishino 2013, 144–45).
n.­33
Cf. Kṣv, tha F.181.b–182.b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.269c.
n.­38
The last words of this summary, be’i ra to// sprin can bya rog rnams yin no, cannot be identified in the following passages. GBhv is damaged here.
n.­39
The following forty-six folios of GBhv are lost.
n.­40
Skt. *calācala (“ever-moving”); Tib. g.yo ba dang mi g.yo ba (“moving and not moving”). This stock passage about one who realizes the state of an arhat, “He, exerting himself … Indra and Upendra,” appears in the Sbhv, which gives us the original Sanskrit.
n.­41
Whereas this section of the Bhv prohibits only eating the flesh of elephants and nāgas, the Muktaka of the Ug prohibits the flesh of other kinds of beings such as crows, dogs, raptors, mules, foxes, and monkeys (pa F.157.a.2–158.b.7; Taishō no. 1456, 24.439b21–24). Cf. Kishino 2016, 242.
n.­42
Though not entirely clear, what is most likely meant is that the king might suspect that the pious gods, etc., have killed his elephants to offer their flesh to Buddhist monks.
n.­43
Ch. ji guo chu ye 既過初夜; Tib. de’i mtshan mo ’das nas (“after that night had passed”). We opt for Ch.
n.­44
Although Tib. bya ka lan da ka gnas pa seems to be a translation of *Kalandakanivāsa, this name is spelled Kalandaka­nivāpa in other chapters of the Vinayavastu where Skt. is extant. For the etymology of the name, see SbhvG i 163–166.
n.­45
Although the Skt. folios are lost for this part, we find the same Tib. name and its Skt. counterpart in another part of the Bhv (kha F.190.b.7 (9.­375); GM 104.3). Ch. a di ye 阿帝耶 provides further support for the name.
n.­46
A stock passage about the Buddha’s smile. For Skt., see SbhvG ii 161–63.
n.­47
For these two verses, see Skilling 1999 and Teiser 2006, 65.
n.­48
*Bala­cakravartin. A kind of inferior wheel-turning king. Cf. BHSD s.v. bala-cakravartin.
n.­49
Ch. cong kou er ru 從口而入 (“entered from the mouth”).
n.­50
The Nidāna of the Ug gives an account related to this rule in the Bhv, and its Ch. version preserves the Hemorrhoids Sūtra, which includes mantras, whereas the Tib. version does not mention such a sūtra. The sūtra has also been translated independently both in Ch. (Taishō no. 1325) and Tib. (Arśapraśamanasūtra, Toh 621). For details of the passage in the Nidāna, see Kishino 2013, 146–47, 347–48. For editions and studies of both independent sūtras, see Yamanaka et al. 2011. For comparisons between Buddhist and non-Buddhist literature on hemorrhoids, see Yamanaka et al. 2012.
n.­51
Ch. 時王大瞋。乃遣大臣。斬惡人首。: “At that time, the king became very angry, sent a minister, and cut off the wicked man’s head.” Judging from its several examples in the vinaya literature, the phrase “I have renounced [a person]” uttered by a king means a death sentence. For the most clear example, see SbhvG ii 171; nga 226.a.
n.­52
S smod byed; D gnod byed.
n.­53
Ch. si wan er qian 四萬二千 (“forty-two thousand”).
n.­54
The Āyuḥparyanta­sūtra (Matsumura 1989, 83–84) and the Udānavarga (Uv 8.2–5) provide us with Sanskrit verses parallel to these lines, which are lost in Skt. Bhv.
n.­55
Tib. gru sum; Ch. san zhong se yao 三種澁藥; Skt. *trikaṭuka: “black and long pepper and dry ginger.” MW s.v. trikaṭuka. Cf. Pāli: tekaṭula, “black sesame, rice, and mugga bean,” Vin i 210.28.
n.­56
Tib. chab mar (lit. “water-oil”); Ch. su 酥 (translation of Skt. sarpis, “clarified butter, ghee”).
n.­57
Within the boundary, cooking and storing food is prohibited. Ānanda’s answer may sound odd because the setting of this story is “a village where the boundary had not been fixed.” However, a kind of boundary can be established even in a place where the boundary has not been fixed (Poṣv 326–27 § 49.1).
n.­58
Ch. lacks this question and the following answer.
n.­59
Ch. sheng mi 生米 (“raw rice”); Tib. ’bras skam (“dry rice”).
n.­60
This story of Pūrṇa has a parallel in the Pūrṇāvadāna, chapter 2 of the Divy (English trsl. Tatelman 2000; Rotman 2008–17, i).
n.­61
S bdag gis; D bdag gi.
n.­62
According to the Arthaśāstra, “A child begotten by a master with his own female slave shall be considered free along with the mother” (Tatelman 2000, 82n9).
n.­63
According to the Manusmṛti, the first sixteen days of the menstrual period were considered to be suitable for pregnancy, although having intercourse in the first four days is not recommended (Manu 3.46–47). For other views on the appropriate time for conception, see Kritzer 2014, 12. Cf., also, ibid. 40–41; 230–32.
n.­64
Although this passage is abbreviated here, it has not yet appeared in full in the Bhv. The full passage appears in Chapter Nine, X. F. 9. b. The Story of Prince Sudhana.
n.­65
The Sanskrit term translated “loans” here is uddhāra, and those translated “two different types of deposits” are nyāsa and nikṣepa. Cf. Kane 1973, 454–61; Sarma 1997, 192; and Olivelle 2015, q.v.
n.­66
Although there has been no explanation in the story, it would be safe to assume that Bhava’s wife and sons abandoned him only temporarily and came back to him after he recovered from the illness.
n.­67
Ch. chi tong 赤銅 (“copper”).
n.­68
Tib. ’phel; Skt. (Divy) bhidyate (“split, broken”). The meaning of the Tib. (“Mantras increase”) is unclear to the present translator, whereas there seems to be no problem in the Skt.
n.­69
This verse appears frequently in the MSV and other Buddhist and non-Buddhist literature. Cf. Uv 1.22 (cf. Mizuno 1995, 11. Note that there is some confusion in the right column of the table), Rāmāyana 2.98.16, etc.
n.­70
S da; D de.
n.­71
Translation of this sentence is tentative.
n.­72
S mi blang gi; D gis.
n.­73
These texts have been thought by scholars such as Lamotte and Mayeda to belong to the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins (Lamotte 1957; Mayeda 1964). Among these texts, the Śailagāthā is included in the Bhv itself: B. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Verse).
n.­74
S sangs rgyas kyi: D kyis.
n.­75
S dge sbyong; D dge slong. Cf. Divy: śramaṇo.
n.­76
S gang gi; D gis.
n.­77
Tib. sangs rgyas dgongs pas lus gzugs bkab par gyur; Skt. ms nepacchito buddha­manorathena (147v7); cf. SbhvG ii 141; PrjvVW III 263 nepacchitā as pl. The Divy gives naiva sthito, which Rotman emends to evaṃ sthito (Rotman 2008–17, i 88: “and so he remained by the will of the Buddha,” and 406n271), whereas Hiraoka reads nepatthito (Hiraoka 2011, 246: “He clothed himself”). The present translation is based on Tib.
n.­78
The following passage corresponds to SĀc 311, SN 35.88, and MN 145. Cf. Yao 2010.
n.­79
S lhag par zhen cing gnas na; D nas.
n.­80
Tib. lacks this part of the conversation: “Pūrṇa, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are fierce…” up to “…but they do not strike me with sticks or swords,” while the Divy and Ch. provide it.
n.­81
P bcom ldan ’das kyi; D, S: kyis.
n.­82
This alludes to a story about monks’ suicide in the Vinayavibhaṅga (D ca F.133.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.659c).
n.­83
Ch. does not abbreviate the stock phrase here.
n.­84
Only in the Bhv and the Divy does the story of Pūrṇa in these texts continue beyond Pūrṇa’s attainment of arhatship with Pūrṇa alive. In the other parallel stories, such as SĀc 311, Taishō no. 108, MN 145, and SN 35.88, Pūrṇa achieves complete emancipation (parinirvāṇa) at this point. See Yao 2010, 3.2.1.
n.­85
S lha min; D lha mi.
n.­86
On the original Skt. of this verse, see Shackleton Bailey 1950, 179.
n.­87
S khyod kyi gcen; D khyod kyis gcan.
n.­88
S rgya mtsho chen por; D po.
n.­89
The text here lacks the phrase “why do I harass you?” See Shackleton Bailey 1950, 179; kha F.119.a.
n.­90
Skt. (Divy) candana­mālaḥ prāsādaḥ; Tib. tsan dan gyi phreng ba’i khang bzangs: “a palace garlanded with sandalwood.” Cf. BHSD s.v. māla.
n.­91
The Sumāgadhāvadāna has a similar story. See Iwamoto [1967] 1978; 1979.
n.­92
The “venerable elder Pūrṇa” referred to here is a different person from Pūrṇa who has been the subject of this story so far. There are at least two different interpretations of the word kuṇḍopadhānīyaka, one considering it to qualify the person by his birthplace as Tib. does (Burnouf 1876, 232; Iwamoto 1967, 68; and Hiraoka 2007, i 109) and the other by his practice, using a water pot (kuṇḍa) as a pillow (upadhāna) (Iwamoto 1979, 16; Tatelman 2000, 89; Rotman 2008–17, i 409). The present translation follows the former. As Rotman notes, a monk named Kuṇḍadhāna Thera is known to Pali literature. Although he is said to be “the first among those who received food tickets (salāka)” (DPPN, q.v.), there seem to be few other things in common between this person and the “venerable elder Pūrṇa” in the present story.
n.­93
Tib. ri dags; Skt. (Divy) mṛgāra; Ch. lu mu fu ren 鹿母夫人 (*mṛgāramātā).
n.­94
Tib. grags pa; Skt. (Divy) vapuṣmattayā (“by handsomeness”); Ch. yan mao 顏貌 (“face”).
n.­95
S ngo mtshar du gyur pas; D pa’i.
n.­96
Skt. (Divy) pihitāny apāyadvārāṇi; Ch. guan bi e qu 關閉惡趣. Tib. ngan song gi sgo ni bkum: “destroyed the gate to inferior states of existence.” We opt for Skt. and Ch.
n.­97
S: bcom ldan ’das kyis; D kyi.
n.­98
For the following story, cf. Merv-av 207.
n.­99
Cf. n.­77.
n.­100
On Vakkalin, who is known for his suicide in the Āgamas and Nikāyas, see Sugimoto 1981, 21–24; Delhey 2009; and Anālayo [2011c] 2015, 235–56.
n.­101
The following stories about the visit of the two nāgas and the conversion of Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s mother are quoted in the AKUp without any mention of the source. Cf. Honjō 2014, ii 835ff.
n.­102
A similar statement appears in the Kṣv, D da F.191.a.2–4; Taishō no. 1451, 24.375c17–21.
n.­103
For previous studies on the monastic office responsible for monastic property, upadhivārika, see Shōno 2017, 54n9.
n.­104
The following story has been partially translated from Ch. in Teiser 2006, 58. For the parallel in Divy 2, see Strong 1983, 180, as well as the other translations listed in n.­60.
n.­105
The following statement by the Buddha corresponds to AN 2.4.2 (I 61–62) and EĀc 20.11. It also has parallels in the Vvbh (cf. Yao 2010, 3.2.2); Kṣv (cf. Schopen [1995] 2004a, 179); and the Nidāna in the Ug (Kishino 2013, 393n257).
n.­106
bu mo bzang mo (Skt. bhadrakanyā) may be a common noun meaning “noble girl” rather than a proper name. Among BHSD and modern translations of Divy 2 (Burnouf 1876; Sakaki 1912–15; Iwamoto 1974; Tatelman 2000; Hiraoka 2007; Rotman 2008–17, i; and Strong 1983 as a partial translation of this episode), only Rotman translates the word as a common noun.
n.­107
The following verse has a parallel in the Prjv (GM 4.59/D 4.356). Ch. of the Prjv does not provide the verse.
n.­108
This story has a parallel in the Vvbh, D ja F.221.a–F.224.a, Taishō no. 1442, 23.842c–844a). It explains the origin of a festival held for two nāga kings, which is also mentioned in the Prjv (1.144), the Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga, and the Avadāna­śataka (Schopen 2007, 218ff.).
n.­109
See the story of the conversion of Nanda and Upananda in the Vvbh (Taishō no. 1442, 23.866c–869a), which has a parallel in EĀc 36.5 (Taishō no. 125, 2.703b ff.). This story presents a similar plot to the story in the Bhv, in which two nāga kings dressed as humans do not show respect to a human king and the king becomes angry.
n.­110
The Udānavarga (Uv 21.11–13) gives us Skt. verses parallel to these lines.
n.­111
These two verses have parallels in SN 7.2.6 (I 179), SĀc 1155 (Taishō no. 99, 2.307c), SĀc2 78 (Taishō no. 100, 2.401a), and SĀc3 7 (Taishō no. 101, 2.495a).
n.­112
Ch. dang zi hui guo 當自悔過; Tib. bzod pa byin cig: “give forgiveness.” We opt for Ch. Cf. corresponding words in the Vvbh, bzod pa gsol bar bya.
n.­113
Ch. ba ri 八日, “eighth day,” without mention of the fourteenth day.
n.­114
Here, the story of the nāga king Apalāla begins. See n.­128. The series of episodes including that of a brahmin’s rebirth as Apalāla, his conversion by the Buddha, the competition between Magadha and Vaiśālī at the occasion of the Buddha’s crossing the Ganges, the quelling of an epidemic by the Buddha in Vaiśālī, etc. have parallels in Taishō no. 155 Foshuo pusa benhang jing 佛説菩薩本行經.
n.­115
Agnidatta asks the brahmin’s wife in Ch.
n.­116
In Ch., the name of the daughter is Dian guang 電光, “Lightning,” the wife’s is Zhen bao 震雹, “Hail,” and the son’s wife’s is Sheng lun nao 勝輪惱, “Overwhelming the Torment of the Circle.”
n.­117
A parallel story in Taishō no. 155, Foshuo pusa benhang jing 佛説菩薩本行經, specifies “the four great disciples”: Mahākāśyapa, Śāriputra, Maudgalyāyana, and Aniruddha.
n.­118
There are other examples in which wishes maliciously made are realized in the Prjv (Skt. missing; 4.299–4.316; Taishō no. 1444, 23.1038b) and its parallel in Divy 24 (346.4–7); Crv (GM iv 179.2–4; ka F.260.b; Taishō no. 1447, 23.1051b) and its parallel in Divy 1 (14.17–19); Kṣv (da F.150.b–151a; Taishō no. 1451, 362c–363a). The means to prevent a malicious wish from being realized is explained in Bhv (8.­92–8.­94); GM 19.4–20.2; Taishō 24a13–28.
n.­119
Tib. sdom la; Ch. nei she song yue 内攝頌曰: “said in the internal summary of contents (i.e., “section index” in the present translation).” We opt for Tib.
n.­120
Ch. bo zha zhu zhang lin 波吒竹仗林 (*Pāṭali, *Veṇuyaṣṭikā). Despite this Summary of Contents, Ch. does not include the episode of the Buddha’s stay in Nālandā and Veṇuyaṣṭikā.
n.­121
Strangely, neither this word nor the corresponding episode appears in the following story.
n.­122
This event is explained in detail in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 186ff.; nga F.238.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.197b28ff.). The Bhv presents the story of the birth of this elephant in a later part (10.­54).
n.­126
In this section, the story of how the Buddha was asked to end the epidemic that had swept through Vaiśālī is recounted. The subject of the epidemic fades away and then suddenly reappears at the end of the section about Vaiśālī, ending with the quelling of the epidemic.
n.­131
This section corresponds to SĀc 987 and SĀc2 212.
n.­135
This section corresponds to SĀc 403.
n.­144
This story has a parallel in EĀc 38.11. Cf. Kuan 2013, 611. The Bhv presents in a later part (2. Mahāsudarśana) another story of King Mahāsudarśana, the content of which is totally different from that in this section.
n.­145
The story extending from this section (“The Ganges”) to the next section (“Mahāpraṇāda”) has a parallel in the Maitreyāvadāna, chapter 3 of the Divy (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 119–33).
n.­149
Cf. J 264 (ii 333) and J 489 (iv 325).
n.­150
BhvY 3.6.1 (p. 102).
n.­151
BhvY 3.6.2 (p. 102ff.).
n.­152
BhvY 3.6.3 (p. 105ff.). For variations of the story of King Śaṅkha (and the Buddha Maitreya), see Anālayo [2014b] 2017, 349–91.
n.­156
BhvY 3.6.4 (p. 107ff.).
n.­159
BhvY 3.a (p. 110ff.). Hereafter the story corresponds to the MPS (p. 160ff.).
n.­160
BhvY 3.b (p. 111ff.). This section corresponds to SĀc 854, SN 55.10, and AKUp 9035. Cf. Honjō 2014, ii 921–23; Yao 2010, 3.2.7.
n.­165
BhvY 3.c (p. 114ff.). This section corresponds to AKUp 2051. See Honjō 2014, i 225–28.
n.­169
This and the following sections (A to E) have been divided by the present translator for convenience. This section (VII.A) and the third section (C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī) correspond to SĀc 622. See Yao 2010, 3.2.8. For parallels to this sūtra and a Sanskrit text of this part of the MPS revised with later identified manuscript fragments, see Hosoda 2014, 115–21.
n.­172
This section has a parallel in AN 5.195. SĀc 1149 is also close to this story. See Yao 2010, 3.2.9.
n.­178
This section has parallels in the Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra, which survives in Tibetan translation, and the Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī­sūtra, which survives in Sanskrit. See Yao 2010, 3.2.10 and n.­126. See Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, trans., The Mahāsūtra “On Entering the City of Vaiśālī”, Toh 312.
n.­185
Ch. lacks this summary of contents. It is unknown whether NBhv included it, due to the damage to the corresponding folio.
n.­186
Here Ch. abbreviates the section with the statement: “As explained in detail in the teachings of the Jijian jing 飢儉經, the Sūtra of Famine, and also as in the Daopin chuanlai jing 道品傳來經, the Sūtra of the Tradition of the *Mārgavarga, Liuji jing 六集經, the Sūtra of the group of six, and Daniepan jing 大涅槃經, the *Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra.” On the other hand, the contents of this section in Tib. (Chapter 4. I) correspond to SN 47.9 and, presumably, a missing sūtra in the SĀc, the contents of which are included in the MPS (see Yao 2010, 3.2.11). NBhv provides a sentence that, in spite of the manuscript’s damaged state, seems to be similar to the original Skt. that Yijing translated. The manuscript reads: “…as in the Sūtra of Famine in the *Mārga­varga­nipāta, in the Ṣaṭsūtrika­nipāta…” This proves that “The Sūtra of the Tradition of the *Mārgavarga” in Ch. is, properly speaking, the title of a chapter of the Saṃyuktāgama that includes the Sūtra of Famine. In addition, “The Sūtra of the Group of Six” is the title of a chapter of the Dīrghāgama that includes the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra. To sum up, NBhv and Ch. both state that they abbreviate this section, which corresponds to the Sūtra of Famine in the *Mārga­varga­nipāta in the Saṃyuktāgama and also to the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra in the Ṣaṭsūtrikanipāta in the Dīrghāgama. See Yao 2013b.
n.­194
The following passage corresponds to MĀc 67, MN 83, EĀc 50.4, and the introductory section of the EĀc, AKUp 2050, etc. The story of King Mahādeva and Nimi appears again in the Bhv (6. Mahādeva and 7. King Nimi). While the story here follows exactly the Mahādevasūtra in the Madhyamāgama of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins, the second story mentioned above has been slightly changed from the Madhyamāgama version in accord with the context of the Bhv (Yao 2007; Forthcoming b). For a study of parallels to this story based on the EĀc version, see Anālayo 2011a, i 466–74; 2016b, 113–214.
n.­205
Ch. lacks this section. NBhv corresponds to Tib.
n.­208
Ch. lacks this section. The following story corresponds to SĀc 1095, etc. (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.13). A story related to this encounter between the Buddha and Māra in Sālā appears in the Bhv (c. A Young Brahmin).
n.­210
Panglung mentions Taishō no. 2121 as a parallel to this story. But the parallel story in Taishō no. 2121, Jinglü yixiang 經律異相 (more precisely, sūtra no. 45.14, Taishō 53.237c19ff.) is an extract from Taishō no. 212, Chuyao jing 出曜經 (Taishō 4.626c29ff.).
n.­213
The following four sections, from VII. Bhārgava to X. Kanthaka, are related to a series of episodes in the life story of the Buddha in the Sbhv. For the ṛṣi Bhārgava, see SbhvG i 93; nga F.15.b.
n.­214
Cf. SbhvG i.92–93; nga F.14.b–15.a.
n.­215
Cf. SbhvG i. 91; nga F.13.b.
n.­216
Cf. SbhvG i 91; nga F.14.a.
n.­218
The Sbhv does not mention this place name.
n.­219
The following story corresponds to a part of the MPS (Waldschmidt 1948) and a part of EĀc 42.3 (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.14). The story is depicted in reliefs from Gandhāra, where it is clearly connected to the Buddha’s nirvāṇa (Zin 2006b).
n.­227
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­228
D bya can; S byed can. This entry indicates a place name bye ma can (*Sikatin), which later appears in the corresponding section ( X. Sikatin).
n.­229
In this short section, a sūtra abbreviated in Tib. is fully narrated in Ch., which is a rather rare occurrence. The sūtra in question, the title of which is not mentioned in Ch., corresponds to SĀc 263, SN 22.101 (mistakenly referred to as SN 47.19 in BhvY 149), etc. Cf. Salomon 2018, 121ff., 149ff.; Yao 2011, 3.2.15. Both SĀc 263 and SN 22.101 include a parable of a carpenter using an axe, which explains the two different ways of referring to this section in the General Summary of the Contents of the Chapter on Medicines and the Summary of Contents of Chapter Five: “The Carpenter” and “The Axe.”
n.­230
This sentence is an editorial insertion in the text.
n.­231
This passage is related to a part of the Buddha’s life story in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 32–33; ga F.273.a–b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.105a–b).
n.­233
Cf. SbhvG i 45; ga F.280.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.108a.
n.­234
For the related passage in the Sbhv, see n.­232.
n.­237
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­238
This section corresponds to SĀc 807, SN 54.11, etc. Cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.17, Yao forthcoming a, and Anālayo [2007] 2015, 333–45.
n.­239
Ch. “two months.”
n.­242
This section corresponds to the Ambāṣṭhasūtra, the thirty-fifth sūtra of the Dīrghāgama manuscript identified at the end of the twentieth century (DĀ 35), manuscript fragments of a sūtra found in Central Asia, a part of the Kṣv, DĀc 20, and DN 3. For a detailed study of DĀ 35, including a comparison with the Bhv and Kṣv, see Melzer 2010a, 93–281. The present translation generally follows Melzer in DĀ 35 regarding the restoration of proper names in this section.
n.­316
The following passage corresponds to MĀc 212, MN 90. Cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.9. Ch. abbreviates the section with this statement: 復至日出聚落. 爲二姊妹女人, 一名賢喜, 二名明月, 廣説如經, “Again (the Blessed One departed and) arrived at Sunrise Village. For two sisters named Excellent Pleasure and Bright Moon‍—as explained in detail in the sūtra.”
n.­331
This section has a parallel in the Chuyao jing 出曜経 32 (Taishō no. 212, 4.760a–b).
n.­340
Although the place name mentioned in this section is “Where There Is a City,” the section is referred to as “City” in the summary of contents.
n.­342
Most of this section corresponds to SĀc 971 and SĀc2 205, with a number of differences. See Yao 2011, 3.2.20. The story is employed as an explanation of the rule that is established at the end of this section.
n.­349
This section corresponds to Divy 4 Brāhmaṇa­dārikāvadāna (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 135–42). There is also a parallel in the Dazhidulun 大智度論, Taishō no. 1509, 25.115a–b (Hiraoka 2009, 43). The present translation follows Divy 4 regarding the restoration of proper names in this section.
n.­353
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­354
This section corresponds to SĀc 813 and SN 54.10. The text in the Bhv is too abbreviated to make adequate sense. See Yao 2011, 3.2.21 and forthcoming a. Regarding the mindfulness of breathing in and breathing out explained in this section, see Choong 2000, 225–27.
n.­355
Here Ch. abbreviates this section with the statement 此經廣説如雜阿笈摩, “This sūtra should be recited as explained in detail in the Saṃyuktāgama.”
n.­360
The first half of this section corresponds to the first half of SĀc 36 and SN 22.43 (this part has been translated into English in Dhammadinnā 2014), and the second half of the section corresponds to the second half of SĀc 813 (see I. Kimpilā in this chapter). See Yao 2011, 3.2.22 and Yao forthcoming a. Cf., also, SĀc 639, which includes the teachings about “the island that is yourself,” etc., and is set in the same place.
n.­366
This section parallels MĀc 132, MN 82, and the Rāṣṭra­pāla­sūtra that survives in Skt. manuscript (Waldschmidt 1980). For a comparative text of the Rāṣṭra­pāla­sūtra and Bhv Tib., see Matsumura 1985. Cf., also, Anālayo 2011a, i 451–66; ii 1047–48. The story of Rāṣṭrapāla is narrated in verse in a later part of the Bhv, in the Anavatapta­gāthā section (9.­1875).
n.­378
The story in this section has a parallel in the Stuti­brāhmaṇāvadāna, chapter 5 of the Divy (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 143–49). Étienne Lamotte has identified the place names that appear in this and the following sections, although he has not given in full the grounds for his identifications (Lamotte 1951, 152–58).
n.­383
The first half of the Indra­nāma­brāhmaṇāvadāna, chapter 6 of the Divy, is parallel to this section (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 151–59; for other parallels, see Hiraoka 2011, 236–37).
n.­386
The beginning of the following story resembles a part of the story of Miṇḍhaka in the Bhv (10.­68–10.­72).
n.­387
Cf. Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XLII (English trsl. from Bhv Tib.); Chavannes 1910–11, ii 420–24 (French trsl. from Bhv Ch.); Merv-av 295.
n.­392
English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XLII. Parallel stories: J 177; Merv-av, 295.
n.­394
BhvY 7.10.1 (p. 227ff.). This story has a parallel in the Muktaka in the Ug: pa F.198.b.1–199.a.4; Taishō no. 1452, 24.454b–c.
n.­401
BhvY 7.10.2 (p. 228ff.). The following story of the Buddha’s travel to the north to convert the nāga king Apalāla is narrated in different texts (Ono 1916, 91–100, 482–89; Lamotte 1966, 130–36). Place names vary considerably in these sources.
n.­409
BhvY 7.10.3 (p. 230).
n.­413
BhvY 7.10.4 (p. 231).
n.­415
BhvY 7.10.5 (p. 231).
n.­416
BhvY 7.10.6 (p. 231).
n.­418
BhvY 7.10.7 (p. 231ff.).
n.­426
BhvY 7.10.8 (p. 233).
n.­430
BhvY 7.10.9 (p. 233ff.).
n.­432
BhvY 7.10.10 (p. 234).
n.­433
BhvY 7.10.11 (p. 234).
n.­434
BhvY 7.10.12 (p. 234).
n.­440
This story has parallels in the Binaiye 鼻奈耶 (Taishō no. 1464, 24.858a) and the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1545, 27.28b–29b).
n.­451
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­452
The Sbhv gives the story of the beginnings of kingship, in which the first king in the world is called Mahāsammata (SbhvG i 15; ga F.262.b). However, in the story in the Sbhv there is no mention of either the place name or the anointing of the king.
n.­454
This prediction has parallels in Divy 26 and 27, SĀc 604 and 640. Cf., also, AKBh 183.10, AKUp 3097 (Honjō 2014, i 467). In the Kṣv, the prediction is repeated by Ānanda to Śāṇakavāsin after the nirvāṇa of the Buddha and Mahākāśyapa (da F.320.b.1–4; Taishō no. 1451, 24.410b).
n.­457
Cf. Strong 1992, 44–45 (English trsl. from Skt. Bhv); Deeg 2007, 46–47 (English trsl. from the Divy).
n.­459
For Skt. parallels to this story, see Wille 2014a, 193; 2014b, 230.
n.­476
This story is entitled Otalāyanasūtra in Skt., in which the story is abbreviated, and corresponds to SN 48.42 and AKUp 9005. Fumio Enomoto has suggested that the SĀc once included a parallel sūtra to this in a fascicle that is lost today (Enomoto 1984). See Yao 2011, 3.2.25, and forthcoming a.
n.­486
For comparative studies of the parallel stories of Kacaṅgalā, see Durt 2005, Muldoon-Hules 2009, and Matsumoto 2010. In addition to the parallels referred to by Durt, see Merv-av, 210–11.
n.­496
This story, in which the Buddha and his monks have to eat horse-fodder barley during the rainy-season retreat despite a brahmin king’s promise to provide food for them, has parallels in different vinayas and other sources. Hirakawa has noted that the story’s subject and location in vinaya s differ: in the Pāli Vinaya, the Sifen lü (Dharmaguptaka Vinaya), and the Wufen lü (Mahīśāsaka Vinaya), this story is located in the introductory section of the entire vinaya as the account of the event that caused the Buddha to declare the general principle that each regulation should be established only after some practical problem has arisen. In the Shisong lü (the so-called Sarvāstivāda Vinaya) and the MSV (Bhv), utterly unrelated to the above principle, the story is focused on a karmic teaching about the Buddha’s evil action in his former life and its result in the present (Hirakawa 1993–95, i 107–115). The following is the plot of these parallels (proper names, etc., based on the Bhv): 1. The Buddha arrives at Vairambhya (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 2. A brahmin (king) asks the Buddha questions (Pā = AN 8.11; MĀc 157, etc.). 3. The brahmin (king) offers food, etc., for the rainy-season retreat (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 4. The brahmin fails to carry out the above offer and the Buddha and monks experience difficulty in obtaining food (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 5. A caravan leader offers horse-fodder barley to the Buddha (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 6. Mahā­maudgalyāyana offers to resolve the matter using his magical power, but the Buddha refuses (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi = EĀc 42.3; MPS 31.56–83). 7. A woman cooks the barley (Shi; Bhv = SĀc 722 [parallel only to Bhv]). 8. Śāriputra requests the Buddha to establish the rules of training, but the Buddha refuses (Pā; Si; Wu). 9. Only after the rainy-season retreat, the brahmin (king) realizes that the food has not been provided. He repents and offers food to the Buddha (Pā; Wu; Shi; Bhv). Park 2012 also gives a comparison of the parallel stories. For another parallel, see Rosen 1959, 165–68.
n.­521
Skt. and Ch. abbreviate the main content of this section, referring to “the Vairambhya­sūtra in the chapter of the fours (catuṣkanipāta) in the Ekottarikāgama” and “the fourth chapter (第四品) of the Ekottarikāgama (増一阿笈摩),” respectively. The abbreviated part, the Buddha’s teaching to the monks, corresponds to AN 4.51; however, AN 4.51 does not include the conversation about whether the hut should be broken or not and has a different location for the narrative. In contrast, AKUp 4010 corresponds to this entire section (Honjō 2014, ii 524–26). Although the AKUp does not mention any sūtra title, it is likely to be quoting a sūtra, not the vinaya, since the relevant part of the AKBh on which the AKUp comments states “said in the sūtra,” quoting a few lines. Waldschmidt, basing himself on the place name Vairambhya, assumes AN 8.11 and MĀc 157 to be parallels to the sūtra abbreviated here, but this has to be rejected on the basis of Tib. (Waldschmidt 1980, 141–42; Schopen 2000, 94, 136n16). For the connections between these sūtras and the story of the Buddha’s eating horse-fodder barley, see n.­496.
n.­524
This story is narrated again later in the Bhv, in the “Tathāgata chapter” in the Anavatapta­gāthā section (f. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha).
n.­525
This section corresponds to SĀc 1174, SN 35.200, and EĀc 43.3 (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.28). SĀc 1174 consists only of the conversation between the Buddha and a monk and the story of Nanda’s going forth, with neither the episode of the frog nor that of Nanda’s cry of fear. The SN and EĀc versions are more concise. Due to the lack of any other evidence, it is not particularly clear which part of this section belongs to “a sūtra.” For a Gāndhārī parallel, see Glass 2007, 14; for parallels to stock passages, see Chung 2008, 82. For the reference to the story in the Vyākhyāyukti, see Skilling 2000, 346.
n.­552
This story, narrating a king’s encounter with an old man, a sick man, and a dead man, resembles a part of the Buddha’s biography. Cf. SbhvG ii 65–71; ga F.291.b–nga F.5.a.
n.­560
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­561
In the text, a story about “rice soup” is followed by a story of five hundred peasants, but the latter is not mentioned in the summaries of contents in either Skt. or Tib. Further, there is an episode located in Toyikā before the scene moves to “Śrāvastī.” Although the summary of contents in Skt. gives the entry “Toyikā” before “Śrāvastī,” Tib. lacks the former.
n.­562
Upoṣadha is the father of King Māndhātṛ, whose story is narrated later in the Bhv (Chapter Nine, VIII. Sāketā).
n.­563
The name Kumāravardhana is a compound consisting of kumāra (“prince”) and vardhana (“growth”). It seems that this and the next episode have been conflated here in Ch.: “Then the Blessed One arrived at the city of Kumāravardhana (tongchang 童長) and said to the venerable Ānanda, ‘Once a king was born and grew up in this city. His name was Upoṣadha. Therefore this city was named Krauñcāna (xiangsheng 象聲).’ ”
n.­567
The episode of Sālabalā is absent in the Degé edition, probably as a result of confusion of the two episodes of Sālabalā and Sālibalā. In contrast, Ch. gives only Sālabalā, suoluolishu 娑羅力樹, and lacks Sālibalā. Skt. gives both.
n.­568
The story of King Māndhātṛ in this section, VIII. Sāketā, partially corresponds to the Māndhātṛsūtra narrated in the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit later in the Bhv (9.­138 ff.) with many differences. See the notes there for parallels and comparisons.
n.­574
Only Ch. has a summary of contents just before this section: “The cause of the well of gruel and golden barley, of peasants and oxen, of a leprous woman’s water used for washing rice, of King Prasenajit, of a poor woman’s lamp, and of King Māndhātṛ.”The series of stories from Rice Soup to C. Toyikā corresponds to Divy 31. According to Hiraoka, Sudhana­kumārāvadānam, the title given at the end of Divy 31, is incorrect and should be corrected to Pañca­kārṣaka­śatāvadānam (Hiraoka 2007, ii 275n56). A story somewhat similar to the story of Rice Soup is found in Merv-av 219.
n.­577
Section label 9.a.1 in BhvY (p. 286ff.). This section does not appear in the summary of contents in Skt. and Tib. (9.­1), but is mentioned there in Ch.
n.­581
Section label 9.a.2 in BhvY (p. 287ff.). This section does not appear in the summary of contents (9.­1).
n.­584
Section label 9.b in BhvY (p. 288ff.). This section is not referred to in the summary of contents (9.­1) and corresponds to the second half of Divy 6 and the second half of Divy 31 (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 154–59, 419–20). The parallel in Divy 6 seems to have been caused erroneously (Hiraoka 2007, i 160). André Bareau has summarized parallel stories of the stūpa of the Buddha Kāśyapa in the Sifen lü (Dharmaguptaka Vinaya), Wufen lü (Mahīśāsaka Vinaya), Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya, Binaiye, and the Kṣv (1962, 257ff.). Takushū Sugimoto has also listed the first three of these stories and the story of Toyikā in the Bhv along with other materials, including the DhpA, and has pointed out reports about the Buddha Kāśyapa’s stūpa made by Faxian and Xuanzang (Gaoseng Faxian zhuan 高僧法顕伝, Taishō no. 2085, 51.861a; Datang xiyuji 大唐西域記, Taishō no. 2087, 51.900c; Sugimoto 1978). Whereas Bareau considered the stories in the Sifen lü, Wufen lü, and Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya to originate from an old common source, Gregory Schopen proposed the opposite view, introducing the stories in the Bhv and Divy ([1985] 1997, 28–29). Schopen regarded this version in the Bhv and Divy as an old account preceding the other parallel stories, based on his observations that the version does not have the subplots found in the other versions and knows nothing about a stūpa at Toyikā, only about relics.
n.­598
Section number 9.10.1 in BhvY (p. 292ff.). The series of stories from here to D. The Offering of a Lamp by a Beggar Woman corresponds to Divy 7 Nagarāvarambikāvadāna (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 161–75, 420–22). Cf. TheraG 1054–56. Cf., also, BAK 17 Ādarśa­mukhāvadāna (Straube 2009, 108–21, 254–59), which summarizes the series of stories from this section to F. 8. Ādarśamukha in the Bhv. There is another parallel in the Gilgit manuscripts (Hinüber 2014, 97).
n.­604
Section number 9.10.2 in BhvY (p. 296ff.). For parallels, see n.­598.
n.­605
Section number 9.10.3 in BhvY (p. 297ff.). For parallels, see n.­598.
n.­610
Section number 9.10.4 in BhvY (p. 299ff.). For parallels, see n.­598. Cf., also, Xian’yu jing 賢愚経 (Taishō no. 202, 4.370c–371c).
n.­613
Section number 9.10.5 in BhvY (p. 301). A story somewhat similar to this episode, in which the Buddha remonstrates with King Prasenajit for expecting a great result from his offerings, is in EĀc 23.1 (Taishō no. 125, 2.609a ff.). Cf. Anālayo [2014a] 2016b, 392–93.
n.­618
Section number 9.10.6 in BhvY (p. 301ff.).
n.­620
Section number 9.10.6.1 in BhvY (p. 302ff.). Cf. VIII. Sāketā in this chapter. This section was translated from Tib. by Schiefner (tr. by Ralston, 1882, chap. I). Although the story is referred to as “the Māndhātṛsūtra in the Section Connected to Kings in the Madhyamāgama” in Skt. and Ch., which abbreviate the story after the first few lines, it is not entirely clear which part of the story in the Bhv corresponds to the sūtra. The story has parallels in MĀc 60 Sizhou jing 四洲経, Divy 17 Māndhātāvadāna (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 336–71, 438–43), and the Māndhātāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (MdhA; see Matsumura 1980, 163–97, 348–54). For further parallels, see Hiraoka 2007, i 398; Wille 2014a, 197. For Māndhātṛ’s story in art, see Zin 2012.
n.­621
Section number 9.10.6.1.1 in BhvY (p. 302ff.).
n.­656
Section number 9.10.6.1.2 in BhvY (p. 317ff.). The following two stories of the former lives of King Māndhātṛ appear in Tib., Divy 17, and MdhA, whereas Skt. and Ch. lack them.
n.­661
Section number 9.10.6.1.3 in BhvY (p. 308).
n.­662
Section number 9.10.6.2 in BhvY (p. 318ff.). The following story corresponds to the Mahā­sudarśanāvadāna from Gilgit (ms no. 1550–67, hereafter MSA), the first half of the story of Mahāsudarśana in the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra, and its parallel in the Kṣv (D da F.266.a–274.b; Taishō no.1451, 24.393a–394.b; see also Matsumura 1988b, 3–29 and 86–128), the first half of MĀc 68 Dashanjianwang jing 大善見王経 (Taishō no. 26, 1.515b–516c), a part of DN 17 Mahā­sudassana­suttanta (ii 169–85), and so on. Cf., also, the story of King Mahāsudarśana and his son in the Bhv (D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana).
n.­668
Section number 9.10.6.3 in BhvY (p. 323ff.). This story has parallels in MĀc 155 Xudaduo jing 須達哆經, AKUp 3079, Taishō no. 72 Foshuo sangui wujie cixin yanli gongde jing 佛説三歸五戒慈心厭離功徳經, Taishō no. 73 Foshuo xuda jing 佛説須達經, Taishō no. 74 Foshuo zhangzhe shibao jing 佛説長者施報經, EĀc 27.3, and AN 9.20. Cf. Anālayo 2010, 70–71. The story in AKUp 3079 mostly corresponds to MĀc 155, including its introduction, the Buddha’s conversation with the householder Anāthapiṇḍada, which is absent in our Bhv version. Probably the redactors of the Bhv borrowed the story of Velāma from their Velāmasūtra, ignoring its introduction, for the purpose of fitting the story into the framework of the Bhv.
n.­672
Section number 9.10.6.4 in BhvY (p. 326ff.).
n.­673
Section number 9.10.6.4.1 in BhvY (p. 326ff.). This story was translated from Tib. by Schiefner (tr. by Ralston, 1882, chap. II). The story has parallels in J 531 Kusajātaka, Mv ii 420–96 and iii 1–25, Pusa bensheng manlun 菩薩本生鬘論 (Taishō no. 160, 3.336b–c), Xian’yu jing 賢愚經 14 (Taishō no. 202, 4.364b–365b), and Liudu jijing 六度集經 84 (Taishō no. 152, 3.46b–47b).
n.­683
Section number 9.10.6.4.2 in BhvY (p. 332ff.). This story is narrated only in Skt. and Tib., being absent in Ch.
n.­685
Section number 9.10.6.5 in BhvY (p. 333ff.).
n.­687
Section number 9.10.6.6 in BhvY (p. 334ff.). The stories in this and the next section are partially different from the stories of the kings Mahādeva and Nimi already narrated in the Bhv, Chapter 4, III. Mithilā (for other parallels, see n.­194). The difference between these two sets of stories seems to be mainly due to the editorial transformation of their common source (the Mahādevasūtra in the Madhyamāgama) into stories included in the sermon to King Prasenajit, which we are now reading. The first set of stories seems to preserve the exact contents of the sūtra. For a detailed discussion, see Yao 2007.
n.­691
Section number 9.10.6.7 in BhvY (p. 336ff.). See n.­687.
n.­696
Section number 9.10.6.8 in BhvY (p. 339ff.). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, III. Parallel stories: J 257 Gāmaṇicaṇḍajātaka, Xianyu jing 賢愚經 53 (Taishō no. 202, 4.237c ff.); D no. 341 mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo, chap. 39 (mdo sde A.F.270.b ff.); BAK 17 (including a summary of the preceding part; see Straube 2009, 108–21, 341); and Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā 30 (cf. Panglung 1981, 39). For a Jaina parallel of the story of Daṇḍin, see Wu 2017.
n.­706
Section number 9.10.6.9 in BhvY (p. 344ff.).
n.­707
Section number 9.10.6.9.1 in BhvY (p. 344ff.). This story is narrated in both Tib. and Skt., but is absent in Ch.
n.­708
Section number 9.10.6.9.2 in BhvY (p. 345ff.). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, V; German trsl. from Ch., Li 2012. Parallel stories: Divy 30 Sudhana­kumārāvadāna (English trsl., Tatelman 2005, 219–307); fragments of the Sudhana­kumārāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (Kudō 2015, 255–58); Mv ii 94–105; Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā 25 (Khoroche 2017, 147ff.); BAK 64 (Straube 2006); the Sudhanajātaka in the Paññāsajātaka (Tanabe 1981, 1983); Liudu jijing 六度集經 83 (Taishō no. 152, 3.44b–46b); and the Khotanese Sudhanāvadāna (de Chiara 2013).
n.­769
Section number 9.10.6.10 in BhvY (p. 369ff.). Strangely enough, the famous story of Prince Viśvantara appears twice in succession in Tib. and NBhv here, and these two stories (Viś I and Viś II) share a rough outline with differences in many details. Ch. has only Viś I. Each of the two stories has some elements absent in the other (scenes, conversations, proper names, etc.), and therefore neither is simply an abbreviated or expanded version of the other. Among various editions of Tib., the Stok Palace manuscript (S) shows a unique recension in which Viś I is absent and two passages from Viś I have been inserted in Viś II (Yao 2012b).There are further parallels in the Sbhv (Viś III: SbhvG ii 119–33; Degé nga F.192.a–200.b; Taishō no. 1450 24.181a–184b. English trsl. from Tib. Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882: XVI), the Viśvantarāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (Viś IV: Das Gupta 1978; Matsumura 1980, 119–18 and 272–333. Cf., also, Tsai 2000), and BAK 23, etc. (Lamotte (1944–80, ii 713–15n1; Hikata 1978, appendix 116; Panglung 1981, 40–41; Murakami 1984, 35 and 47n31). Cf. Panglung 1980, 229, Durt 1999 and 2000, and Anālayo 2017, 113–41.
n.­770
Section number 9.10.6.10.1 in BhvY (p. 369ff.). For the absence of this story in S and some other manuscripts belonging to the same lineage, see Yao 2012b and Clarke 2018.
n.­808
Section number 9.10.6.10.2 in BhvY (p. 381ff.).
n.­814
Section number 9.10.6.11 in BhvY (p. 388ff.). The story has parallels in the Vvbh (D nya F.195.a–b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.892c27–28), a part of Divy 36 Mākandikāvadāna (the chapter itself is parallel to the Vvbh; the correspondence with the present story is in 540.1–14), Sbhv (SbhvG ii 14–16; nga F.119.a–120.b; Ch. missing), Xianyu jing 賢愚経 30 (Taishō no. 202, 4.386aff.), and D no. 341 mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo, chap. 34 (mdo sde a F.247.a ff.). The story also has parts in common with the story of Triśaṅku and that of Miṇḍhaka in the Bhv (5. Triśaṅku and E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family, respectively).
n.­817
Section number 9.10.7 in BhvY (p. 391ff.). The order of the stories in this section generally corresponds to that in the Merv-av. See notes to the title of each story. Cf., also, Yao forthcoming b.
n.­819
Section number 9.10.7.1 in BhvY (p. 391ff.). Parallel stories: Vvbh (D nya F.176.a–183.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.888a–889c), MĀc 136 商人求財経, EĀc 45.1, J 196, etc. A brief mention in Merv-av, 156. Divy 36, which corresponds to a part of the Vvbh listed above, abbreviates this story, referring to the Rākṣasīsūtra (524.20). Cf., also, Divy 8, which is a story partially corresponding to the present section.
n.­825
Section number 9.10.7.2 in BhvY (p. 396ff.). Parallel story: Merv-av, 156.
n.­828
Section number 9.10.7.3 in BhvY (p. 397ff.). For parallel stories, see Merv-av, 159n7.
n.­833
Section number 9.10.7.4 in BhvY (p. 398ff.). This story has a parallel in SbhvG ii 177–178; nga F.232.b–233.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.195b. For other parallels, see Merv-av 159n8.
n.­835
Section number 9.10.7.5 in BhvY (p. 398ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 161n10.
n.­837
Section number 9.10.7.6 in BhvY (p. 399ff.). The Merv-av gives a story of a parrot in the same order as the Bhv, but the story is quite different from the present one in the Bhv. See Merv-av 160n13. The story in the Bhv has parallels in J 329 and the Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya (Taishō no. 1425, 22.258b–c).
n.­839
Section number 9.10.7.7 in BhvY (p. 399ff.). Parallel: Merv-av 162.
n.­841
Section number 9.10.7.8 in BhvY (p. 400ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 163n16.
n.­842
Section number 9.10.7.9 in BhvY (p. 401ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 163n17.
n.­844
Section number 9.10.7.10 in BhvY (p. 401ff.). For parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.34 and Merv-av 167n21. Cf., also, Anālayo 2017, 294ff.
n.­846
Section number 9.10.8 in BhvY (p. 403ff.). The order of the stories in this section generally corresponds to that in Merv-av.
n.­848
Section number 9.10.8.1 in BhvY (p. 403ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 153n1. This story is related to the story of the brahmin girl Cañcā in the Bhv (M. The Insult by the Brahmin Girl Cañcā). Cf., also, BAK 49 (Straube 2009, 319–22).
n.­857
Section number 9.10.8.2 in BhvY (p. 409ff.). This story has many parallels, including J 316 and BAK 104 (see Straube 2009, 335–37). Cf. Panglung 1981, 45; Hikata 1978, appendix 104–5.
n.­860
Section number 9.10.8.3 in BhvY (p. 410ff.).
n.­861
Section number 9.10.8.3.1 in BhvY (p. 410ff.). This story has many parallels, including J 540 and BAK 101 (see Straube 2009, 332–35). Cf. Panglung 1981, 45–46; Hikata 1978, appendix 115. Merv-av mentions this story only in a summary of contents (Merv-av 176n126). For parallels in Chinese materials, see Hashimoto 2002; Andō 2008, 45. Cf., also, Brockington 2010, 95–100. For an edition and German translation of the story in the Bhv, see Demoto and Hahn 2010, 238–45. Schlingloff 1985 has pointed out the close relationship between the depiction of this story in Gandharan relief and the Bhv. Cf., also, Schlingloff 2000, 31 (Eng. 2013, 31).
n.­864
Section number 9.10.8.3.2 in BhvY (p. 413ff.).
n.­866
Section number 9.10.8.4 in BhvY (p. 414ff.). This story is absent in Ch. and NBhv. Instead, Ch. mentions the title of a sūtra, Najia yaocha jing 那迦藥叉經 (Sūtra of the Yakṣa *Naka (?)), and then gives a brief summary of the next story, which is a story of the leader of the monkeys (parallel to J 407). NBhv agrees with Ch. in mentioning the leader of the monkeys. Due to the fragmentary state of NBhv, it is unknown if there was a title corresponding to the Najia yaocha jing in the manuscript. The following story of Prince Mūkapaṅgu has been translated into English from Tib. in Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XIV. The story has parallels in J 538, etc. See Panglung 1981, 46 (note that Panglung seems to be confusing Taishō no. 1444 and Taishō no. 1442); Hikata 1978, appendix, 115; Zin 2004; Tamai 2017. There is a parallel in the Vvbh (cha F.89.a–95.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.723c–725c). The story in the Vvbh consists of two parts: the story of the prince’s birth, growth, and going forth (parallel to the following story in the Bhv) and the story of the same person as a teacher instructing disciples (parallel to another story in the Bhv: 2. The Story of the Teacher Mūkapaṅgu).
n.­874
Section number 9.10.8.5 in BhvY (p. 420ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 46–47; Hikata 1978, appendix 93–94.
n.­876
Section number 9.10.8.6 in BhvY (p. 421ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 47.
n.­878
Section number 9.10.8.7 in BhvY (p. 423ff.). For parallels, see Okada 1993. Cf. the rule against eating nāga flesh in the Bhv (Chapter Two. II. B. Nāga Flesh).
n.­880
Section number 9.10.8.8 in BhvY (p. 423ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 48; Hikata 1978, appendix 113; Merv-av 155n3.
n.­882
Section number 9.10.9 in BhvY (p. 426ff.). This part of Tib. lacks a summary of contents. However, only S and the Shey Palace manuscript among the other editions the present translator examined (D, London, N, P, T) give a summary of contents (S kha F.348.a.6–7; Shey kha F.329.a.2–3). On the peculiarity of S and the Bhutanese recension, see Clarke 2018. Cf., also, Yao 2011. Ch. is completely silent about the four stories constituting this part. NBhv does not give the stories but only a list of protagonists, in which only the name of Govinda (the protagonist of the fourth story) is legible in a broken folio. For details, see Yao forthcoming b.
n.­883
Section number 9.10.9.1 in BhvY (p. 426ff.). This story has a parallel in MĀc 130 Jiao tanmi jing 教曇彌經. This sūtra is mentioned in the story of Araṇemi (3. The Story of the Teacher Araṇemi). For other parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.35. Cf., also, Skilling 2000, 343 and Anālayo 2010, 70n52.
n.­884
Section number 9.10.9.2 in BhvY (p. 427ff.). In the Vvbh, this story follows the story of Mūkapaṅgu’s going forth (cha F.95.a–96.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.725c–726b). See n.­866.
n.­885
Section number 9.10.9.3 in BhvY (p. 429ff.). For parallels, see Ogihara 2011 and Yao 2012a, 3.2.36. Cf., also, Merv-av 168.
n.­895
Section number 9.10.9.4 in BhvY (p. 432ff.). This story has a parallel in DĀ 14 Govindasūtra (see Hartmann and Wille 2014, 140). For other parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.37.
n.­901
Section number 9.10.9.5 in BhvY (p. 441ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 49–50; Sugimoto 1993, 260; Murakami 1984; Hikata 1978, appendix 42. For an edition and German translation of this story in Tib., see Schlingloff 1977. Cf., also, BAK 1 and BAK 100 in Straube 2009; Bingposha lun 鞞婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1547, 28.506b ff.).
n.­903
Section number 9.10.9.6 in BhvY (p. 443ff.). For parallels, see Murakami 1984, 35, 45n24, 277–78, 280n17–20; Ogihara 2010.
n.­904
Section number 9.10.10 in BhvY (p. 444ff.). For the names of the buddhas in the past mentioned in this section and the next, see Murakami 1984, 273–76, 283. Cf. AKBh 266.14.
n.­909
Section number 9.10.11 in BhvY (p. 445ff.). For the murals in Bezeklik, Turfan (eleventh to twelfth c.), representing the verses in this section of the Bhv, see Murakami 1984. The title of this section, “Section of Many Buddhas,” is given at the end of the section. For parallels, see Ogihara 2015a and 2016a; Tournier 2017, esp. Chap. 2. Some of the reconstructions of Skt. names of buddhas in the present translation are based on their Tocharian parallels given in Ogihara 2015a.
n.­934
Section number 9.10.12 in BhvY (p. 454ff.). This story is related to “Section of the Tathāgata” in the Anavatapta­gāthā (kha F.316.b–317.a) and was translated into English by Hisashi Matsumura (1989b). For parallels, see Akanuma 1931, 131b. Cf., also, BAK 49 (Straube 2009, 319–22) and BAK 50 (Okano 2007).
n.­938
Section number 9.11 in BhvY (p. 456ff.). This part of the Bhv, which consists of verses of the Buddha and his disciples and some prose concerned with their past lives, is called Anavatapta­gāthā (AG) and has parallels in the Fo wubaidizi zishuo benqi jing 佛五百弟子自説本起經 (Taishō no. 199), the Apadāna, and the Gāndhārī Anavatapta­gāthā, which was studied in Salomon 2008. For the research history of the AG, see Salomon ibid., 18–22. Tib. has been edited and translated into French by Hofinger (1954, the chapters of disciples; 1990, the chapter of the Tathāgata). In the following notes, some other modern translations are also mentioned. Skt. (GBhv) was transliterated by Bechert (1961) and Wille (1990). The framework of the entire story of the AG and some of its episodes are borrowed by the Kaṭhināvadāna (Degener 1990, 1991; Salomon ibid., 32–33). Parts of a Mahāyāna sūtra, The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 99), echo the Anavatapta­gāthā in some respects; see 2.­24 ff. and Introduction i.­14.
n.­939
Section number 9.11.1 in BhvY (pp. 456–57).
n.­943
Section number 9.11.2 in BhvY (p. 457ff.). The stories included in this part are not found in either the Gāndhārī Anavatapta­gāthā or Taishō no. 199.
n.­944
Section number 9.11.2.1 in BhvY (pp. 457–58). This part has a parallel in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 207–13) and KA §23. A parallel also appears in a Mahāyāna sūtra, The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 99), 2.­26 ff., in a longer passage that echoes in some respects the Anavatapta­gāthā.
n.­947
Section number 9.11.2.2 in BhvY (p. 459). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 2; German trsl. from Ch., Ji 1943, 323–24. The story has parallels in the Za piyu jing 雜譬喩經 8 (Taishō no. 205, 4.523c–524a); KA § 24, 25; a Tocharian manuscript (Pinaut 2008, 251–68; Melanie Malzahn, “A Comparative Edition of Tocharian Manuscripts,” accessed January 31, 2018‍—see A5–A10, including bibliography).
n.­950
Section number 9.11.2.3 in BhvY (p. 460). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 3. The story has a parallel in KA §26.
n.­951
Section number 9.11.2.4 in BhvY (pp. 460–61). The story has a parallel in KA § 27 and is briefly mentioned in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 214).
n.­952
Section number 9.11.2.5 in BhvY (p. 461). The story has parallels in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 214–16) and the Liuduji jing 六度集經 82 (Taishō no. 152, 3.43c–44b). Cf., also, the second half of J 497.
n.­953
Section number 9.11.2.6 in BhvY (pp. 461–62). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 1.
n.­957
Section number 9.11.3 in BhvY (p. 462ff.).
n.­958
Section number 9.11.3.1 in BhvY (pp. 462–63). Cf. Salomon 2008, 405–12 (comparative texts of Skt. and Tib.; English trsl.). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (1), 4.190a–b. The story is quoted in the Nettippakaraṇa 141.12–142.5 (Salomon 2008, 30). Whereas the verses in all the other sections in the AG are written in śloka, the verses in this section are written in various meters (Salomon ibid., 350 and 67–70). Related stories are found in the Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga: D ta F.39.b–41.a, Taishō no. 1443, 23.911b–c (Kāśyapa’s going forth); D ta F.71.b.6–73.a.5, Taishō 23.917b–c (his former life).
n.­961
Section number 9.11.3.2 in BhvY (pp.463–64). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (2), 4.190b–c. A related story is found in the Prjv (Skt. missing; D ka 1.333–44.a; Taishō no. 1444, 23.1029b–c).
n.­964
Section number 9.11.3.3 in BhvY (pp. 464–65). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (3), 4.190c–191a. The story of Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s wish made in his past life is narrated in the Prjv (Skt. missing; D 1.353–1.360; Taishō no.1444, 23.1030a–b). The stories of his death and its cause in the past are narrated in the Kṣv (tha F.237.b ff.; Taishō no.1451, 24.287a ff.), with some differences from this section.
n.­966
Section number 9.11.3.4 in BhvY (pp. 465–66). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (4), 4.191a–b.
n.­967
Section number 9.11.3.5 in BhvY (pp. 466–67). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (5), 4.191b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 320–23. Cf., also, Salomon 2008, 36, 62–63.
n.­969
Section number 9.11.3.6 in BhvY (p. 468). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (6), 4.191c–192a; Ap i 298 Soṇakoṭivīsa (Salomon 2008, 28–29, 64–67). Related stories are narrated in the Sbhv: SbhvG ii 134–49; D nga F.200.b–211.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.184b–187c.
n.­970
Section number 9.11.3.7 in BhvY (p. 469). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (7), 4.192a–b.
n.­972
Section number 9.11.3.8 in BhvY (pp.469–70). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (8), 4.192b.
n.­974
Section number 9.11.3.9 in BhvY (pp. 470–72). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (9), 4.192b–193a. A related story is in the Vvbh (nya F.19.a ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.857a14ff.) and Divy 13 Svāgatāvadāna.
n.­976
Section number 9.11.3.10 in BhvY (p. 472). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (10), 4.193a–b.
n.­980
Section number 9.11.4 in BhvY (p. 473ff.).
n.­981
Section number 9.11.4.1 in BhvY (pp. 473–74). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (11) 4.193b–194a. Related stories are narrated in SbhvG i 139–46; D nga F.45.b–50.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.128c–129c (Ch. lacks the story of the former life). For other parallels, see Akanuma 1931, s.v. “Yasa.”
n.­982
Section number 9.11.4.2 in BhvY (pp. 474–76). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (12), 4.194a–b; EĀc 33.2. Cf. Kuan 2013, 612.
n.­984
Section number 9.11.4.3 in BhvY (p. 476). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (13), 4.194b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 297–300. Cf., also, MĀc 34 Bojuluo jing 薄拘羅經, esp. Taishō no. 26, 1.475b29–c2.
n.­986
Section number 9.11.4.4 in BhvY (p. 477). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (14), 4.194c–195a.
n.­987
Section number 9.11.4.5 in BhvY (p. 478). Verses in this section and part of the next section, 6. Yaśas (2), are translated with seven syllables in Ch., whereas they are written in śloka in Skt. and seven syllables in Tib., as are the other verses. The Sbhv provides the story of the three Kāśyapas’ former lives (SbhvG i 162–63; D nga F.76.a–77.a; Taishō no.1450, 24.137b–c) and their conversion (Skt. missing [cf. SbhvG i 217–31]; D nga F.55.b–67.b; Taishō 24.131a–134b). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (15), 4.195a. This section of Taishō no. 199 mentions only Uruvilvā-Kāśyapa and Nadī-Kāśyapa, and the name Gayā-Kāśyapa appears in the next section, which corresponds to the section of Yaśas in the AG.
n.­988
Section number 9.11.4.6 in BhvY (pp. 478–79). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (16), 4.195a–b. See n.­987.
n.­991
Section number 9.11.4.7 in BhvY (pp. 480–82). Related stories are found in the Kṣv (D tha F.25.b–31.a; Taishō no. 1451, 24.215c–217b) and Divy 19 Jyotiṣkāvadāna. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (17), 4.195b–196a. For other parallels, see Hikata 1978, Appendix 25.
n.­992
Section number 9.11.4.8 in BhvY (pp. 482–83). Unlike Skt. and Tib., Ch. does not narrate Rāṣṭrapāla’s going forth. The story of Rāṣṭrapāla’s going forth is narrated in the Bhv: Chapter Seven, IV. Rāṣṭrapāla. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (18), 4.196b–c.
n.­996
Section number 9.11.4.9 in BhvY (pp.483–85). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (19), 4.196c–197b.
n.­998
Section number 9.11.4.10 in BhvY (pp. 485–86). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (20), 4.197b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 295–97.
n.­1001
Section number 9.11.5 in BhvY (p. 486ff.).
n.­1002
Section number 9.11.5.1 in BhvY (pp. 486–87). Related stories are found in the Vvbh (D ja F.79.b–80.b; Taishō no.1442, 23.799b–c) and Divy 35 Cūḍā­pakṣāvadāna. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (21), 4.197c–198a. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 243–46.
n.­1004
Section number 9.11.5.2 in BhvY (pp. 487–89). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (22), 4.198a–b. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 245.
n.­1005
Section number 9.11.5.3 in BhvY (pp. 489–90). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (23), 4.198c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 274–77, 300–303; Salomon 2008, 29. A related story is found in SbhvG i 200ff.; D nga F.102.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.144b ff.
n.­1013
Section number 9.11.5.4 in BhvY (pp. 490–91). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (24), 4.198c–199a.
n.­1015
Section number 9.11.5.5 in BhvY (p. 492). A related story is in SbhvG ii 43–44; D nga F.139.b–140.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.162b–c. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (25), 4.199a–b. For other parallels, see Salomon 2008, 36.
n.­1017
Section number 9.11.5.6 in BhvY (pp. 493–94). This section has a parallel in the Kṣv: D tha F.153.a–158.a; Taishō no. 1451, 24.260c–262a. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (26), 4.199b–c and, also, Wille 1990, 107.
n.­1019
Section number 9.11.5.7 in BhvY (pp. 494–96). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are in the Vvbh (ca F.252.a ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.691b ff.), with some differences from the AG.
n.­1020
Section number 9.11.5.8 in BhvY (pp. 496–97). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are in the Vvbh (D ca F.126.b ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.656c ff.). For other parallels, including SĀc 252, see Hikata 1978, Appendix 70.
n.­1021
Section number 9.11.5.9 in BhvY (pp. 497–99). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (27), 4.199c–200a. A related story is found in SbhvG ii 4–47; nga F.141.a–143.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.162c–163c.
n.­1022
Section number 9.11.5.10 in BhvY (pp. 499–500). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (28), 4.200a–b.
n.­1024
Section number 9.11.6 in BhvY (p. 500ff.).
n.­1025
Section number 9.11.6.1 in BhvY (pp. 500–501). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (29), 4.200b–201a. Related stories are in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 47ff.; nga F.143.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.163c ff.) and MĀc 32 Weicengyoufa jing 未曾有法經. Cf. Deeg 2007, 46ff.
n.­1026
Section number 9.11.6.2 in BhvY (pp. 501–3). No parallel in Taishō no. 199.
n.­1027
Section number 9.11.6.3 in BhvY (pp. 504–5). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are narrated in SbhvG i 136–38; nga F.43.b–44.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.128a–b and SbhvG ii 2–4; nga F.110.a–111.b (Ch. absent).
n.­1030
Section number 9.11.6.4 in BhvY (pp. 505–7). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are found in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 204–211; D nga F.105.a–109.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.145b–147b).
n.­1033
Section number 9.11.6.5 in BhvY (pp. 507–9). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Ap 333 (i 269–70) gives a parallel. The end of the Section of Upālin and the beginning of the Section of Prabhākara are different from those of other sections.
n.­1034
Section number 9.11.6.6 in BhvY (pp. 509–11). No parallel in Taishō no. 199.
n.­1036
Section number 9.11.6.7 in BhvY (pp. 511–26). This section and the next section provide the same stories of the Buddha’s former lives in prose and verse, respectively, in different order. However, the third story of the former, c. A Young Brahmin, is not shared by the latter. Cf. Hofinger 1990 (Tibetan text and French trsl.). For the history of the formation of these sections, see Okano 2006. Parallels to the verses are found in Taishō no. 199 (30), 4.201a–202a; parallels to the verses and prose in Taishō no. 197 Foshuo xingqixing jing 仏説興起行経. Cf., also, BAK 50 (see n.­934). According to the Saṃskṛtā­saṃskṛta­viniścaya, the Sāṃmitīyas too transmitted stories of evil acts performed by the Buddha in his former lives (Namikawa 2011, 371ff.).
n.­1037
This story has a parallel in SbhvG ii 184–85; nga F.237.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.197a–b (Panglung 1981, 53). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (7), 4.170b–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 226–37); KA 32 (Degener 1990, 37–38). BAK 66 provides a completely different story regarding the injury to the Buddha’s foot.
n.­1040
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (6), 4.168a–170b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 237–39); KA 33 (Degener 1990, 38).
n.­1042
This story is related to the story of Māra and the Buddha in Sālā in the Bhv (Chapter Four, V. Sālā) and has a parallel in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 239–41). This story is not narrated in verse.
n.­1044
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (8), 4.170c–172a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 241–47); KA 34 (Degener 1990, 38–39).
n.­1049
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (2), 4.166a–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 247).
n.­1050
A similar story is found in SbhvG i 22ff.; ga F.267.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.102b ff. (Panglung 1981, 55), with some differences. There, however, the story is not related to the Buddha’s former life. Cf. Taishō no. 197 (1), 4.164b–166a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 247–76).
n.­1053
This story has already been narrated in the Bhv (Chapter Eight, V. Vairambhya, D. A Brahmin Who Abused the Buddha Vipaśyin). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (9), 4.172a–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 277–79).
n.­1054
According to Skt. and Ch. (see n.­1055), this story corresponds to the Nandīpālasūtra in the Rājasaṃyuktakanipāta of the Madhyamāgama, which is parallel with MĀc 63 Bingpolingqi jing 鞞婆陵耆経 and MN 81 Ghaṭikārasutta. The Sbhv also includes a parallel (SbhvG ii 22.1–30.22; nga F.124.b–131.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.156c–158c). Cf. Yao 2012a, 3.2.38. For comparative studies, see Anālayo 2010, 71–84; 2011a, i 441–51; 2012a, 155–74. Note, however, that in these works the Bhv version of the story (Tib.) is erroneously connected to the Sbhv version (Skt.). Cf., also, Taishō no. 197 (10), 4.172c–174b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 279–81) and SĀc 595 (Taishō no. 99, 2.159c); SĀc2 189 (Taishō no. 100, 2.442c); SN 1.5.10; SN 2.3.4; Tocharian fragments (Ogihara 2016a; 2016b).
n.­1063
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (4), 4.167a–b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 281–89).
n.­1065
A related story is narrated in the Kṣv, where the story of the massacre of the Śākyans is narrated (tha F.95.a–b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.242a–b). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (3), 4.166c–167a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 289–90). Cf., also, the final part of EĀc 34.2 (Taishō no. 125, 2.693b–c).
n.­1066
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (5), 4.167c–168a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 290–92).
n.­1067
Section number 9.11.6.8 in BhvY (pp. 527–30). Cf. Okano 2007, appendix (Japanese trsl. from Tib.). This section is absent in Ch. Although the stories narrated in the previous section are given here in verse, the story of the young brahmin who abused a self-awakened one (7. Sugata [prose] c. A Young Brahmin) is missing. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (30), 4.201a–202a, with the stories in the same order; Ap 299–301 (Salomon 2008, 28–29).
n.­1075
There is a parallel story in BAK 90 (Panglung 1981, 57–58). There is also a Tocharian fragment of another parallel (Ogihara 2015b, 302).
n.­1077
It is unknown if GBhv included this uddāna due to damage to the folio.
n.­1087
For the three kinds of allowable meat, see Shimoda 1997, 401–4, 668–69.
n.­1097
The story of Miṇḍhaka and his family and the story of their former lives have parallels in Divy 9 Meṇḍhaka­gṛha­pati­vibhūti­pariccheda and Divy 10 Meṇḍhakāvadāna and other vinayas (see Hiraoka 2007, i 235–56. For Eng. trsl., see Rotman 2008–17, i 223–41). The Bhv’s Miṇḍhaka stories are generally briefer than the Divy’s Meṇḍhaka stories.
n.­1112
This episode corresponds to Divy 10 Meṇḍhakāvadāna and a folio of an avadāna manuscript from Gilgit (Kudō 2017, xxxii; Plate 43).
n.­1122
Skt. from here to the end of I. A. 3. Kaineya Offers Drinks to the Blessed One is edited in Chung and Wille 2002, 119–24.
n.­1123
Tib. ke na’i bu yis btud ba blangs (lit., “Drinks were received by Kaineya”); Skt. kaineyapānam ādāya (Chung and Wille 2002, 119 reads kaineya<ḥ> pānam). Tib. seems problematic because, in the following story, Kaineya is not the recipient of the drink but the donor. Skt. might be translated “Having received Kaineya’s drink (i.e., the drink offered by Kaineya).” Hence the present translation, which supplies the word “offered.” Among the eleven uddānas in the Bhv, only this final uddāna includes gerund phrases in Skt., “…ādāya” and “… kṛtvā” (see the note after next), whereas the others simply list nouns.
n.­1124
Tib. ka shi’i tshong rdal nas thug; Skt. kāśipaṭṭaṃ ca yavāgvā (“cloth from Kāśi, by barley porridge”). Edgerton suggests that paṭṭa is an error for paṭṭana (“city”) (BHSD s.v. paṭṭa). Cf. Mvy 5531: tshong rdal = pattana.
n.­1125
Tib. sdig can du ni bca’ ba dang; Skt. pāpāyāṃ khādyakaṃ kṛtvā (“having made khādyaka in Pāpā”). Cf. n.­1089.
n.­1126
This story has a parallel in MN 92 Selasutta (= Sn 3.7), etc. Cf. Anālayo 2011a, ii 545–49 and Yao 2012, 3.2.39. Kōgen Mizuno identified the story in the Bhv with Śailagāthā, a title included in the list of texts to be recited in times of danger which appears several times in the Mūla­sarvāstivādin literature (Mizuno 1992, 23–24). Cf. 2.­198 and n.­73. For a parallel in EĀ 49.6, see Anālayo [2011b] 2016b, 325–43. Cf., also, BAK 77 (Okano 2010, 62ff.), Merv-av 210ff., Karmaśataka 34 (See “The Story of Kaineya” in Jamspal and Fischer, trans. The Hundred Deeds, Toh 340).
n.­1127
This episode is discussed in the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1545, 27.410a5ff.).
n.­1144
This story has a parallel in Merv-av 210–13. Cf., also, SHT X 3827.
n.­1153
Cf. Mizuno 1992; Yao 2012a, 3.2.39.
n.­1184
This episode corresponds to the Mahā­māyūrī­vidyārājñī and some other texts. Cf. Pathak 1989; Yao 2012b, 3.2.40. For a related passage in the Muktaka in the Ug, see Kishino 2016, 237, 243 (§1.10.2).

b.

Bibliography

ched du brjod pa’i tshoms (Udāna­varga). Toh 326, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa), folios 209.a–253.a. English translation in Champa Thupten Zongtse (1990).

sman gyi gzhi (Bhaiṣajya­vastu). Toh 1, ch. 6, Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 277.b–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–50.a.

sman gyi gzhi. bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–2009, vol. 1, pp. 644–721, vol. 2, pp. 3–745, vol. 3, pp. 3–117.

man gyi gzhi (Bhaiṣajya­vastu). Stok no. 1, ch. 6, Stok Palace Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 396.b–455.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–444.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.b–56.b.

Bhaiṣajya­vastu in the Gilgit manuscripts. Dutt 1942–50, pt. 1 (1947).

Genben shuoyiqieyoubu pinaiye yaoshi 根本説一切有部毘奈耶藥事, Taishō no. 1448, 24.1a1–97a24.

1. A Work Referred to in the Bhaiṣajyavastu

yang dag par ldan pa’i lung (Saṃyuktāgama). Not included in the Kangyur. Cf. Za ahan jing 雜阿含經, Taishō no. 99, 2.1a1–373b18.

2. Works Related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu

’dul ba gzhi (Vinayavastu). Toh 1, 17 chaps. Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 1.a1–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–293.a; and vol. 4 (’dul ba, nga), folios 1.a–302.a5.

’dul ba rnam par ’byed pa (Vinayavibhaṅga). Toh 3, Degé Kangyur vol. 5 (’dul ba, ca), folios 21.a1–292.a; vol. 6 (’dul ba, cha) folios 1.a–287.a; vol. 7 (’dul ba, ja) folios 1.a–287.a; and vol. 8 (’dul ba, nya) folios 1.a–269.a6.

’dul ba phran tshegs kyi gzhi (Vinaya­kṣudraka­vastu). Toh 6, Degé Kangyur vol. 10 (’dul ba, tha), folios 1.a1–310.a; vol. 11 (’dul ba, da), folios 1.a–333.a7.

’dul ba gzhung bla ma (Vinayottara­grantha). Toh 7, Degé Kangyur vol. 12 (’dul ba, na), folios 1.a1–302.a; vol. 13 (’dul ba, pa) 1.a–313.a5.

ko lpags kyi gzhi (Carmavastu). Toh 1-5, Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 251.a–277.b.

dge slong ma’i ’dul ba rnam par ’byed pa (Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga). Toh 5, Degé Kangyur vol. 9 (’dul ba, ta), folios 25.b–328.a.

dge ’dun gyi dbyen gyi gzhi (Saṅgha­bheda­vastu). Toh 1, ch. 17, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 255.b–293.a; vol. 4 (’dul ba, nga), folios 1.a–302.a.

gos kyi gzhi (Cīvaravastu). Toh 1-7, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 50.a–115.b.

rgya cher rol pa (Lalita­vistara). Toh 95, Degé Kangyur vol. 46 (mdo sde, kha), folios 1.b–216.b. English translation in the Dharmachakra Translation Committee (2013).

’dul ba gzhung dam pa (Vinayottara­grantha). Toh 7a, Degé Kangyur vol. 12 (’dul ba, na), folios 92.b–302.a; vol. 13 (’dul ba, pa), folios 1.b–313.a.

’dul ba’i mdo (Vinayasūtra). Toh 4117, Degé Tengyur vol. 261 (’dul ba, wu) folios 1.a1–100.a7.

don rnam par nges pa chos kyi rnam grangs (Arthaviniścaya­dharma­paryāya). Toh 317, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa), folios 170.b–188.a. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2021.

gnas lam gyi gzhi (Śayanāsana­vastu). Toh 1-15, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 187.a–222.a.

bye brag tu rtogs par byed pa chen po (Mahāvyutpatti). Toh 4346, Degé Tengyur vol. 204 (sna tshogs, co), folios 1.b–131.a.

ma ga d+hA bzang mo’i rtogs pa brjod pa (Sumāgadhāvadāna). Toh 346, vol. 75 (mdo sde, aM), folios 291.b–298.a. English translation The Exemplary Tale of Sumāgadhā 2024.

dmar ser can gyi gzhi (Pāṇḍulohitaka­vastu). Toh 1-11, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 140.a–165.b.

rtsod pa’i gzhi (Adhikaraṇa­vastu). Toh 1-16, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 222.a–255.b.

mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo (Damamūkasūtra). Toh 341, vol. 74 (mdo sde, a), folios 129.a–298.a.

gzhang ’brum rab tu zhi bar byed pa’i mdo (Arśapraśamana­sūtra). Toh 621, Degé Kangyur vol. 91 (rgyud, ba), folios 61.a–61.b; Toh 1020, vol. 101 (gzungs, waM), folios 181.b–183.a.

yangs pa’i grong khyer du ’jug pa’i mdo chen po (Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra). Toh 312, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa) folios 157.b–161.b. English translation in the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team (2020).

yongs su mya ngan las ’das pa chen po’i mdo. Toh 119, Degé Kangyur vol. 52 (mdo sde, nya), folios 1.b–343.a; vol. 53 (mdo sde, ta), folios 1.b–339.a.

rab tu ’byung ba’ gzhi (Pravrjyāvastu). Toh 1, chap. 1. Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 1.a–131.a. English translation in Miller (2018).

rig sngags kyi rgyal mo rma bya chen mo (Mahā­māyūrī­vidyā­rājñi). Toh 559, Degé Kangyur, vol. 90 (rgyud ’bum, pha), folios 87.b–117.a. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2023.

las brgya pa (Karmaśataka). Toh 340, Degé Kangyur vol. 73 (mdo sde, ha), folios 1.b–309.a; vol. 74 (mdo sde, a), folios 1.b–128.b. English translation in Jamspal and Fischer 2020.

gsang sngags kyi rjes su ’brang ba chen mo’i sgrub thabs (Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī­sādhana). Toh 3254, Degé Tengyur vol. 76 (rgyud, bu), folio 15.b.

so sor thar pa’i mdo (Prātimokṣa­sūtra). Toh 2, Degé Kangyur vol. 5 (’dul ba, ca), folios 1.a–20.b.

Kalyāṇamitra. lung phran tshegs kyi rnam par bshad pa (Āgama­kṣudraka­vyākhyāna). Toh 4115, Degé Tengyur vol. 158 (’dul ba, dzu), folios 1.b–232.a.

Śamathadeva. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi ’grel bshad nye bar mkho ba (Abhidharma­kośa­ṭīkopāyikā). Toh 4094, Degé Tengyur vol. 146 (mngon pa, ja), folios 1.b–287.a; vol 147 (mngon pa, ngu), folios 1.b–95.a.

Vasubandhu. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi bshad pa (Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya). Toh 4090, Degé Tengyur vol. 140 (mngon pa, ku), folios 26.b–258.a; vol. 141 (mngon pa, khu), folios 1.b–95.a.

Vasubandhu. rnam par bshad pa’i rigs pa (Vyākhyāyukti). Toh 4061, Degé Tengyur vol. 136 (sems tsam, shi), folios 29.a–134.b.

Yaśomitra. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi ’grel bshad (Abhidharma­kośa­ṭīkā). Toh 4092, Degé Tengyur vol. 142 (mngon pa, gu), folios 1.b–330.a; vol. 143 (mngon pa, ngu), folios 1.b–333.a.

3. Works Referred to in the Introduction, Notes, etc.

Akanuma, Chizen 赤沼 智善. Indo bukkyō koyū meishi jiten 印度佛教固有名詞辭典 [“A dictionary of proper names of Indian Buddhism”]. Nagoya: Hajinkaku shobō, 1931. Reprint, Kyoto: Hōzōkan 法藏館, 1967.

Anālayo (2007). “Mindfulness of Breathing in the Saṃyukta-āgama.” Buddhist Studies Review 24, no.2: 137–50. Reprint, 2015: 333–45.

Anālayo (2008). “Rebirth and the Gandhabba.” Mahachulalongkornrajavidyalaya University Journal of Buddhist Studies 1: 91–105.

Anālayo (2010). The Genesis of the Bodhisattva Ideal. Hamburg: Hamburg University Press.

Anālayo (2011a). A Comparative Study of the Majjhima-nikāya. 2 vols., Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2011b). “The conversion of the Brahmin Sela in the Ekottarika-āgama.” Thai International Journal of Buddhist Studies 2: 37–56. Reprint, 2016b: 325–43.

Anālayo (2011c). “Vakkali’s Suicide in the Chinese Āgamas.” Buddhist Studies Review 28, no. 2: 155–70. Reprint, 2015: 235–56.

Anālayo (2012a). Madhyama-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2012b). “Protecting Oneself and Others Through Mindfulness: The Acrobat Simile in the Saṃyukta-āgama.” Sri Lanka International Journal of Buddhist Studies 2: 1–23. Reprint, 2015: 311–32.

Anālayo (2014a). “Karma and Female Birth.” Journal of Buddhist Ethics 21: 107–51. Reprint, 2016b: 381–411.

Anālayo (2014b). “Maitreya and the Wheel-turning King.” Asian Literature and Translation. Reprint, 2017: 349–91.

Anālayo (2015). Saṃyukta-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2016a). “The Vessantara-Jātaka and Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Narrative.” Journal of the Oxford Centre for Buddhist Studies 11: 11–37. Reprint, 2017: 113–41.

Anālayo (2016b). Ekottarika-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2016c). “The Gradual Path of Training in the Dīrgha-āgama, From Sense-restraint to Imperturbability.” The Indian International Journal of Buddhist Studies 17: 1–24.

Anālayo (2017). Vinaya Studies. Dharma Drum Institute of Liberal Arts Research Series 7. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Andersen, Dines, and Helmer Smith. Sutta-Nipāta. London, Boston, Melbourne and Henley: Pali Text Society, [1913] 1984.

Andō, Fusae 安藤 房枝. “Unkō sekkutsu dairokkutsu chūshinchū no butsuden setsuwa ukibori ni tsuite: fuse zuzō no sōshutsu no mondai wo chūshin ni 雲崗石窟第 6 窟中心柱の仏伝説話浮彫について:「布施」図像の創出の問題を中心に [A study of reliefs of Buddha’s life on a stūpa-pillar in Yungang Cave 6: Focusing on creation of ‘offering’ icon].” Studies in Aesthetics and Art History 美学美術史研究論集 23 (2008): 33–62.

Banerjee, Anukul Chandra. Two Buddhist Vinaya Texts in Sanskrit: Prātimokṣa Sūtra and Bhikṣukarmavākya. Calcutta: The World Press Private Limited, 1977.

Bareau, André. “La construction et le culte des stūpa d’après les Vinayapitaka.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 50, no. 2 (1962): 229–74.

Bechert, Heinz. Bruchstücke buddhistischer Verssammlungen aus zentralasiatischen Sanskrithandschriften 1: Die Anavataptagāthā und die Sthaviragāthā. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 6. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1961.

Bernhard, Franz. Udānavarga. 2 vols. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 10. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1965–68.

Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, trans. The Mahāsūtra “On Entering the City of Vaiśālī” (Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra, Toh 312). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai 梵文仏典研究会 (1994). “Bonbun shamonkakyō wayaku (1) 梵文『沙門果経』和訳 (1) [An annotated Japanese translation of the Śrāmaṇya­phala­sūtra (1)].” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University 佛教大学仏教学会紀要 2: 1–32.

Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai (1995). “Bonbun shamonkakyō wayaku (2) 梵文『沙門果経』和訳 (2) [An annotated Japanese translation of the Śrāmaṇya­phala­sūtra (2)].” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University 佛教大学仏教学会紀要 3: 17–57.

Brockington, Mary. “Daśaratha, Śyāma, a Brāhman Hunter, and Śrāvaṇa: The Tale of Four Tales (with Pictures).” In From Turfan to Ajanta: Festschrift for Dieter Schlingloff on the Occasion of his Eightieth Birthday. Vol. 1, 89–116. Bhairahawa, Rupandehi: Lumbini International Research Institute, 2010.

Brown, W. Norman. “Duty as Truth in Ancient India.” Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 116, no. 3 (1972): 252–68.

Burnouf, Eugène. Introduction à l’histoire du buddhisme indien. 2nd ed. Paris: Maisonneuve, 1876. (1st ed. 1844).

Caillat, Colette. “Pāli ibbha, Vedic íbhya-*.” In Buddhist Studies in Honour of I.B. Horner: 41–49. Dordrecht-Holland: D. Reidel Publishing Company, 1974.

Champa Thupten Zongtse. Udānavarga. Band III. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 10, 3. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1990.

Chandra Das, Sarat, and Hari Mohan Vidyābhūshaṇa. Avadāna Kalpalatā. Calcutta: The Royal Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1940.

Chavannes, Édouard. Cinq cents contes et apologues. 3 vols. Paris: Ernest Leroux, Éditeur, 1910–11.

Ch’en, Kenneth. “A Study of The Svāgata Story in The Divyāvadāna in Its Sanskrit, Pāli, Tibetan, and Chinese Versions.” Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 9, nos. 3/4 (1947): 207–314.

Choi, Jin kyoung. Three Sūtras from the Gilgit Dīrghāgama Manuscript: A Synoptic Critical Edition, Translation and Textual Analysis. PhD diss., Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München, 2015.

Choong, Mun-keat. The Fundamental Teachings of Early Buddhism: A comparative study based on the Sūtrāṅga portion of the Pali Saṃyutta-Nikāya and the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2000.

Chung, Jin-il (1998). Die Pravāraṇā in den kanonischen Vinaya-Texten der Mūla­sarvāstivādin und der Sarvāstivādin. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 7. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Chung, Jin-il (2008). A Survey of the Sanskrit Fragments Corresponding to the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama 雜阿含經相當梵文斷片一覧. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin.

Chung, Jin-il, and Takamichi Fukita. A Survey of the Sanskrit Fragments Corresponding to the Chinese Madhyamāgama. Tokyo: The Sankibo Press, 2011.

Chung, Jin-il, and Klaus Wille. “Fragmente aus dem Bhaiṣajyavastu der Sarvāstivādins in der Sammlung Pelliot (Paris).” Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 4: 105–24. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 9. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 2002.

Clarke, Shayne (2009). “Monks Who Have Sex: Pārājika Penance in Indian Buddhist Monasticisms.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 37: 1–43.

Clarke, Shayne (2014). Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 1, Vinaya Texts. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University.

Clarke, Shayne (2015). “Vinayas.” In Brill’s Encyclopedia of Buddhism, edited by Jonathan Silk et al., vol. 1, Literature and Languages, 60–87. Leiden: Brill, 2015.

Clarke, Shayne (2018). “Lost in Tibet, Found in Bhutan: The Unique Nature of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Law Code for Nuns.” Buddhism, Law & Society 2: 199–292.

Cowell, Edward Byles, and Robert Alexander Neil. [1886]. The Divyāvadāna, a Collection of Early Buddhist Legends. Delhi: Indological Book House, 1987.

Csoma Körösi, Alexander. “Analysis of the Dulva.” Asiatic Researches 20, no. 1 (1836): 41–93. Reprint, Tibetan Studies: being a reprint of the articles contributed to the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal and Asiatic Researches. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadò, 1984.

Das, Chandra. Tibetan-English Dictionary. Calcutta: Bengal Secretariat Book Depôt, 1902. Reprint, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1969.

Das Gupta, Kabita. Viśvantarāvadāna, eine buddhistische Legende. Edition eines Textes auf Sanskrit und Tibetisch eingeleitet und übersetzt. PhD diss., Freie Universität Berlin, 1978.

Dave, K. N. Birds in Sanskrit Literature with 107 Bird Illustrations. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 2005.

De Chiara, Matteo. The Khotanese Sudhanāvadāna. Beiträge zur Indologie 48. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2013.

Deeg, Max. “Has Xuanzang really been in Mathurā? Interpretatio Sinica or Interpretatio Occidentalia‍—How to Critically Read the Records of the Chinese Pilgrim.” In Essays on East Asian Religion and Culture: Festschrift in honour of Nishiwaki Tsuneki on the occasion of his 65th birthday, 35–73. Kyoto: Editorial committee for the Festschrift in honour of Nishiwaki Tsuneki, 2007.

Degener, Almuth (1990). Das Kaṭhināvadāna. Indica et Tibetica Band 16. Bonn: Indica et Tibetica Verlag.

Degener, Almuth (1991). “Die handschriftliche Überlieferung des Vinayavastu der Mūla­sarvāstivādin. By Klaus Wille.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 111, no. 3: 588–89.

Delhey, Martin. “Vakkali: A New Interpretation of His Suicide.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 13 (2009): 67–108.

Demoto, Mitsuyo, and Michael Hahn. “Ergänzungen zur Überlieferung des Śyāmajātaka.” In From Turfan to Ajanta: Festschrift for Dieter Schlingloff on the Occasion of his Eightieth Birthday. Vol. 1, 215–48. Bhairahawa, Rupandehi: Lumbini International Research Institute, 2010.

Dhammadinnā (2014). “A Translation of a Discourse Quotation in the Tibetan Translation of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Parallel to Chinese Saṃyukta-āgama Discourse 36 and of the Discourse Quotations in Śamathadeva’s Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā Parallel to Chinese Saṃyukta-āgama Discourses 39, 42, 45, 46, 55, 56, 57 and 58.” Dharma Drum Journal of Buddhist Studies 14: 73–128.

Dhammadinnā (2015–16). “Women’s Aspirations and Soteriological Agency in Sarvāstivāda and Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Narratives.” Buddhism, Law & Society 1: 33–67.

Dhammadinnā (2018). “Karma Here and Now in a Mūlasarvāstivāda Avadāna: How the Bodhisattva Changed Sex and Was Born as a Female 500 Times*.” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 21: 63–94.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2013). The Play in Full (Lalita­vistara, Toh 95). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2013.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2019). The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 317). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2019.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. trans. (2021). Distinctly Ascertaining the Meanings (Arthaviniścayadharmaparyāya, Toh 317). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2021.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2023). trans. The Queen of Incantations: The Great Peahen (Toh 559). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Dimitrov, Dragomir. “Some Remarks on the Rūpyāvatyavadāna of the Divyāvadāna(mālā).” In Bauddhasāhityastabakāvalī: Essays and Studies on Buddhist Sanskrit Literature dedicated to Claus Vogel by colleagues, students, and friends: 45–68. Indica et Tibetica Band 36. Marburg: Indica et Tibetica Verlag, 2008.

Durt, Hubert (1980). “Mahalla/Mahallaka et la crise de la communauté apprès le parinirvāṇa du Buddha.” In Indianisme et bouddhisme: Mélanges offerts à Mgr. Étienne Lamotte: 79–99. Louvain-la-Neuve: Université catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste.

Durt, Hubert (1999). “The Offering of the Children of Prince Viśvantara/Sudāna in the Chinese Tradition.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 2: 147–82.

Durt, Hubert (2000). “The Casting-off of Mādrī in the Northern Buddhist Literary Tradition.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 3: 133–58.

Durt, Hubert (2005). “Kajaṅgalā, who could have been the last mother of the Buddha.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 9: 65–90.

Dutt, Nalinaksha. Gilgit Manuscripts, vol. 3 in 4 parts. Srinagar: Research Department, 1942–50. Reprint, Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications. 1984.

Edgerton, Franklin. [1953]. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1998.

Einoo, Shingo 永ノ尾 信悟 (1984). “Kodai indo saishiki bunken ni kijutsu sareta kokumotsu ryōkri 古代インド祭式文献に記述された穀物料理 [Definition of ancient Indian food from grain based on Vedic ritual literature].” Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology 国立民族学博物館研究報告 9, no.3: 521–32.

Einoo, Shingo (1988). Die Cāturmāsya oder die altindischen Tertialopfer dargestellt nach den Vorschriften der Brāhmaṇas und der Śrautasūtras. Monumenta Serindica No. 18. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Enomoto, Fumio 榎本文雄 (1984a). “Setsuissaiubukei āgama no tenkai: ‘Chūagon’ to ‘Zōagon’ wo megutte, 説一切有部系アーガマの展開: 『中阿含』と『雑阿含』をめぐって [The development of the Sarvāstivādin scriptures, with a special focus on the Madhyamāgama and Saṃyuktāgama].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 32, no. 2: 1073–70.

Enomoto, Fumio (1984b). “Higashi torukisutan shutsudo bonbun agon no keifu 東トルキスタン出土梵文阿含の系譜 [The lineage of transmission of the Sanskrit āgamas unearthed from Eastern Turkestan].” Kachō tanki daigaku kenkyū kiyō 華頂短期大学研究紀要 [Bulletin of Kacho Junior College] 29: 11–26.

Enomoto, Fumio (1991–94). A Comprehensive Study of the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama: Indic Texts Corresponding to the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama as Found in the Sarvāstivāda-Mūlasarvāstivāda Literature Part 1: *Saṃgītanipāta. Kyoto.

Fausbøll, V. [1877–96]. The Jātaka together with its Commentary. 6 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1962–64.

Feer, Léon. [1884–98]. Saṃyutta-Nikāya. 5 vols. London/Oxford: Pali Text Society, 1975–2006.

Finnegan, Damchö Diana. “For the Sake of Women, Too”: Ethics and Gender in the Narratives of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya. PhD diss., University of Wisconsin-Madison, 2009

Fiordalis, David. “The Buddha’s Great Miracle at Śrāvastī: a Translation from the Tibetan Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Asian Literature and Translation 2, no. 3 (2014): 1–33.

Frauwallner, Erich. The Earliest Vinaya and the Beginnings of Buddhist Literature. Serie Orientale Roma 8. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1956.

Fukita, Takamichi 吹田 隆道. “Soreyue ima, Ānanda yo: ‘jikie hōkie’ no seppō saikō それゆえ今、アーナンダよ―「自帰依・法帰依」の説法再考― [Therefore now, Ānanda: A reconsideration of the preaching of Atta-saraṇa and Dhamma-saraṇa].” In Kagawa Takao hakushi koki kinen ronshū: bukkyōgaku jōdogaku kenkyū 香川孝雄博士古稀記念論集 佛教学浄土学研究 [Studies on Buddhism and Pure Land Buddhism: Felicitation volume in Honour of Dr. Takao Kagawa on the occasion of his 70th birthday]:157–66. Kyoto: Nagata bunshōdō 永田文昌堂, 2001.

Glass, Andrew. Four Gāndhārī Saṃyuktāgama Sūtras: Senior Kharoṣṭhī Fragment 5. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press, 2007.

Gnoli, Raniero (1977–78). The Gilgit Manuscript of the Saṅghabhedavastu: Being the 17th and Last Section of the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin. 2 vols. Serie Orientale Roma 49, nos. 1–2. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Gnoli, Raniero (1978). The Gilgit Manuscript of the Śayanāsanavastu and the Adhikaraṇavastu: Being the 15th and 16th Sections of the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin. Serie Orientale Roma 50. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Hahn, Michael. Poetical Visions of the Buddha’s Former Lives: Seventeen Legends from Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā. New Delhi: Aditya Prakashan, 2011.

Hara, Minoru. “Right in India and Left in China? On I-Ching’s Translation of the Sudhanakumārāvadāna.” In Amṛtadhārā: Professor R. N. Dandekar Felicitation Volume, 159–66. Delhi: Ajanta Publications, 1984.

Harrison, Paul, and Jens-Uwe Hartmann, eds. From Birch Bark to Digital Data: Recent Advances in Buddhist Manuscript Research. Papers Presented at the Conference Indic Buddhist Manuscripts: The State of the Field, Stanford, June 15–19 2009. Vienna: Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 2014.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe (1991). “Endangered by Man-eating Witches: a Fragment of the Siṃhalāvadana from the Turfan Finds.” In Papers in Honour of Prof. Dr. Ji Xianlin on the Occasion of His 80th Birthday. Vol. 2, 563–75. Nanchang shi: Jiangxi renmin chubanshe 江西人民出版社.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe (2004). “Contents and Structure of the Dīrghāgama of the (Mūla-)Sarvāstivādins.” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 7: 119–37.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe, and Klaus Wille. “The Manuscript of the Dīrghāgama and the Private Collection in Virginia.” In Harrison and Hartmann, eds., 2014: 137–55.

Hashimoto, Sōko 橋本 草子. “Shuyāma honjō setsuwa no henyō シュヤーマ本生説話の変容: 仏典を中心とする [The Change of Śyāma Jātaka].” Kyōto Women’s University Journal of Humanities 京都女子大学人文論叢 50 (2002):109–30.

Hikata, Ryūshō 干潟 龍祥. Honjōkyōrui no shisōshi teki kenkyū 本生経類の思想史的研究 [“A historical study of the thoughts in jātakas and similar stories”]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林. Revised and enlarged edition, 1978.

Hinüber, Oskar von. “The Gilgit Manuscripts: An Ancient Buddhist Library in Modern Research.” In Harrison and Hartmann, eds., 2014: 79–135.

Hirakawa, Akira 平川 彰. Nihyakugojikkai no kenkyū 二百五十戒の研究 [“Studies on the two hundred and fifty rules”]. 4 vols. Hirakawa Akira chosakushū 平川彰著作集 [The collected works of Akira Hirakawa] vol. 14–17. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社,1993–95.

Hiraoka, Satoshi 平岡 聡 (1998). “The Relation between the Divyāvadāna and the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 26: 419–34.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2002a). “Shikishin toshite kinō suru budda no aikon: buttō wo meguru setsuissaiubu no ritsu to ron tono sogo 色身として機能するブッダのアイコン: 仏塔を巡る説一切有部の律と論との齟齬 [The icon of the Buddha functioning as his material body].” In Sakurabe hakushi kiju kinen ronshū 櫻部建博士喜寿記念論集 初期仏教からアビダルマへ [“Early Buddhism and Abhidharma thought: in honor of Doctor Hajime Sakurabe on his seventy-seventh birthday”], 185–98. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平楽寺書店.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2002b). Setsuwa no kōkogaku: Indo bukkyō setsuwa ni himerareta shisō 説話の考古学: ンド仏教説話に秘められた思想 [“The archaeology of narratives: thoughts hidden in Indian Buddhist narratives”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2007). Budda ga nazotoku sanze no monogatari: ‘Diviya-avadāna’ zen’yaku ブッダが謎解く三世の物語 『ディヴィヤ・アヴァダーナ』全訳 [“The stories of the past, present, and future revealed by the Buddha: a complete translation of the Divyāvadāna”]. 2 vols. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2009). “Text critical remarks on the Divyāvadāna (1).” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology 12: 29–72.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2011). “Review Article: The Divyāvadāna in English.” Indo-Iranian Journal 54: 231–70.

Hirata, Masahiro 平田 昌弘, Nozomi Itagaki 板垣 希美, Kenji Uchida 内田 健治, Masa’aki Hanada 花田 正明, and Masahito Kawai 河合 正人. “Ko-chūki indo-āria bunken ‘Veda bunken’ ‘Pāli seiten’ ni motozuita minami ajia no kodai nyūseihin no saigen to dōtei 古・中期インド・アーリア文献 「Veda 文献」 「Pāli 聖典」に基づいた南アジアの古代乳製品の再現と同定 [Reproduction and identification of ancient dairy products in South Asia based on the old and middle Indo-Aryan literatures, ‘Vedic ritual’ and the ‘Pāli canon’].” Nihon Chikusan Gakkaihō 日本畜産学会報 84, no. 2 (2013): 175–90.

Hofinger, Marcel (1954) [1982] Le congrès du Lac Anavatapta (Vies de saints bouddhiques): Extrait du Vinaya des Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu 1, Légendes des anciens (Sthavirāvadāna). Louvain: Publications Universitaires.

Hofinger, Marcel (1990). Le congrès du Lac Anavatapta (Vies de saints bouddhiques): Extrait du Vinaya des Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu 2, Légendes du Buddha (Buddhāvadāna). Louvain-la-Neuve: Université Catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste.

Honjō, Yoshifumi 本庄 良文 (1984). A Table of Āgama-Citations in the Abhidharmakośa and the Abhidharmakoṣopāyikā Part 1 倶舎論所依阿含全表. Kyoto: private edition.

Honjō, Yoshifumi (2014). Kusharonchū Upāikā no kenkyū: Yakuchūhen 倶舎論註ウパーイカーの研究 訳註篇 [“A study of the Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā: an annotated translation”]. 2 vols. Tokyo: Daizō Shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hosoda Noriaki 細田 典明 (1991). “Sanskrit Fragments from the Parivrājakasaṃyukta of the Saṃyuktāgama (3).” Journal of Indian philosophy and Buddhism 印度哲学仏教学 6: 172–91.

Hosoda Noriaki (2006). “ ‘Zōagon’ Dōhon to ‘Komponsetsuissaiubu binaya yakuji.’ 『雑阿含』道品と『根本説一切有部毘奈耶薬事』 [Saṃyuktāgama Mārga­varga and Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya Bhaiṣajya­vastu].” Journal of Buddhist Studies 佛教學 48: 1–20.

Hosoda Noriaki (2014). “ ‘Zōagon’ Dōhon Nenjo Sō’ō 『雑阿含』道品念處相応 [Smṛtyupastāna-saṃyukta of the Mārgavarga, Saṃyuktāgama].” Journal of Indian Philosophy and Buddhism インド哲学仏教学論集 2: 47–169.

Ingalls, Daniel Henry Holmes. “Source of a Mūla­sarvāstivādin Story of the Origin of the Ganges.” Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 14 (1951):185–88.

Ishikawa, Mie. A Critical Edition of the sGra sbyor bam po gnyis pa: An Old and Basic Commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti. Tokyo: Toyo Bunko, 1990.

Iwamoto, Yutaka 岩本 裕 (1967). Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū dai’ichi: Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū josetsu 佛教説話研究第一 佛教説話研究序説 [“A Study of Buddhist narrative literature vol. 1: An introduction to the study of Buddhist narrative literature”]. Kyoto: Hōzōkan 法藏館. Revised edition, 1978.

Iwamoto, Yutaka (1978). Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū josetsu: Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū vol. 1 仏教説話研究序説: 仏教説話研究 第一巻 [“An introduction to the study of Buddhist narrative literature: a study of Buddhist narrative literature vol. 1”]. Tokyo: Kaimei shoin 開明書院.

Iwamoto, Yutaka (1979). Sumāgadā avadāna kenkyū [“A study of the Sumāgadhāvadāna”]. Tokyo: Kaimei shoin 開明書院.

Jaini, Padmanabh S. “The Story of Sudhana and Manoharā: An Analysis of the Texts and the Borobudur Reliefs.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London 29, no. 3 (1966): 533–58.

Jäschke, H. A. 1881. Tibetan English Dictionary. London: The Secretary of State for India in Council. Compact edition, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1993.

Jamspal, Lozang, and Kaia Tara Fischer, trans. The Hundred Deeds (Karmaśataka, Toh 340). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Ji, Xianlin. 1943. “Parallelversionen zur tocharischen Rezension des Punyavanta-Jātaka.” Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 97, no. 2: 284–324. The author’s name is given as Dschi Hiän-lin.

Jones, John James. 1949–56. The Mahāvastu. 3 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1973–78.

Kalsang Gyaltsen, Venerable Khenpo and Chodrungma Kunga Chodron, trans. The Exemplary Tale of Sumāgadhā (Sumāga­dhāvadāna, Toh 346). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024.

Kane, Pandurang Vaman. History of Dharmaśāstra (Ancient and Medieval Religious and Civil Law), vol. iii. Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Risearch Institute, 1973.

Karashima, Seishi, and Margarita I. Vorobyova Desyatovskaya. “The Avadāna Anthology from Merv, Turkmenistan.” In Buddhist Manuscripts from Central Asia: The St. Petersburg Sanskrit Fragments (StPSF), vol. 1, edited by Seishi Karashima and Margarita I. Vorobyova-Desyatovskaya, 145–523. Tokyo: The Institute of Oriental Manuscripts of the Russian Academy of Sciences and the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University, 2015.

Khoroche, Peter. Once a Peacock, Once an Actress: Twenty-Four Lives of the Bodhisattva from Haribhaṭṭa’s “Jātakamālā”. Chicago & London: The University of Chicago Press, 2017.

Kieffer-Pülz, Petra. Review of Silk, Jonathan A., Managing Monks. Administrators and Administrative Roles in Indian Buddhist Monasticism. Indo-Iranian Journal 53 (2010): 71–88.

Kishino, Ryōji IV (2013). A Study of the Nidāna: An Underrated Canonical Text of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya. PhD diss., University of California, Los Angeles.

Kishino, Ryōji IV (2016). “A Further Study of the Muktaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya: A Table of Contents and Parallels.” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University. 21: 227–83.

Kritzer, Robert. Garbhāvakrāntisūtra: The Sūtra on Entry into the Womb. Tokyo: The International Institute for Buddhist Studies, 2014.

Kuan, Tse-fu. “Legends and Transcendence: Sectarian Affiliations of the Ekottarikāgama in Chinese Translation.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 133, no. 4 (2013): 607–34.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2004). The Karmavibhaṅga: Transliterations and Annotations of the Original Sanskrit Manuscripts from Nepal. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2015). “Newly Identified Manuscripts in the Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts: Avadānas and Dhāraṇīs.” Annual Report of The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 18: 253–62.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2017). Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 3, Avadānas and Miscellaneous Texts. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University.

Lamotte, Étienne (1944–1980). Le traité de la grande vertu de sagesse de Nāgārjuna (Mahāprajñāpāramitāśāstra). 5 vols. Volumes 1–2 were originally published by Bureaux du Muséon in Louvain in 1944 and 1949, respectively, and reprinted by Institute orientaliste of the Université de Louvain in Louvain-la-Neuve in 1981. Volumes 3–5 were published by the latter publisher in 1970, 1976, and 1980.

Lamotte, Étienne (1951). “Alexandre et le bouddhisme.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 44, no. 1: 147–62.

Lamotte, Étienne (1957). “Khuddakanikāya and Kṣudraka­piṭaka.” East and West 7, no. 4: 341–48.

Lamotte, Étienne (1958). Histoire du bouddhisme indien, des origines à l’ère Śaka. Bibliothèque du Muséon. Vol. 43. Louvain: Publications universitaires, Institut orientaliste.

Lamotte, Étienne (1966). “Vajrapāṇi en Inde.” Mélanges de sinologie offerts à Monsieur Paul Demièville II. Bibliothèque de l’Institut des hautes études chinoises. Vol. 20, 113–59. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.

Lamotte, Étienne (1988). History of Indian Buddhism. Louvain-la-Neuve: Université Catholique de Louvain, Institute orientaliste. Translated by Sara Webb-Boin.

Li, Rongxi. The Great Tang Dynasty Record of the Western Regions. Berkeley: Numata Center for Buddhist Translation and Research, 1996.

Li, Wei. Schwanfrau und Prinz: Die chinesische Frühform einer Divyāvadāna-Legende. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2012.

Lilley, Mary E. The Apadāna. 2 vols. Oxford: Pali Text Society, 2000.

Liu, Zhen 劉 震. Chanding yu kuxiu : guan yu fozhuan yuanchu fanben de faxian he yanjiu 禅定与苦修: 関于佛伝原初梵本的發現和研究 [Dhyānāni tapaś ca: meditation and ascetic practice: the finding of an original Sanskrit manuscript on the Buddha’s biography and its study]. Shanghai: Shanghai guji 上海古籍, 2010.

Malalasekera, G.P. Dictionary of Pāli Proper Names. 2 vols. London: Pali Text Society, 1937.

Mayeda, Egaku 前田 惠學. Genshi bukkyō seiten no seiritsushi kenkyū 原始佛教聖典の成立史研究 [“A history of the formation of original Buddhist scriptures”]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 1964.

Matsumoto, Junko 松本 純子. “Kachangarā monogatari: musuko eno omoi: “karumashataka” dai 33 wa and dai 42 wa カチャンガラー物語・息子への想い―『カルマシャタカ』第 33 話・第 42 話 和訳― [The story of Kacaṅgalā: love for her son. Japanese translations of the 33rd and 42nd story of the Karmaśataka].” Zentsūji kyōgaku shinkōkai kiyō 善通寺教学振興会紀要 15 (2010): 1–15.

Matsumura, Hisashi 松村 恒 (1980). Four Avadānas from the Gilgit Manuscripts. PhD diss., Australian National University.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1985). “Raitawarakyō no tenkai no ichidammen 頼吒和羅経の展開の一断面 [An aspect of the development of the Rāṣṭrapāla-sūtra].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 15: 39–62.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1988a). “Gleanings from the Gilgit Manuscripts‍—Serial No. 1: Vinayavastu‍—.” Aligarh Journal of Oriental Studies 5: 163–76.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1988b). The Mahāsudarśanāvadāna and The Mahāsudarśanasūtra. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1989a). “Āyuḥparyantasūtra: Das Sūtra von der Lebensdauer in den verschiedenen Welten Text in Sanskrit und Tibetisch.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen, Folge 1, 70–100. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 2. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1989b). “Preamble to the Anavataptagāthā.” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 18: 125–60.

Matsuyama, Shuntarō 松山 俊太郎 (1980–2002). “Kodai indo jin no yoso’oi 古代インド人のよそおい [Ancient Indian makeup].” Keshō bunka 化粧文化 3–42.

Melzer, Gudrun (2010a). Ein Abschnitt aus dem Dīrghāgama. PhD diss., Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München.

Melzer, Gudrun (2010b). “Sanskrit sources corresponding to the Caitya­pradakṣiṇa­gāthā inscription in Alchi.” Berliner Indologische Studien 19: 54–70. Appendix B in Kurt Tropper, “The Caitya­pradakṣiṇa­gāthā Inscription in Alchi: A Valuable Witness for Kanjur Studies.” Berliner Indologische Studien 19: 15–70.

Miller, Robert. The Chapter on Going Forth (Pravryjyāvastu, Toh 1-1). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2018.

Mizuno, Kōgen 水野 弘元 (1981). Hokku kyō no kenkyū 法句経の研究 [“A study of the Dharmapada”]. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1992). “ ‘Suttanipāta’ no ge ya kyō no taiōhyō 『スッタニパータ』の偈や経の対応表 [A comparative study of the Suttanipāta].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 21: 2–56.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1993). “Chōrōe, chōrōnige no taishōhyō 長老偈, 長老尼偈の対応表 [A comparative study of the Theragāthā and the Therīgāthā].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 22: 3–83.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1995). “Shohokkukyō no ge no hikaku taishō 諸法句経の偈の比較対照 [A comparison of the verses of the Dhammapada texts].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 24: 5–76.

Monier-Williams, Monier. A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1899.

Morris, Richard, A.K. Warder, E. Hardy, and Mabel Hunt. [1885–1961]. The Anguttara-nikāya. 6 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1958–76.

Muldoon-Hules, Karen Maria. “Of Milk and Motherhood: The Kacaṅgalā Avadāna Read in a Brahmanical Light.” Religions of South Asia 3, no. 1 (2009): 111–24.

Murakami, Shinkan 村上 真完. Sai’iki no bukkyō: bezekuriku seiganga kō 西域の仏教: ベゼクリク誓願画考 [“The praṇidhi scenes of the cave temples at Bezeklik in Chinese Turkestan”]. Tokyo: Daisan bunmei sha 第三文明社, 1984.

Namikawa, Takayoshi 並川 孝儀. Indo bukkyō kyōdan shōryōbu no kenkyū インド仏教教団正量部の研究 [“A study of the Indian Buddhist Sāṃmitīya sect”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大藏出版, 2011.

Nattier, Jan. “The Realm of Akṣobhya: A Missing Piece in the History of Pure Land Buddhism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 23, no. 1 (2000): 71–102.

Negi, J. S. Tibetan-Sanskrit Dictionary. 16 vols. Sarnath/Varanasi: Central Institute of Higher Tibetan Studies, 1993–2005.

Nishimoto, Ryūzan 西本 龍山. Ritsubu 律部 [Vinaya section] 23. Kokuyaku issaikyō 國譯一切經 [“A translation of the complete Buddhist canon into classical Japanese in kakikudashi style”]. Tokyo: Daitō shuppansha 大東出版社, 1933.

Nishimura, Naoko. “Processing of Dairy Products in the Vedic Ritual, Compared with Pāli.” In Vedic Studies: Language, Text, Culture and Philosophy, Proceedings of the 15th World Sanskrit Conference: 211–42. New Delhi: D.K. Printworld, 2014.

Norman, K.R. [1906]. The Commentary on the Dhammapada. 4 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1970.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi 荻原 裕敏 (2010). “Tokarago A Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka no buhakizoku ni tsuite トカラ語 A 《 Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka 》の部派帰属について [On the school affiliation of the Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka in Tocharian A].” Tokyo University Linguistic Papers 東京大学言語学論集 30: 169–86.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2011). “Arannakyō ni hitei sareta SHT shoshū bongo danpen ni tsuite 「 阿蘭那經」に比定された SHT 所収梵語断片について [Sanskrit fragments identified as the Ālánnàjīng in SHT].” Tokyo University Linguistics Papers 東京大学言語学論集 31: 235–68.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2015a). “Tuhuoluoyu wenxian suojian foming xilie–yi chutu fodian yu kumutula kuqun 吐火羅語文献所見佛名系列–以出土佛典与庫木吐喇窟群区第 34 窟榜題爲例 [Lists of former buddhas in Tocharian texts: A comparative study of unearthed manuscripts and captions in Kumtura Cave no. 34].” Literature & History of ern Regions 西域文史 9: 33–49.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2015b). “The transmission of Buddhist Texts to Tokharian Buddhism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 38: 295–312.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2016a). “ ‘Komponsetsuissaiuburitsu yakuji’ ni kanren suru niten no tokarago B dampen ni tsuite 『根本説一切有部律薬事』に関連する二点のトカラ語 B 断片について [On two Tokharian fragments related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya].” In Shirukurōdo to kindai nihon no kaikō: sai’iki kodai shiryō to nihon kindai bukkyō シルクロードと近代日本の邂逅―西域古代資料と日本近代仏教 [The encounter of the Silk Road and modern Japan: ancient Central Asian materials and modern Japanese Buddhism], 258–76, Tokyo: Bensei shuppan 勉誠出版.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2016b). “Doitsu shozō tokarago B dampen B384 ni tsuite ドイツ所蔵トカラ語 B 断片 B384 について [Tocharian Fragment B384 of the Berlin Turfan Collection].” Tokyo University Linguistics Papers 東京大学言語学論集 37: e69–e79.

Okada, Mamiko 岡田 真美子. “Ryū honjō (2) kukishashintan to ryūnikushoku setsuwa 龍本生 (2) 救飢捨身譚と龍肉食説話‍—根本説一切有部薬事を中心に‍— [Former birth stories of the Buddha: Naga (2)].” Bulletin of Kobe Women’s University 神戸女子大学紀要 (文学部篇) 26, no. 1 (1993): 157–68.

Okano, Kiyoshi 岡野 潔 (2006). “Anavataptagāthā no shakuson no gō no zanshi wo toku innenwa no keisei, Anavataptagāthā の釈尊の業の残滓を説く因縁話の形成 [An essay on formations of the Buddhāvadāna of the Anavatapta­gāthā and its parallels].” Ronshū 論集, Indogaku shūkyō gakkai 印度学宗教学会 33: 73–93.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2007). “Kṣemendra no Daśa­karma­plutyavadāna‍—Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā dai 50 shō no kōtei to yaku, Kṣemendraの Daśakarmaplutyavadāna ‍— Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā 第 50 章の校訂と訳‍— [Kṣemendra’s Daśa­karma­plutyavadāna: a text-critical edition and translation of the 50th chapter of the Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 2: 201–301.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2008). “Avadānakalpalatā 55 章、 91–92 章と Karmaśataka 125–126 話‍—Sarvaṃdada, Śibi, Maitrakanyaka の校訂・和訳‍— [The Avadāna­kalpalatā chs. 55, 91, and 92 and the Karmaśataka 125, 126: texts and translations of Sarvaṃdada, Sibi, and Maitrakanyaka].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 3: 57–155.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2010). “Kalpalatā と Avadānamālā の研究 (1)―Vidura, Kaineyaka, Śreṣṭhipretībhūta の説話 [A study of the Kalpalatā and Avadānamālā 1: the stories of Vidura, Kaineyaka, and Śreṣṭhipretībhūta].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 5: 51–127.

Oldenberg, Hermann. [1879–83]. The Vinaya Piṭakaṃ. 5 vols. London and Oxford: The Pali Text Society, 1982–97.

Oldenberg, Hermann, and Richard Pischel. [1883]. The Thera- and Therī-gāthā. London: The Pali Text Society, 1966.

Olivelle, Patrick. A Sanskrit Dictionary of Law and Statecraft. Delhi: Primus Books, 2015.

Ono, Genmyo 小野 玄妙. Bukkyō no bijutsu oyobi rekishi 佛教之美術及歷史 [“Buddhist Art and History”]. Tokyo: Bussho kenkyū kai 佛書研究會, 1916.

Panglung, Jampa Losang (1980). “Preliminary Remarks on the Uddānas in the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin.” In Tibetan Studies in Honour of Hugh Richardson: Proceedings the International Seminar on Tibetan Studies, Oxford, 1979, 226–32. Warminster: Aris & Phillips.

Panglung, Jampa Losang (1981). Die Erzählstoffe des Mūlasarvāstivāda-Vinaya: Analysiert auf Grund der tibetischen Übersetzung. Studia Philologica Buddhica: Monograph Series 3. Tokyo: The Reiyukai Library.

Park, Chongdok, C.H. “The Buddha’s Eating of Horse-Fodder Barley in the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Vinaya.” In Buddhist Narrative in Asia and Beyond, 31–44. Bangkok: Institute of Thai Studies, Chulalongkorn University, 2012.

Pathak, Suniti K. “A Dharani-Mantra in the Vinaya-Vastu.” Bulletin of Tibetology 2 (1989): 31–39.

Pinaut, Georges-Jean. Chrestomathie tokharienne: textes et grammaire. Leuven-Paris: Peeters, 2008.

Pradhan, P. Abhidharm-koshabhāṣya of Vasubandhu. Patna: K. P. Jayaswal Research Institute, 1967.

Przyluski, Jean. “Le nord-ouest de l’Inde dans le Vinaya des Mūla-Sarvāstivādins et les textes apparentés.” Journal Asiatique 11ͤ série, tome 4 (1914): 493–568.

Ramers, Peter. Die “drei Kapitel über die Sittlichkeit” im Śrāmāṇyaphala-sūtra. PhD diss., Rheinischen Friedrich-Willhelms-Universität zu Bonn, 1996.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, J. Estlin Carpenter, and William Stede. The Sumaṅgala-vilāsinī Buddhaghosa’s commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya. 3 vols. London: Pali Text Society, 1968–71. Second edition.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, and J. Estlin Carpenter. 1890–1911. The Dīgha Nikāya. 3 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1966–76.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, and William Stede. The Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary. London: The Pali Text Society. 1921–25. Revised reprint, 2015.

Rosen, Valentina. Der Vinayavibhaṅga zum Bhikṣuprātimokṣa der Sarvāstivādins. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 2. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1959.

Rotman, Andy. Divine Stories: Divyāvadāna. 2 vols. Boston: Wisdom Publications, 2008–17.

Sadakata, Akira 定方 晟. “Kinnara キンナラ.” Proceedings of the Faculty of Letters of Tokai University 東海大学紀要 文学部 32 (1979): 31–43.

Sakaki, Ryōzaburō 榊 亮三郎 (1912–15). “Diviāvadāna no kenkyū narabini hon’yaku 「 デイヸアーヷダーナ」の研究並に翻譯 [A study and translation of the Divyāvadāna].” Rokujō gakuhō 六條學報 134–38, 140–50, 152, 153, 155–59, 161, 162, 169.

Sakaki, Ryōzaburō [1916] (1998). Bonzōkanwa shiyaku taikō hon’yaku myōgi taishū 梵藏漢和四譯對校 飜譯名義大集 [“A quadrilingual Sanskrit-Tibetan-Chinese-Japanese edition of the Mahāvyutpatti”]. Kyoto: Rinsen Shoten 臨川書店.

Salomon, Richard (2008). Two Gāndhārī Manuscripts of the Songs of Lake Anavatapta (Anavataptagāthā): British Library Kharoṣṭhī Fragment 1 and Senior Scroll 14. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press.

Salomon, Richard (2018). The Buddhist Literature of Ancient Gandhāra. Somerville: Wisdom Publications.

Sarma, Sreeramula Rajeswara. “Some Medieval Arithmetical Tables.” Indian Journal of History of Science, 32(3), 1997.

Sasaki, Shizuka 佐々木 閑 (1999). Shukke toha nanika 出家とはなにか [“What is ‘going forth?’”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大藏出版.

Sasaki, Shizuka (2000). “Basharon to ritsu 婆沙論と律 [Vinayas quoted in the Vibhāṣā].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 49(1): 421–413.

Schiefner, Anton [1882]. Tibetan Tales Derived from Indian Sources. Translated into English by W. R. S. Ralston. Reprint, The Bible of Tibet: Tibetan Tales from Indian Sources. London: Kegan Paul, 2003.

Schlingloff, Dieter (1977). “König Prabhāsa und der Elefant.” Indologica Taurinensia 5: 139–52.

Schlingloff, Dieter (1985). “Das śyāma-Jātaka: Schultradition und Bildüberlieferung einer buddhistischen Legende.” In Zur Schulzugehörigkeit von Werken der Hīnayāna-Literatur, Teil 1, 203–18. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Schlingloff, Dieter (2000). Erzählende Wandmalereien Vol I Interpretation. Ajanta: Handbuch der Malereien 1. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Schlingloff, Dieter (2013). Narrative Wall-paintings Vol. I Interpretation. Ajanta: Handbook of the Paintings 1. New Delhi: Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts. English version of Schlingloff 2000.

Schmithausen, Lambert. “Beiträge zur Schulzugehörigkeit und Textgeschichte kanonischer und postkanonischer buddhistischer Materialien.” In Zur Schulzugehörigkeit von Werken der Hīnayāna-Literatur, Teil 2, 304–435. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1987.

Schopen, Gregory (1985). “Two Problems in the History of Indian Buddhism: The Layman/Monk Distinction and the Doctrines of the Transference of Merit.” Studien zur Indologie und Iranistik 10: 9–47. Reprint, 1997: 23–55.

Schopen, Gregory (1987). “Burial Ad Sanctos and the Physical Presence of the Buddha in Early Indian Buddhism: A Study in the Archaeology of Religions.” Religion 17: 193–225. Reprint, 1997: 114–47.

Schopen, Gregory (1995). “Monastic Law Meets the Real World: A Monk’s Continuing Right to Inherit Family Property in Classical India.” History of Religions 35, no. 2: 101–23. Reprint, 2004a: 170–92.

Schopen, Gregory (1996). “The Lay Ownership of Monasteries and the Role of the Monk in Mūla­sarvāstivādin Monasticism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 19, no. 1: 81–126. Reprint, 2004a: 219–59.

Schopen, Gregory (1997). Bones, Stones, and Buddhist Monks: Collected Papers on the Archaeology, Epigraphy, and Texts of Monastic Buddhism in India. Honolulu: University of Hawai’ i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (1999). “The Bones of a Buddha and the Business of a Monk: Conservative Monastic Values in an Early Mahāyāna Polemical Tract.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 27: 279–324. Reprint, 2005a: 63–107.

Schopen, Gregory (2000). “Hierarchy and Housing in a Buddhist Monastic Code: A Translation of the Sanskrit Text of the Śayanāsana­vastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Buddhist Literature 2: 92–196.

Schopen, Gregory (2004a). Buddhist Monks and Business Matters: Still More Papers on Monastic Buddhism in India. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2004b). “On Buddhist Monks and Dreadful Deities: Some Monastic Devices for Updating the Dharma.” In Gedenkschrift J. W. de Jong, 161–84. Studia Philologica Buddhica: Monograph Series 17. Tokyo: International Institute for Buddhist Studies of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies. Reprint, 2014: 333–57.

Schopen, Gregory (2005a). Figments and Fragments of Mahāyāna Buddhism in India: More Collected Papers. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2005b). “Taking the Bodhisattva into Town: More Texts on the Image of ‘the Bodhisattva’ and Image Processions in the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” East and West 55: 299–311. Reprint, 2014: 390–403.

Schopen, Gregory (2007). “The Learned Monk as a Comic Figure: On Reading a Buddhist Vinaya as Indian Literature.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 35: 201–26. Reprint, 2014: 404–31.

Schopen, Gregory (2008). “On Emptying Chamber Pots without Looking and the Urban Location of Buddhist Nunneries in Early India Again.” Journal Asiatique 296.2: 229–56. Reprint, 2014: 23–46.

Schopen, Gregory (2012). “A New Hat for Hārītī: On ‘Giving’ Children for Their Protection to Buddhist Monks and Nuns in Early India.” Little Buddhas: Children and Childhoods in Buddhist Texts and Traditions, 17–42. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Reprint, 2014: 131–56.

Schopen, Gregory (2014). Buddhist Nuns, Monks, and Other Worldly Matters: Recent Papers on Monastic Buddhism in India, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2018). “On Monks and Emergencies: The Brahmanical Principle of Āpad in a Buddhist Monastic Code.” In Reading Slowly: A Festschrift for Jens E. Braarvig, 375–91. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Senart, Émile. Le Mahāvastu, texte sanscrit publié pour la première fois et accompagné d’introductions et d’un commentaire. 3 vols. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale, 1882–97.

Shackleton Bailey, D. R. (1950). “Notes on the Divyāvadāna Part 1.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland: 166–84.

Shackleton Bailey, D. R. (1951). “Notes on the Divyāvadāna Part 2.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland: 82–102.

Shimoda, Masahiro 下田 正弘. Nehangyō no kenkyū: Daijō kyōten no kenkyū hōhō shiron 涅槃経の研究―大乗経典の研究方法試論 [“A study of the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra with a focus on the methodology of the study of the Mahāyāna sūtras”]. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社, 1997.

Shōno, Masanori. “Local Buddhist Monastic Agreements among the (Mūla)sarvāstivādins.” Buddhist Studies Review 34, no. 1 (2017): 53–66.

Silk, Jonathan A. Managing Monks: Administrators and Administrative Roles in Indian Buddhist Monasticism. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008.

Skilling, Peter (1994–97). Mahāsūtras. 2 vols. Oxford: The Pali Text Society.

Skilling, Peter (1999). “ ‘Arise, go forth, devote yourselves…’: A verse summary of the teaching of the Buddhas.” In Socially Engaged Buddhism for the New Millennium: Essays in Honor of the Ven. Phra Dhammapitaka (Bhikkhu P.A. Payutto) on His 60th Birthday Anniversary, 440–44. Bangkok: Sathirakoses-Nagapradipa Foundation & Foundation For Children.

Skilling, Peter (2000). “Vasubandhu and the Vyākhyāyukti Literature.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 23, no. 2: 297–350.

Skilling, Peter (2003). “On the Agnihotra­mukhā Yajñāḥ Verses.” In Jainism and Early Buddhism: Essays in Honor of Padmanabh S. Jaini, 637–667. Fremont California: Asian Humanities Press.

Skilling, Peter (2007). “Zombies and Half-Zombies: Mahāsūtras and Other Protective Measures.” The Journal of Pali Text Society 29: 313–30.

Skilling, Peter, and Paul Harrison. “What’s in a Name? Sarvāstivādin Interpretations of the Epithets ‘Buddha’ and ‘Bhagavat.’ ” In Buddhism and Jainism: Essays in Honour of Dr. Hōjun Nagasaki on His Seventieth Birthday, 131–56. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten, 2005.

Steinthal, Paul. Udāna. London: Pali Text Society, 1982.

Straube, Martin (2006). Prinz Sudhana und die Kinnarī: Eine buddhistische Liebesgeschichte von Kṣemendra Texte, Übersetzung, Studie. Indica et Tibetica Band 46. Marburg: Indica et Tibetica Verlag.

Straube, Martin (2009). Studien zur Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā: Texte und Quellen der Parallelen zu Haribhaṭṭas Jātakamālā. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Strong, John (1983). “Filial Piety and Buddhism: The Indian Antecedents to a ‘Chinese’ problem.” In Traditions in Contact and Change: Selected Proceedings of the XIVth Congress of the International Association for the History of Religions, 171–86, 699–701. Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfrid Laurier University Press.

Strong, John (1992). The Legend and Cult of Upagupta: Sanskrit Buddhism in North India and Southeast Asia. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

Sugimoto, Takushū 杉本 卓洲 (1978). “Kashō butsu no tō 迦葉仏の塔 [The stupa of the Buddha Kāśyapa].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 27, no. 1: 202–06.

Sugimoto, Takushū (1981). “Mu’uai (shi heno shōdō) to jisatsu: genshi bukkyō ni okeru jisatsukan 無有愛(死への衝動)と自殺―原始仏教における自殺観― [Impulse toward death and suicide: the early Buddhist view of suicide].” Journal of “bukkyō fukushi” 佛教福祉 7: 4–33.

Sugimoto, Takushū (1993). Bosatsu: Jātaka karano tankyū 菩薩–-ジャータカからの探求–- [“Bodhisattva: Explorations of the Jātakas”]. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平樂寺書店.

Takakusu, Junjirō 高楠順次郎, and Watanabe Kaikyoku 渡辺海旭, ed. Taishō shinshū daizōkyō 大正新脩大藏經. 100 vols. Tokyo: Taishō Issaikyō Kankōkai 大正一切經刊行會, 1924–34.

Takubo, Shūyo 田久保 周誉. Bombun Kujakumyō’ōkyō 梵文孔雀明王經 [Ārya Mahā-Māyūrī Vidyā-Rājñī]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 1972.

Tamai, Tatsushi. “The Tocharian Mūgapakkha-Jūtaka.” Annual Report of The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 20 (2017): 251–75.

Tanabe, Kazuko. 田辺 和子 (1981). “Paññāsa-jātaka chū no Sudhana-jātaka (I), Paññāsa-jātaka 中の Sudhana-jātaka (I) [The Sudhana-jātaka in the Paññāsa-jātaka (I).” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 10: 99–126.

Tanabe, Kazuko (1983). “Paññāsa-jātaka chū no Sudhana-jātaka (II), Paññāsa-jātaka 中の Sudhana-jātaka (II) [The Sudhana-jātaka in the Paññāsa-jātaka (II)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 13: 105–21.

Tatelman, Joel (2000). The Glorious Deeds of Pūrṇa: A Translation and Study of the Pūrṇāvadāna. Surrey: Curzon Press.

Tatelman, Joel (2005). The Heavenly Exploits: Buddhist Biographies from the Divyāvadāna Volume One. New York: New York University Press.

Teiser, Stephen F. Reinventing the Wheel: Paintings of Rebirth in Medieval Buddhist Temples. Seattle & London: University of Washington Press, 2006.

Tournier, Vincent. La formation du Mahāvastu et la mise en place des conceptions relatives à la carrière du bodhisattva. Paris: École française d’Extrême-Orient, 2017.

Trenckner, V., Robert Chalmers, and C.A.F. Rhys Davids. [1888–1925]. Majjhima-nikāya. 4 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1974–79.

Trenckner, V. et al. A Critical Pali Dictionary. 3 vols. Copenhagen: The Royal Danish Academy of Sciences and Letters, 1924–92.

Tsai, Yao-ming 蔡 耀明. “Ji’erjite (Gilgit) fanwen fodian xieben de chutu yu fojiao yanjiu 吉爾吉特 (Gilgit) 梵文佛典寫本的出土與佛教研究 [The emergence of the Gilgit Sanskrit Buddhist manuscripts and Buddhist studies].” Zhengguan 正觀 13 (2000): 2–126.

Tsuchida, Ryūtaro. “Two Categories of Brahmins in the Early Buddhist Period.” The Memoirs of the Research Department of the Toyo Bunko 49 (1991): 51–95.

Tucci, Giuseppe. “Preliminary report on an archaeological survey in Swat.” East and West 9, no. 4 (1958): 279–328.

Vira, Raghu, and Lokesh Chandra (1959–74). Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts. 10 vols. Śata-piṭaka Series 10. New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture.

Vira, Raghu, and Lokesh Chandra (1995). Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts. 3 vols. Bibliotheca Indo-Buddhica Series 150–52. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications.

Vogel, J.Ph. Indian Serpent-Lore or the Nāgas in Hindu Legend and Art. Varanasi: Indological Book House, 1972.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1984). “Some Hitherto Unidentified Fragments of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit.” Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften in Göttingen, Philologisch-Historische Klasse 1984, no. 7: 299–337.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1992). “Some More Fragments of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neu-entdeckungen und Neu-editionen. Folge 2: 65–109. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, Beiheft 4. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1996).“The Final Leaves of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit. Part 1: Saṃgharakṣitāvadāna.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 3, 241–96. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, Beiheft 6. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (2002). “The Final Leaves of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit. Part 2: Nāgakumārāvadāna and Lévi Text.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 4, 11–76. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 9. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (2014). “The Pravrajyāvastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen. Last visited on November 2, 2020.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1948). “Wunderkräfte des Buddha: Eine Episode im Sanskrittext des Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra.” Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen 1948: 48–91. Reprint, Von Ceylon bis Turfan: Schriften zur Geschichte, Literatur, Religion und Kunst des indischen Kulturraumes, 120–63. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1967.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1950–51). Das Mahāparinirvāṇasūtra: Text in Sanskrit und Tibetisch, verglichen mit dem Pāli nebst einer Übersetzung der chinesischen Entsprechung im Vinaya der Mūla­sarvāstivādins. 3 vols. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1950–51. Reprint, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1986.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1980). “The Rāṣṭrapālasūtra in Sanskrit Remnants from Central Asia.” Indianisme et bouddhisme: Mélanges offerts à Mgr. Étienne Lamotte, 359–74, Louvain: Université catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste Louvain-la-Neuve. Reprint, 1989.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1989). Ausgewählte kleine Schriften. Edited by Heinz Bechert und Petra Kieffer-Pülz. Stuttgart: Steiner Verlag.

Waldschmidt, Ernst et al. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1973–2018.

Walleser, Max, and Hermann Kopp. Manoratha-pūraṇī: Commentary on the Aṅguttara Nikāya. 5 vols. 1924–56. Second ed. and reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1966–79.

Wille, Klaus (1990). Die handschriftliche Überlieferung des Vinayavastu der Mūla­sarvāstivādin. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Verlag.

Wille, Klaus (2014a). “Survey of the Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Turfan Collection (Berlin).” In Harrison and Hartmann ed. 2014: 187–211.

Wille, Klaus (2014b). “Survey of the Identified Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Hoernle, Stein, and Skrine Collections of the British Library (London).” In Harrison and Hartmann ed. 2014: 223–46.

Wogihara, Unrai. Sphuṭārthā Abhidharmakośa­vyākhyā. Tokyo: Sankibō Busshorin, 1936.

Wu, Juan (2016). “The Rootless Faith of Ajātaśatru and Its Explanations in the *Abhidharma-mahā­vibhāṣā.” Indo-Iranian Journal 59: 101–138.

Wu, Juan (2017). “Parallel Stories in the Āvaśyakacūrṇi and the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya: A Preliminary Investigation.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 137, no. 2: 315–47.

Yajima, Michihiko 矢島 道彦. “Suttanipāta taiōku sakuin, Suttanipāta 対応句索引 [An index to parallel verses and padas of the Suttanipāta collected from Buddhist, Jain, and Brahmanical texts].” Bulletin of the Institute of Buddhist Culture Tsurumi University 2 (1997): A1–A97.

Yamabe, Nobuyoshi. “The Paths of Śrāvakas and Bodhisattvas in Meditative Practices.” Acta Asiatica 96 (2009): 47–75.

Yamada, Ryūjō 山田 龍城. Bongo butten no shobunken: Daijō bukkyō seiritsuron josetsu shiryōhen 梵語佛典の諸文献: 大乗佛教成立論序説 資料篇 [“Materials of Sanskrit Buddhist literature: prolegomenon to the establishment of Mahayana Buddhism”]. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平樂寺書店, 1959.

Yamagiwa, Nobuyuki 山極 伸之. “Shoki bukkyō kyōdan ni okeru shoku no juyō 初期仏教教団における食の受容–-浄地をめぐる諸問題–- [The acceptance of food in the early Buddhist monastic community: problems about kappiyabhūmi/kalpikaśālā].” In Ishigami Zennō kyōju koki kinen ronbunshū: bukkyō bunka no kichō to tenkai 石上善應教授古稀記念論文集 仏教文化の基調と展開 [“Festschrift for Professor Zennō Ishigami on the occasion of his seventieth birthday: the basis and development of Buddhist culture”], 307–22, Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 2001.

Yamanaka, Yukio 山中 行雄, Tsutomu Yamashita 山下 勤, Ritsu Akahane 赤羽 律, and Yasutaka Muroya 室屋 安孝 (2011). “Bukkyō bunken ‘Ryōjibyō kyō’ to sono kanren bunken ni tsuite 仏教文献『療痔病経』とその関連文献について [A study of ‘The Sūtra of the Tranquilization of Hemorrhoids’ and other relevant material].” Nihon ishigaku zasshi 日本医史学雑誌 57, no. 3: 293–304.

Yamanaka, Yukio (2012). “Bukkyō bunken ‘Ryōjibyō kyō’ no haikei ni tsuite 仏教文献『療痔病経』の背景について [A study of the Arśapraśamaṇisūtra: Analysis].” Nihon ishigaku zasshi 日本医史学雑誌 58, no. 1: 39–51.

Yao, Fumi 八尾 史 (2007). “Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu ni okeru kyōten inyō no mondai: Mahādevasūtra no jirei, 根本説一切有部律における経典引用の問題―Mahādevasūtraの事例 [On the Mahādevasūtra quoted in the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 35: 195–215.

Yao, Fumi (2010). “ ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō: ‘Nehangyō’ taiō bubun wo chūshin ni 『根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相―「涅槃経」対応部分を中心に, [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya: with a focus on the parallel part to the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 38: 251–79.

Yao, Fumi (2011). ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō 2, 『 根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相(二) [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya (2)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 39: 179–99.

Yao, Fumi (2012a). “ ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō 3, 『根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相(三) [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya (3)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 40: 291–318.

Yao, Fumi (2012b). “Problems in the sTog Palace Manuscript of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 60, no. 3: 1189–93.

Yao, Fumi (2013a). Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu yakuji 根本説一切有部律薬事 [“The Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya” (annotated Japanese translation)]. Tokyo: Rengō shuppan 連合出版.

Yao, Fumi (2013b). “A Brief Note on the Newly Found Sanskrit Fragments of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 61, no. 3: 72–77.

Yao, Fumi (2015). “A Preliminary Report on the Newly Found Sanskrit Manuscript Fragments of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Indian Logic 8, 289–303.

Yao, Fumi (2017). “Dharmadinnā Becomes a Nun: A Story of Ordination by Messenger from the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, Translated from the Tibetan version.” Asian Literature and Translation 4, no. 1: 105–48.

Yao, Fumi (2018). “Two Sanskrit Manuscripts of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu from Gilgit.” WIAS Research Bulletin 10: 91–102.

Yao, Fumi (Forthcoming a.) “Traces of Incorporation: Some Examples of the Saṃyuktāgama Sūtras in the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” In Research on the Saṃyukta-āgama. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation

Yao, Fumi (Forthcoming b.) “The Formation of the Buddha’s Former Life Stories in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 42.

Zin, Monika, (2004). “The Mūkapaṅgu Story in the Madras Government Museum: The Problem of the Textual Affiliations of the Narrative Reliefs in Amaravati and Nagarjunakonda.” Annali, Università degli studi di Napoli “L’Orientale” 64: 157–80.

Zin, Monika, (2006a). Mitleid und Wunderkraft: Schwierige Bekehrungen und ihre Ikonographie im indischen Buddhismus. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Zin, Monika, (2006b). “About Two Rocks in the Buddha’s Life Story.” East and West 56, no. 4: 329–58.

Zin, Monika, (2012). “Māndhātar, the Universal Monarch, and the Meaning of Representations of the Cakravartin in the Amaravati School, and of the Kings on the Kanaganahalli Stūpa.” In Buddhist Narrative in Asia and Beyond: In Honour of HRH Princess Maha Chakri Sirindhorn on Her Fifty-Fifth Birth Anniversary:149–64. Bangkok: Institute of Thai Studies, Chulalongkorn University.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

a person who makes things allowable

Wylie:
  • rung ba byed pa
Tibetan:
  • རུང་བ་བྱེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpikāra

A layperson who makes things legally permissible in the context of Buddhist monastic law, doing tasks that are not allowed for monks.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­104
g.­2

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

The sixth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­3

Abṛha

Wylie:
  • mi che ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཆེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • abṛha

The first of the “pure abodes;” also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­9

Ādirājya

Wylie:
  • dang po’i rgyal srid
Tibetan:
  • དང་པོའི་རྒྱལ་སྲིད།
Sanskrit:
  • ādirājya

A place in Śūrasena.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­269-270
  • 8.­2
g.­10

Ādumā

Wylie:
  • yul a du ma
  • a du ma
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་ཨ་དུ་མ།
  • ཨ་དུ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • ādumā

A village.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­11
  • 11.­44
g.­12

aggregate

Wylie:
  • phung po
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • skandha

The basic components out of which the world and the personal self are formed, usually listed as a set of five.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­344
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­265
  • 5.­2
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­403
  • 9.­961-962
  • 11.­157
  • n.­263
  • n.­502
  • g.­649
g.­13

Agnidatta

Wylie:
  • me sbyin
Tibetan:
  • མེ་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • agnidatta

(1) A brahmin. (2) A brahmin king.

Located in 37 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­393
  • 2.­395
  • 2.­397
  • 2.­399
  • 2.­405-408
  • 2.­410
  • 2.­420
  • 8.­120
  • 8.­127-129
  • 8.­189-190
  • 8.­193
  • 8.­199-202
  • 8.­204
  • 8.­210
  • 8.­212
  • 8.­215-216
  • 8.­219
  • 8.­222
  • n.­115
  • n.­515
  • n.­738
  • g.­34
  • g.­192
  • g.­224
  • g.­340
  • g.­411
g.­17

Ajātaśatru

Wylie:
  • ma skyes dgra
Tibetan:
  • མ་སྐྱེས་དགྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • ajātaśatru

The son of King Śreṇya Bimbisāra, who later becomes the king of Magadha.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 3.­3
  • 3.­6-7
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­13-15
  • 3.­19-22
  • 3.­26-27
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­37-38
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­48-50
  • 3.­52-53
  • 3.­107-108
  • 3.­134-136
  • n.­124
  • n.­128
  • g.­697
g.­20

Akaniṣṭha

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha

The fifth and highest of the “pure abodes;” also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­24

Anabhraka

Wylie:
  • sprin med
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • anabhraka

The tenth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­25

Ānanda

Wylie:
  • kun dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ānanda

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A disciple of a former Buddha. (3) A disciple of a future Buddha. (4) A king in the past.

Located in 233 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3-5
  • 1.­7-9
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­64
  • 2.­67
  • 2.­76-79
  • 2.­82
  • 2.­86-88
  • 2.­269-272
  • 2.­276
  • 2.­280-281
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­54
  • 3.­76
  • 3.­81
  • 3.­98-99
  • 3.­135-136
  • 3.­139
  • 3.­203
  • 3.­206
  • 3.­229
  • 3.­272
  • 3.­298
  • 3.­324
  • 4.­2-4
  • 4.­7-9
  • 4.­11-16
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­28-32
  • 4.­34-36
  • 4.­46-47
  • 4.­55
  • 4.­58-59
  • 4.­63-72
  • 4.­82
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­87-91
  • 4.­112-113
  • 5.­3-5
  • 5.­10-13
  • 6.­162-163
  • 6.­183-184
  • 6.­221
  • 6.­227-228
  • 6.­246-247
  • 6.­257-258
  • 6.­278-280
  • 7.­4-6
  • 7.­8
  • 7.­11
  • 7.­15
  • 7.­17
  • 7.­41
  • 7.­45
  • 7.­47
  • 7.­149-150
  • 7.­207
  • 7.­239
  • 7.­269-271
  • 8.­2-4
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­69-70
  • 8.­95-96
  • 8.­112-113
  • 8.­128
  • 8.­130
  • 8.­132-134
  • 8.­136-137
  • 8.­139-140
  • 8.­143-144
  • 8.­146
  • 8.­148
  • 8.­173-178
  • 8.­180
  • 8.­182-183
  • 8.­185-186
  • 8.­188
  • 8.­192-194
  • 8.­199-205
  • 8.­207
  • 8.­240
  • 9.­2-3
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­8-9
  • 9.­17
  • 9.­41
  • 9.­43-44
  • 9.­108-109
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­132-133
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­465-466
  • 9.­1386-1388
  • 9.­1392
  • 9.­1403
  • 9.­1405
  • 9.­1427
  • 9.­1435
  • 9.­1440
  • 9.­2532-2533
  • 9.­2544-2545
  • 9.­2551-2552
  • 9.­2558-2559
  • 9.­2569-2570
  • 10.­65-66
  • 11.­29
  • 11.­198
  • 11.­202
  • 11.­204-205
  • 11.­224
  • 11.­227
  • n.­57
  • n.­130
  • n.­365
  • n.­429
  • n.­447
  • n.­454
  • n.­502
  • n.­508-509
  • n.­511
  • n.­563-564
  • n.­622
  • n.­697
  • n.­940
  • n.­960
  • n.­1180
  • g.­532
g.­27

Anāthapiṇḍada

Wylie:
  • mgon med zas sbyin
Tibetan:
  • མགོན་མེད་ཟས་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • anāthapiṇḍada

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A wealthy merchant in the town of Śrāvastī, famous for his generosity to the poor, who became a patron of the Buddha Śākyamuni. He bought Prince Jeta’s Grove (Skt. Jetavana), to be the Buddha’s first monastery, a place where the monks could stay during the monsoon.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­91
  • 2.­207-213
  • 6.­239
  • 8.­191
  • 8.­193
  • 9.­48
  • 9.­71-74
  • 9.­76-77
  • n.­668
  • g.­625
g.­33

Aniruddha

Wylie:
  • ma ’gags
Tibetan:
  • མ་འགགས།
Sanskrit:
  • aniruddha

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A buddha in the past.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1435
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1738
  • 9.­1989-1990
  • 9.­2007-2009
  • n.­117
  • n.­1012
g.­34

Apalāla

Wylie:
  • sog ma med
Tibetan:
  • སོག་མ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • apalāla

Lit. “Without a Straw.” A nāga king, who was the brahmin Agnidatta in a former life.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­422
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­51-52
  • 7.­212-213
  • 7.­225-228
  • 7.­234-235
  • 7.­237
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­270-271
  • n.­114
  • n.­128
  • n.­343
  • n.­401
  • n.­423
  • n.­429
  • g.­411
g.­37

Apramāṇābha

Wylie:
  • tshad med ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇābha

The fifth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­38

Apramāṇaśubha

Wylie:
  • tshad med dge
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་དགེ
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇaśubha

The eighth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­39

Apriya

Wylie:
  • mi dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • apriya

A yakṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­243
g.­41

Araṇemi

Wylie:
  • rtsibs kyi mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • རྩིབས་ཀྱི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • araṇemi

A teacher who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1257-1258
  • 9.­1260-1261
  • 9.­1263
  • 9.­1276-1277
  • n.­883
  • n.­886
g.­43

arhat

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat

One who has achieved the fourth and final level of attainment on the śrāvaka path and attained liberation with the cessation of all afflictive emotions.

Located in 115 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­24
  • 2.­67
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­256
  • 2.­292
  • 2.­315
  • 2.­343
  • 2.­346-347
  • 2.­349-350
  • 2.­352
  • 2.­365
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­75
  • 3.­127
  • 3.­174
  • 3.­197
  • 3.­200-201
  • 3.­250-255
  • 3.­267
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­296
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­322
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­34-35
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­102
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­57
  • 7.­66
  • 7.­113
  • 7.­117
  • 7.­122
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­130-131
  • 7.­150
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­118
  • 8.­232
  • 8.­248
  • 8.­262
  • 8.­268
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­36
  • 9.­39
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­323-325
  • 9.­329
  • 9.­1527
  • 9.­1532
  • 9.­1587
  • 9.­1606
  • 9.­1619
  • 9.­1637-1638
  • 9.­1655
  • 9.­1661
  • 9.­1675
  • 9.­1683
  • 9.­1697
  • 9.­1735
  • 9.­1830
  • 9.­1871
  • 9.­1900
  • 9.­1941
  • 9.­2006
  • 9.­2016
  • 9.­2023
  • 9.­2049
  • 9.­2074
  • 9.­2107
  • 9.­2132
  • 9.­2145
  • 9.­2164-2165
  • 9.­2267
  • 9.­2317
  • 9.­2321
  • 9.­2355
  • 9.­2361
  • 9.­2506-2507
  • 9.­2534
  • 10.­67
  • 11.­35
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­57-58
  • 11.­93
  • 11.­159
  • n.­40
  • n.­491
  • g.­42
  • g.­640
  • g.­668
g.­46

Arthavargīya Sūtras

Wylie:
  • don gyi tshoms kyi mdo dag
Tibetan:
  • དོན་གྱི་ཚོམས་ཀྱི་མདོ་དག
Sanskrit:
  • arthavargīya sūtras

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­55

asura

Wylie:
  • lha ma yin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A type of nonhuman being whose precise status is subject to different views, but is included as one of the six classes of beings in the sixfold classification of realms of rebirth. In the Buddhist context, asuras are powerful beings said to be dominated by envy, ambition, and hostility. They are also known in the pre-Buddhist and pre-Vedic mythologies of India and Iran, and feature prominently in Vedic and post-Vedic Brahmanical mythology, as well as in the Buddhist tradition. In these traditions, asuras are often described as being engaged in interminable conflict with the devas (gods).

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 3.­7
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­276
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­302
  • 7.­164
  • 8.­31-32
  • 8.­47
  • 9.­238-242
  • 9.­244
  • 9.­725
  • 9.­825
  • 9.­852
  • 9.­1376
  • g.­720
g.­56

Aśvaka

Wylie:
  • ’gro mgyogs
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་མགྱོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • aśvaka

A nāga. See also n.­441.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­251-253
  • 7.­255
  • g.­215
g.­58

Atapa

Wylie:
  • mi gdung ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གདུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • atapa

The second of the “pure abodes;” also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­59

Aṭaṭa

Wylie:
  • so thams thams
Tibetan:
  • སོ་ཐམས་ཐམས།
Sanskrit:
  • aṭaṭa

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­60

Ātreya

Wylie:
  • rgyun shes kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་ཤེས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ātreya

(1) The physician of King Prasenajit. (2) The name of Prince Kuśa disguised as a physician.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46-47
  • 2.­50-54
  • 2.­67-69
  • 2.­71
  • 9.­375
  • g.­551
g.­71

Bamboo Grove

Wylie:
  • ’od ma’i tshal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མའི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇuvana

A grove near Rājagṛha in Magadha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­40-41
  • 2.­412
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­25
  • 9.­2071
  • n.­935
g.­76

Being Crushed

Wylie:
  • bsdus gzhom
Tibetan:
  • བསྡུས་གཞོམ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃghāta

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1731
  • 9.­1938
g.­78

Best Army

Wylie:
  • sde mchog
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • —

A king.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­399
  • 2.­405
  • 7.­242
g.­82

Bhadrakanyā

Wylie:
  • bu mo bzang mo
Tibetan:
  • བུ་མོ་བཟང་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrakanyā

A woman who was Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s mother in her previous life and was reborn in Marīcika World. See also n.­106.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­330
  • 2.­332
  • 2.­337
  • n.­106
g.­90

Bhārgava

Wylie:
  • ngan spong
Tibetan:
  • ངན་སྤོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhārgava

A ṛṣi.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­87
  • n.­213
g.­92

Bhava

Wylie:
  • ’byor pa
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhava

A householder and the father of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92-93
  • 2.­95-96
  • 2.­100-103
  • 2.­105
  • 2.­114-116
  • 2.­118
  • n.­66
  • g.­94
  • g.­95
  • g.­96
g.­94

Bhavanandin

Wylie:
  • ’byor dga’
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhavanandin

A son of Bhava and half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­94
  • 2.­109
  • 2.­128
  • g.­676
g.­95

Bhavatrāta

Wylie:
  • ’byor skyob
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་སྐྱོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhavatrāta

A son of Bhava and half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­94
  • 2.­109
  • 2.­128
  • g.­610
g.­96

Bhavila

Wylie:
  • ’byor len
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་ལེན།
Sanskrit:
  • bhavila

A son of Bhava and half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­93
  • 2.­105
  • 2.­107
  • 2.­109
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­124
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­128
  • 2.­130
  • 2.­133
  • 2.­138-139
  • 2.­141-143
  • 2.­148
  • 2.­151
  • 2.­154-155
  • 2.­204-205
  • g.­145
g.­101

Black Cord

Wylie:
  • thig nag
Tibetan:
  • ཐིག་ནག
Sanskrit:
  • kālasūtra

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1624
  • 9.­1693
  • 9.­2032
  • 9.­2484
  • 9.­2489
  • 9.­2492
g.­102

Blisters

Wylie:
  • chu bur can
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བུར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • arbuda

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 2.­75
  • 4.­18
g.­103

Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahman

(1) A buddha in the past. (2) A god.

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­247
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­183
  • 3.­185-187
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­276
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­302
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­49
  • 6.­51
  • 6.­120-123
  • 6.­230-231
  • 6.­236
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­266-267
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­1135
  • 9.­1302-1303
  • 9.­1308-1309
  • 9.­1311-1313
  • 9.­1316-1324
  • 9.­1329
  • 9.­1332
  • 9.­1390
  • 9.­1450
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1751
  • 9.­2190
  • 9.­2199
  • 9.­2253
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­87
  • n.­716
  • n.­894
  • g.­104
g.­107

Brahma­purohita

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i mdun na ’don
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་མདུན་ན་འདོན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahma­purohita

A class of gods who inhabit the second heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­112

brahmin (caste)

Wylie:
  • bram ze’i rigs
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེའི་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa

One of the four castes, that of the highly respected priestly caste of classical Indian society.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199
  • 6.­201-204
  • 6.­208
  • 9.­1238
  • 9.­2280
  • 11.­50
  • g.­131
g.­117

Bṛhatphala

Wylie:
  • ’bras bu che
Tibetan:
  • འབྲས་བུ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhatphala

A class of gods who inhabit one of the levels in the highest heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­120

Burst Blisters

Wylie:
  • chu bur rdol ba
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བུར་རྡོལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirarbuda

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 2.­75
  • 4.­18
g.­122

Campā

Wylie:
  • tsam pa
Tibetan:
  • ཙམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • campā

A country.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­32
  • 2.­71
  • 9.­1351
  • 9.­1671
  • g.­536
g.­124

Cañcā

Wylie:
  • rtswa mi
Tibetan:
  • རྩྭ་མི།
Sanskrit:
  • cañcā

A female mendicant who falsely accuses the Buddha.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1511
  • 9.­1513-1514
  • 9.­1517-1518
  • 9.­1521
  • 9.­1523
  • 9.­2362
  • 9.­2367
  • 9.­2382
  • 9.­2482
  • n.­848
  • n.­937
g.­131

caste

Wylie:
  • rigs
Tibetan:
  • རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • varṇa

The four social classes of traditional Hindu society: brahmin, kṣatriya, vaiśya, and śūdra.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199
  • 6.­201-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­213
  • 6.­236
  • 8.­18-19
  • 8.­203
  • 9.­2280
  • n.­327
  • g.­112
  • g.­125
  • g.­320
  • g.­391
  • g.­506
  • g.­629
  • g.­702
g.­137

“Come, monk” formula

Wylie:
  • dge slong tshur shog ces bya ba
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་ཚུར་ཤོག་ཅེས་བྱ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ehibhikṣukā

A formula for ordination that consists of the words, “Come, monk.” This is one of the ways of ordaining a man as monk and is said to have been used by the Buddha until he established the rules of the standard ordination ceremony.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­304
  • 2.­310
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­116
  • 9.­33
  • 9.­2530
g.­140

continent of Jambu

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i gling
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་གླིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jambudvīpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name of the southern continent in Buddhist cosmology, which can signify either the known human world, or more specifically the Indian subcontinent, literally “the jambu island/continent.” Jambu is the name used for a range of plum-like fruits from trees belonging to the genus Szygium, particularly Szygium jambos and Szygium cumini, and it has commonly been rendered “rose apple,” although “black plum” may be a less misleading term. Among various explanations given for the continent being so named, one (in the Abhidharmakośa) is that a jambu tree grows in its northern mountains beside Lake Anavatapta, mythically considered the source of the four great rivers of India, and that the continent is therefore named from the tree or the fruit. Jambudvīpa has the Vajrāsana at its center and is the only continent upon which buddhas attain awakening.

Located in 41 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­71
  • 2.­244
  • 2.­291
  • 2.­326
  • 2.­400
  • 3.­162-163
  • 3.­268
  • 4.­35
  • 9.­171
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­176
  • 9.­179
  • 9.­182
  • 9.­193
  • 9.­246-247
  • 9.­258
  • 9.­260
  • 9.­941-942
  • 9.­946-948
  • 9.­950-960
  • 9.­1257
  • 9.­1639-1641
  • 9.­1996
  • g.­396
g.­143

Daṇḍin

Wylie:
  • dbyug gu can
Tibetan:
  • དབྱུག་གུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • daṇḍin

A brahmin.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­473-474
  • 9.­476
  • 9.­480
  • 9.­482-483
  • 9.­485
  • 9.­487
  • 9.­490
  • 9.­497
  • 9.­499-505
  • 9.­507-512
  • 9.­518
  • n.­696
  • n.­700
  • n.­705
g.­145

Dārukarṇin

Wylie:
  • shing gi rna rgyan can
  • shing gi rna cha can
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་གི་རྣ་རྒྱན་ཅན།
  • ཤིང་གི་རྣ་ཆ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • dārukarṇin

Another name of Bhavila, a half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­109
  • 2.­237-242
  • 2.­248-249
  • 2.­260
  • 2.­283
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­317
g.­146

Deer Park

Wylie:
  • ri dags kyi nags
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་ཀྱི་ནགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgadāva

A park near Vārāṇasī where the Buddha gave the first sermon.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 3.­267
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2350
  • 9.­2408
g.­148

Dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel par ’byung ba
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་པར་འབྱུང་བ།
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratītya­samutpāda

The relative nature of phenomena, which arises in dependence on causes and conditions. Together with the four truths of the noble ones, this was the first teaching given by the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­352
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­276
  • n.­164
g.­149

Devadatta

Wylie:
  • lha sbyin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • devadatta

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­3
  • 9.­988
  • 9.­2485
  • n.­232
  • n.­1039
  • n.­1068
g.­152

Dhanapālaka

Wylie:
  • nor skyong
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhanapālaka

An elephant who was sent to kill the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­3
  • 10.­54-55
  • n.­1095-1096
g.­159

Dhṛtarāṣṭra

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor skyong
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhṛtarāṣṭra

(1) The name common to two of the seven kings mentioned in the story of Govinda. (2) A buddha in the past. (3) One of the Four Great Kings. (4) A haṃsa.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 9.­1222
  • 9.­1350
  • 9.­1394
  • 9.­1420-1421
  • 9.­1506
  • 11.­12
  • 11.­16-17
  • 11.­24
  • 11.­36
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­160

dhyāna

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyāna

A kind of meditation, often enumerated in terms of increasingly more subtle states of concentration.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­278
  • 2.­286
  • 2.­413
  • 5.­11
  • 6.­106
  • 6.­108
  • 6.­110
  • 6.­112
  • 6.­114-115
  • 8.­277
  • 9.­152-153
  • 9.­876
  • 9.­1109
  • 9.­1239
  • 9.­1303-1308
  • 9.­1329
  • 9.­1496
  • 9.­1576
  • 9.­1590
  • 9.­2377
  • n.­290
  • n.­670
  • n.­955
g.­172

eightfold abstinence

Wylie:
  • yan lag brgyad dang ldan pa’i bsnyen gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་དང་ལྡན་པའི་བསྙེན་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Abstinence from killing, stealing, sexual intercourse, lying, drinking, adorning oneself with garlands and perfume and lying in a large bed, enjoying dance and music, and eating after noon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­33
  • 2.­38-39
g.­175

element

Wylie:
  • khams
Tibetan:
  • ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhātu

One way of describing experience and the world in terms of eighteen elements (eye and form, ear and sound, nose and smell, tongue and taste, body and physical objects, and mind and mental phenomena, to which the six consciousnesses are added). Also refers here to the four elements of earth, water, fire, and wind.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­344
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­214
  • 3.­265
  • 6.­115
  • 7.­228
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­137
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­403
  • 9.­961
  • 9.­1723
  • 9.­2588
  • 10.­47
g.­183

four applications of mindfulness

Wylie:
  • dran pa nye bar gzhag pa bzhi pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲན་པ་ཉེ་བར་གཞག་པ་བཞི་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāri smṛtyupasthānāni

The meditative application of awareness to the body, perception, mind, and dharmas; part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­8
  • 7.­3
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­17
  • 7.­47
  • 8.­87-88
  • n.­188
g.­185

Four Great Kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal po chen po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāro mahārājāḥ

Divine guardians of the four directions, namely, Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Virūḍhaka, Virūpākṣa, and Vaiśravaṇa. Also referred to as the Four Protectors of the World.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­170
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­215
  • 9.­222
  • 9.­224
  • 9.­1238
  • 11.­28
  • 11.­30
  • n.­153
  • n.­329
  • n.­645
  • n.­1134
  • g.­159
  • g.­187
  • g.­206
  • g.­666
  • g.­667
  • g.­701
  • g.­731
  • g.­732
g.­187

Four Protectors of the World

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten skyong ba bzhi
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་སྐྱོང་བ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāraḥ loka­pālāḥ

Four deities guarding the four quarters, namely, Dhṛtarāṣṭra in the east, Virūḍhaka in the south, Virūpākṣa in the west, and Vaiśravaṇa in the north. Also referred to as the Four Great Kings.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­276
  • 3.­302
  • 8.­266-267
  • 11.­4-5
  • 11.­34-36
  • g.­185
g.­190

four truths of the noble ones

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i bden pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་བདེན་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturāryasatya

The Buddha’s first teaching, which explains suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the path to the cessation of suffering.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­293
  • 2.­296
  • 2.­332
  • 3.­77-78
  • 3.­227
  • 6.­174
  • 6.­253
  • 6.­272
  • 7.­182
  • 8.­101
  • 8.­264
  • 8.­282
  • 9.­24
  • 9.­31
  • 9.­2581
  • 10.­85
  • 10.­91
  • 11.­37
  • g.­148
g.­192

Free from the Cycle

Wylie:
  • ’khor bral
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The wife of the brahmin Agnidatta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
g.­193

fruit of stream-entry

Wylie:
  • rgyun du zhugs pa’i ’bras bu
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་དུ་ཞུགས་པའི་འབྲས་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • srotāpatti­phala

The first of the four spiritual achievements, which is considered to be entering “the stream” of the noble ones that flows inexorably toward awakening.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­293
  • 2.­296
  • 2.­315
  • 2.­332
  • 3.­227
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­111
  • 6.­253
  • 6.­272
  • 6.­294
  • 7.­166
  • 7.­182
  • 8.­101
  • 8.­264
  • 8.­282
  • 9.­24
  • 9.­31
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­316
  • 9.­318
  • 9.­329
  • 9.­2581
  • 10.­91
  • 10.­98
  • 11.­57-58
  • n.­543
g.­197

Ganges

Wylie:
  • chu bo gang gA
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བོ་གང་གཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gaṅgā, or Ganges in English, is considered to be the most sacred river of India, particularly within the Hindu tradition. It starts in the Himalayas, flows through the northern plains of India, bathing the holy city of Vārāṇasī, and meets the sea at the Bay of Bengal, in Bangladesh. In the sūtras, however, this river is mostly mentioned not for its sacredness but for its abundant sands‍—noticeable still today on its many sandy banks and at its delta‍—which serve as a common metaphor for infinitely large numbers.

According to Buddhist cosmology, as explained in the Abhidharmakośa, it is one of the four rivers that flow from Lake Anavatapta and cross the southern continent of Jambudvīpa‍—the known human world or more specifically the Indian subcontinent.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­53
  • 3.­105-106
  • 3.­134-135
  • 3.­139
  • 3.­166
  • 3.­181-183
  • 7.­81
  • 8.­227
  • 8.­241
  • 8.­243
  • 8.­264
  • 8.­280
  • 8.­287-288
  • 8.­290-291
  • 8.­300-301
  • 9.­35
  • 9.­1529
  • n.­114
  • n.­145
  • n.­251
  • g.­28
  • g.­87
  • g.­134
g.­199

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­375
  • 2.­377
  • 3.­22
  • 9.­565
  • 9.­593
  • 11.­32-36
  • g.­61
  • g.­142
g.­200

Gautama

Wylie:
  • gau ta ma
Tibetan:
  • གཽ་ཏ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gautama

(1) Family name of the Buddha Śākyamuni. (2) A nāga king.

Located in 159 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­201
  • 2.­277
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320
  • 2.­322
  • 3.­35-36
  • 3.­60-61
  • 3.­74
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­100
  • 3.­105
  • 4.­74
  • 4.­81
  • 6.­3
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­18-19
  • 6.­21
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­27
  • 6.­32
  • 6.­37-38
  • 6.­41-48
  • 6.­53
  • 6.­56
  • 6.­136
  • 6.­140-145
  • 6.­147-148
  • 6.­151
  • 6.­155
  • 6.­157-161
  • 6.­167-171
  • 6.­180
  • 6.­182
  • 6.­186
  • 6.­190-192
  • 6.­196-199
  • 6.­201
  • 6.­203
  • 6.­205-206
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­213
  • 6.­215-216
  • 6.­219-220
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­229-231
  • 6.­233
  • 6.­236
  • 6.­271
  • 6.­282-284
  • 6.­286-289
  • 6.­292
  • 7.­162-163
  • 7.­166
  • 7.­170
  • 7.­172
  • 7.­174
  • 7.­176
  • 7.­178
  • 8.­18-19
  • 8.­33
  • 8.­62-64
  • 8.­83-84
  • 8.­86-92
  • 8.­113-114
  • 8.­120-121
  • 8.­123
  • 8.­134
  • 8.­192
  • 9.­21
  • 9.­42
  • 9.­1508
  • 9.­1510
  • 9.­1512-1516
  • 9.­1721-1722
  • 9.­1763
  • 9.­1820
  • 9.­2522-2524
  • 9.­2526-2528
  • 10.­68
  • 10.­71
  • 10.­82-83
  • 10.­89
  • 10.­95
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­92
  • 11.­128
  • 11.­163
  • 11.­166
  • n.­295
  • n.­481
g.­201

Gayā-Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ga yA ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ག་ཡཱ་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gayā-kāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1822-1824
  • n.­987
g.­203

Giri

Wylie:
  • ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • giri

A nāga king.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­356-357
  • 2.­360
  • 2.­364
  • 2.­375
  • 2.­379
  • n.­128
g.­205

(gods) attendant on Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs ris
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakāyika

A class of gods who inhabit the first heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 3.­22
  • 4.­19
  • 9.­1311
g.­206

(gods) attendant on the Four Great Kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal chen bzhi’i ris
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་ཆེན་བཞིའི་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • cātur­mahā­rājika

A class of gods who inhabit the lowest among the six heavens of the desire realm, the dwelling place of the Four Great Kings.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 3.­110
  • 3.­224-225
  • 4.­19
  • 8.­80
  • 8.­249
  • 8.­263
  • 8.­267
  • 8.­278
  • 8.­281-282
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­214
  • 9.­216
  • 10.­78-79
g.­209

gośīrṣacandana

Wylie:
  • tsan dan sa mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན་ས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • gośīrṣacandana

A kind of sandalwood.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­153-154
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­158
  • 2.­160-161
  • 2.­163
  • 2.­242-244
  • 2.­256
  • 2.­258-261
  • 3.­12
  • 7.­164
  • 7.­167
  • 9.­1450
g.­210

Govinda

Wylie:
  • gnag lhas skyes
Tibetan:
  • གནག་ལྷས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • govinda

A brahmin.

Located in 43 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1281-1293
  • 9.­1295-1300
  • 9.­1302-1303
  • 9.­1308
  • 9.­1311-1313
  • 9.­1325-1326
  • 9.­1330
  • 9.­1348-1349
  • 9.­1352-1353
  • 9.­1495
  • n.­882
  • n.­887
  • n.­894
  • n.­898
  • g.­105
  • g.­159
  • g.­170
  • g.­526
  • g.­582
  • g.­737
g.­213

Great Lotus

Wylie:
  • pad ma ltar gas pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་ལྟར་གས་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpadma

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­214

Great Scream

Wylie:
  • ngu ’bod chen po
Tibetan:
  • ངུ་འབོད་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāraurava

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­215

Group of Six monks

Wylie:
  • drug sde’i dge slong dag
Tibetan:
  • དྲུག་སྡེའི་དགེ་སློང་དག
Sanskrit:
  • ṣadvargikā bhikṣavaḥ

Six ill-behaved monks whose conduct often causes the Buddha’s establishment of new rules: Nanda, Upananda, Punarvasu, Chanda, Aśvaka, and Udāyin.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­27
  • 2.­29
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­89
g.­217

guḍa

Wylie:
  • bu ram
Tibetan:
  • བུ་རམ།
Sanskrit:
  • guḍa

Thickened sugarcane juice, which is the same as phāṇita.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83-85
  • 1.­91
  • 2.­134
  • 9.­1439
  • 9.­2010-2011
  • 9.­2014
  • 9.­2018-2022
  • 9.­2524-2528
  • 9.­2531
  • 10.­101
  • 10.­107
  • 10.­110
  • 10.­112
  • 10.­114
  • n.­35
  • n.­1074
  • n.­1103
g.­222

Gupta

Wylie:
  • sbas pa
Tibetan:
  • སྦས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • gupta

A perfumer, the father of Upagupta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­6
  • n.­769
g.­223

Hahava

Wylie:
  • kyi hud zer ba
Tibetan:
  • ཀྱི་ཧུད་ཟེར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • hahava

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­224

Hail

Wylie:
  • ser ba
Tibetan:
  • སེར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The daughter of the brahmin Agnidatta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
g.­225

haṃsa

Wylie:
  • ngang pa
Tibetan:
  • ངང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • haṃsa

A kind of bird, which is identified with the swan or goose.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 3.­126-127
  • 8.­280
  • 8.­283-286
  • 8.­303
  • 9.­35
  • 9.­535
  • 9.­544
  • 9.­581
  • 9.­723
  • 9.­1120
  • 9.­1222-1223
  • 9.­1225-1232
  • 9.­1234
  • 10.­124
  • n.­582
  • n.­710
  • g.­159
  • g.­511
  • g.­513
g.­226

Hari

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • hari

An epithet of Viṣṇu.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­247
g.­234

Heat

Wylie:
  • tsha ba
Tibetan:
  • ཚ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • tāpana

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1731
  • 9.­1938
g.­236

hemorrhoids

Wylie:
  • gzhang ’brum
Tibetan:
  • གཞང་འབྲུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­49
  • 2.­67
  • n.­50
g.­240

Huhuva

Wylie:
  • a chu zer ba
  • a cu zer ba
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་ཆུ་ཟེར་བ།
  • ཨ་ཅུ་ཟེར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • huhuva

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­242

hungry ghost

Wylie:
  • yi dags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance. Detailed descriptions of their realm and experience, including a list of the thirty-six classes of pretas, can be found in The Application of Mindfulness of the Sacred Dharma, Toh 287, 2.­1281– 2.1482.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 3.­227
  • 4.­22
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­111
  • 8.­282
  • 8.­287
  • 8.­289-290
  • 8.­292-294
  • 8.­297-298
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­2511
  • 9.­2516
  • 9.­2519
  • n.­545
  • n.­549
g.­243

Icchānaṅgalā

Wylie:
  • ’dod pa mthun pa
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་པ་མཐུན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • icchānaṅgalā

A village.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­2
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­162-163
  • n.­243
  • n.­314
  • n.­357
  • g.­244
g.­244

Icchānaṅgalā Forest

Wylie:
  • ’dod pa mthun pa’i nags khrod
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་པ་མཐུན་པའི་ནགས་ཁྲོད།
Sanskrit:
  • icchānaṅgalaṃ vanaṣaṇḍam

A forest near the village Icchānaṅgalā.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­2
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­11-12
  • n.­243
g.­246

Incessant

Wylie:
  • mnar med pa
Tibetan:
  • མནར་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • avīci

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 2.­71
  • 4.­18
g.­247

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra

(1) A god, also known as “Śakra.” (2) A brahmin. (3) A buddha in the past.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­247
  • 2.­306
  • 3.­262
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­276
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­302
  • 7.­161-162
  • 7.­164-165
  • 7.­167-168
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­592
  • 9.­827
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­40
  • n.­625
  • n.­787
  • n.­930
  • g.­15
  • g.­390
  • g.­432
  • g.­542
  • g.­552
  • g.­688
g.­251

Intense Heat

Wylie:
  • rab tsha ba
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཚ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratāpana

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1693
  • 9.­1731
  • 9.­2032
  • 9.­2484
  • 9.­2489
g.­263

Jetavana

Wylie:
  • rgyal bu rgyal byed kyi tshal
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བུ་རྒྱལ་བྱེད་ཀྱི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jetavana

See “Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park.”

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­53
  • 2.­91
  • 2.­267
  • 2.­269
  • 2.­293
  • 2.­298-299
  • 2.­339
  • 9.­74
  • 9.­1516-1517
  • 10.­54
g.­264

Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park

Wylie:
  • rgyal bu rgyal byed kyi tshal mgon med zas sbyin gyi kun dga’ ra ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བུ་རྒྱལ་བྱེད་ཀྱི་ཚལ་མགོན་མེད་ཟས་སྦྱིན་གྱི་ཀུན་དགའ་ར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jetavanam anāthapiṇḍadasyārāmaḥ AO

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the first Buddhist monasteries, located in a park outside Śrāvastī, the capital of the ancient kingdom of Kośala in northern India. This park was originally owned by Prince Jeta, hence the name Jetavana, meaning Jeta’s grove. The wealthy merchant Anāthapiṇḍada, wishing to offer it to the Buddha, sought to buy it from him, but the prince, not wishing to sell, said he would only do so if Anāthapiṇḍada covered the entire property with gold coins. Anāthapiṇḍada agreed, and managed to cover all of the park except the entrance, hence the name Anāthapiṇḍadasyārāmaḥ, meaning Anāthapiṇḍada’s park. The place is usually referred to in the sūtras as “Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s park,” and according to the Saṃghabhedavastu the Buddha used Prince Jeta’s name in first place because that was Prince Jeta’s own unspoken wish while Anāthapiṇḍada was offering the park. Inspired by the occasion and the Buddha’s use of his name, Prince Jeta then offered the rest of the property and had an entrance gate built. The Buddha specifically instructed those who recite the sūtras to use Prince Jeta’s name in first place to commemorate the mutual effort of both benefactors.

Anāthapiṇḍada built residences for the monks, to house them during the monsoon season, thus creating the first Buddhist monastery. It was one of the Buddha’s main residences, where he spent around nineteen rainy season retreats, and it was therefore the setting for many of the Buddha’s discourses and events. According to the travel accounts of Chinese monks, it was still in use as a Buddhist monastery in the early fifth century ᴄᴇ, but by the sixth century it had been reduced to ruins.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­45-46
  • 2.­202
  • 3.­6
  • 6.­238
  • 7.­65
  • 9.­71
  • 9.­1508
  • 10.­53
  • g.­263
g.­266

Jīvaka

Wylie:
  • ’tsho byed
Tibetan:
  • འཚོ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • jīvaka

The physician of King Bimbisāra.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­41-44
  • 9.­2020
g.­271

Kacaṅgalā

Wylie:
  • ka tsang ga la
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཙང་ག་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kacaṅgalā

A woman who was the Buddha’s mother in a former life.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­95-97
  • 8.­101
  • 8.­105
  • 8.­107-109
  • n.­486
  • n.­489
  • n.­492
g.­273

Kaineya

Wylie:
  • ke na’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཀེ་ནའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kaineya

A ṛṣi.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­3-6
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­37
  • 11.­39
  • 11.­43-46
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­52
  • 11.­54-55
  • 11.­66-68
  • 11.­71
  • 11.­112-113
  • 11.­188
  • n.­302
  • n.­305
  • n.­1123
  • n.­1150
  • g.­548
g.­278

Kalandaka­nivāpa

Wylie:
  • ka lan da ka gnas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ལན་ད་ཀ་གནས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalandaka­nivāpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A place where the Buddha often resided, within the Bamboo Park (Veṇuvana) outside Rajagṛha that had been donated to him. The name is said to have arisen when, one day, King Bimbisāra fell asleep after a romantic liaison in the Bamboo Park. While the king rested, his consort wandered off. A snake (the reincarnation of the park’s previous owner, who still resented the king’s acquisition of the park) approached with malign intentions. Through the king’s tremendous merit, a gathering of kalandaka‍—crows or other birds according to Tibetan renderings, but some Sanskrit and Pali sources suggest flying squirrels‍—miraculously appeared and began squawking. Their clamor alerted the king’s consort to the danger, who rushed back and hacked the snake to pieces, thereby saving the king’s life. King Bimbisāra then named the spot Kalandakanivāpa (“Kalandakas’ Feeding Ground”), sometimes (though not in the Vinayavastu) given as Kalandakanivāsa (“Kalandakas’ Abode”) in their honor. The story is told in the Saṃghabhedavastu (Toh 1, ch.17, Degé Kangyur vol.4, folio 77.b et seq.). For more details and other origin stories, see the 84000 Knowledge Base article Veṇuvana and Kalandakanivāpa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­40-41
  • 3.­2
  • n.­44
  • n.­935
g.­280

Kalmāṣadamya

Wylie:
  • khra bo ’dul
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲ་བོ་འདུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalmāṣadamya

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­2
g.­287

Kanthaka

Wylie:
  • bsngags ldan
Tibetan:
  • བསྔགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • kanthaka

A horse of the Bodhisattva.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­90
  • n.­213
g.­296

kārṣāpaṇa

Wylie:
  • kAr ShA pa Na
Tibetan:
  • ཀཱར་ཥཱ་པ་ཎ།
Sanskrit:
  • kārṣāpaṇa

A coin.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­101
  • 2.­149
  • 2.­153-154
  • 2.­157-158
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­260
  • 9.­171-172
  • 9.­250
  • 9.­2368-2369
  • 10.­83
  • 10.­86
  • 10.­89-91
  • 10.­93
  • 10.­103-104
  • 10.­106
  • 11.­198
  • 11.­202
  • n.­657
g.­297

Kāśi

Wylie:
  • ka shi
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཤི།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśi

A country or a city named the same.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­130-132
  • 4.­88
  • 9.­313
  • 9.­1004
  • 9.­1033
  • 9.­1352
  • 9.­1639
  • 9.­1876
  • 9.­2044
  • 9.­2408
  • 11.­189
  • n.­1124
  • g.­105
  • g.­712
g.­299

Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’drob skyong gi bu
  • ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • འདྲོབ་སྐྱོང་གི་བུ།
  • འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśyapa

(1) A ṛṣi in the past (’drob skyong gi bu). (2) A ṛṣi (’od srung). (3) A buddha in the past (’od srung). (4) Another name of Mahākāśyapa (’od srung).

Located in 87 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­346
  • 2.­349
  • 3.­173
  • 3.­267-270
  • 6.­141
  • 8.­82
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­276-278
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296-298
  • 9.­38-40
  • 9.­43-48
  • 9.­86-87
  • 9.­260
  • 9.­1398
  • 9.­1485
  • 9.­1487
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1580
  • 9.­1589
  • 9.­1595-1596
  • 9.­1768
  • 9.­1815
  • 9.­1877
  • 9.­1944
  • 9.­1959
  • 9.­2045
  • 9.­2141
  • 9.­2210-2211
  • 9.­2224
  • 9.­2391
  • 9.­2393
  • 9.­2395-2397
  • 9.­2400
  • 9.­2402-2413
  • 9.­2416
  • 9.­2418-2419
  • 9.­2422
  • 9.­2424-2425
  • 9.­2428
  • 9.­2431-2433
  • 11.­24
  • 11.­32-36
  • n.­584
  • n.­908
  • n.­958
  • n.­1000
  • g.­675
g.­308

Kimpila

Wylie:
  • kim pi la
Tibetan:
  • ཀིམ་པི་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kimpila

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­3-4
g.­309

Kimpilā

Wylie:
  • kim pi la
Tibetan:
  • ཀིམ་པི་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kimpilā

(1) A village. (2) A forest near the village of Kimpilā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­2
g.­312

Kolita

Wylie:
  • pang nas skyes
Tibetan:
  • པང་ནས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • kolita

Another name of Mahā­maudgalyāyana.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1628-1630
  • g.­358
g.­314

Kosala

Wylie:
  • ko sa la
Tibetan:
  • ཀོ་ས་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kosala

A country that the Buddha frequently visited.

Located in 70 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46-49
  • 2.­273
  • 6.­9-12
  • 6.­146-147
  • 6.­179-183
  • 6.­186-189
  • 6.­193-196
  • 6.­220-225
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­229
  • 6.­232-233
  • 6.­235-239
  • 7.­170
  • 9.­71
  • 9.­97-98
  • 9.­100
  • 9.­106
  • 9.­108-110
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­125-126
  • 9.­128-129
  • 9.­137
  • 9.­139
  • 9.­1402
  • 9.­1524
  • 9.­2509
  • n.­314
  • n.­960
  • g.­114
  • g.­285
  • g.­347
  • g.­426
  • g.­499
  • g.­604
  • g.­639
g.­317

Krauñcāna

Wylie:
  • krung krung sgra can
Tibetan:
  • ཀྲུང་ཀྲུང་སྒྲ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • krauñcāna

A village or town. See also n.­564.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­3
  • n.­563-564
g.­319

Kṛṣṇa

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛṣṇa

(1) A nāga king. (2) The son of Prince Viśvantara.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320
  • 2.­322
  • 9.­748
  • 9.­787
  • 9.­830
  • 9.­845
  • 9.­876
  • 9.­888
  • 9.­898
  • 9.­907
  • n.­785
g.­320

kṣatriya

Wylie:
  • rgyal rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣatriya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ruling caste in the traditional four-caste hierarchy of India, associated with warriors, the aristocracy, and kings.

Located in 69 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­44
  • 2.­361
  • 3.­86
  • 3.­91
  • 3.­156
  • 6.­21
  • 6.­41-46
  • 6.­48-52
  • 6.­199-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­210
  • 6.­241
  • 6.­243
  • 6.­251
  • 6.­258
  • 8.­149
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­460
  • 9.­580
  • 9.­719
  • 9.­724
  • 9.­743
  • 9.­749
  • 9.­751
  • 9.­757
  • 9.­836
  • 9.­851
  • 9.­868
  • 9.­872
  • 9.­889
  • 9.­894
  • 9.­1238
  • 9.­1281
  • 9.­1289-1290
  • 9.­1292-1293
  • 9.­1298-1300
  • 9.­1305
  • 9.­1333
  • 9.­1338
  • 9.­1344
  • 9.­1996
  • 9.­2280
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­142
  • 11.­233
  • n.­256-257
  • n.­324
  • n.­327
  • n.­497
  • g.­131
g.­322

Kubera

Wylie:
  • lus ngan
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་ངན།
Sanskrit:
  • kubera

A god.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 9.­569
  • 9.­978
  • 9.­1135
  • n.­716
  • g.­282
g.­326

Kumāravardhana

Wylie:
  • yul gzhon nu bskyed pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་གཞོན་ནུ་བསྐྱེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāravardhana

A country. See also n.­563.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2
  • n.­563
g.­328

Kuṇḍopadāna

Wylie:
  • yul chu mig can
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་ཆུ་མིག་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṇḍopadāna

A country.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­272
  • 2.­279
g.­331

Kuru

Wylie:
  • sgra ngan
  • sgra mi snyan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ངན།
  • སྒྲ་མི་སྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuru

(1) A country (sgra ngan). (2) A continent in the north (sgra mi snyan).

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 7.­48-49
  • 7.­127-128
  • 9.­181-182
  • 9.­184
  • 9.­186
  • 9.­188
  • 9.­190-191
  • 9.­193
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­258
  • 9.­1582-1583
  • 9.­1585
  • 9.­2417
  • n.­629
  • n.­1058
  • g.­302
  • g.­616
  • g.­617
g.­332

Kuśa

Wylie:
  • ku sha
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśa

A prince who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­168
  • 9.­340
  • 9.­342
  • 9.­344
  • 9.­346-347
  • 9.­350-353
  • 9.­357-358
  • 9.­361
  • 9.­364
  • 9.­368-369
  • 9.­376
  • 9.­379-381
  • 9.­384-385
  • 9.­388
  • 9.­394-396
  • 9.­400
  • 9.­402-403
  • 9.­410
  • g.­60
  • g.­612
  • g.­743
g.­339

Licchavi

Wylie:
  • lits+tsha bI
Tibetan:
  • ལིཙྪ་བཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • licchavi

A tribe or clan based in Vaiśālī.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­31
  • 3.­53
  • 3.­108
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­219
  • 3.­239-241
  • 3.­246
  • 3.­248-249
  • 3.­264-265
  • 3.­270
  • n.­177
  • n.­1183
  • g.­700
g.­340

Lightning

Wylie:
  • glog
Tibetan:
  • གློག
Sanskrit:
  • —

The wife of the son of the brahmin Agnidatta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
g.­346

Lotus

Wylie:
  • pad ma ltar gas pa
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་ལྟར་གས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • padma

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­352

Magadha

Wylie:
  • ma ga dhA
Tibetan:
  • མ་ག་དྷཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • magadha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ancient Indian kingdom that lay to the south of the Ganges River in what today is the state of Bihar. Magadha was the largest of the sixteen “great states” (mahājanapada) that flourished between the sixth and third centuries ʙᴄᴇ in northern India. During the life of the Buddha Śākyamuni, it was ruled by King Bimbisāra and later by Bimbisāra's son, Ajātaśatru. Its capital was initially Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir) but was later moved to Pāṭaliputra (modern-day Patna). Over the centuries, with the expansion of the Magadha’s might, it became the capital of the vast Mauryan empire and seat of the great King Aśoka.

This region is home to many of the most important Buddhist sites, including Bodh Gayā, where the Buddha attained awakening; Vulture Peak (Gṛdhra­kūṭa), where the Buddha bestowed many well-known Mahāyāna sūtras; and the Buddhist university of Nālandā that flourished between the fifth and twelfth centuries ᴄᴇ, among many others.

Located in 64 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­40-44
  • 2.­386-387
  • 2.­390
  • 2.­422
  • 3.­4
  • 3.­13-15
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­19-22
  • 3.­26-27
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­37-38
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­48-50
  • 3.­52-53
  • 3.­55
  • 3.­82-83
  • 3.­96-100
  • 3.­104-106
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­243
  • 7.­231-232
  • 9.­2071
  • 9.­2185
  • 11.­46-47
  • n.­114
  • n.­123
  • n.­173
  • n.­546
  • g.­17
  • g.­71
  • g.­134
  • g.­211
  • g.­430
  • g.­477
  • g.­516
  • g.­605
  • g.­713
g.­355

Mahābrahman

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahman

A class of gods who inhabit the third heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­356

Mahādeva

Wylie:
  • lha chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahādeva

A wheel-turning king who was the Buddha in a former life. It is also the name of his eldest son and the other eighty-four thousand eldest sons in his line of succession.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­33
  • 4.­36-40
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­45-47
  • 4.­63-64
  • 9.­426-430
  • 9.­433
  • 9.­436-438
  • 9.­440
  • n.­194
  • n.­197-198
  • n.­200
  • n.­203-204
  • n.­503
  • n.­671
  • n.­687
  • n.­690
  • n.­692
  • n.­697
  • g.­447
g.­357

Mahākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung chen po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­74-75
  • 9.­78-83
  • 9.­88
  • 9.­90
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­95-97
  • 9.­137
  • 9.­1578
  • 11.­29
  • n.­117
  • n.­154
  • n.­454
  • n.­600
  • n.­602
  • g.­299
g.­358

Mahā­maudgalyāyana

Wylie:
  • maud gal gyi bu chen po
Tibetan:
  • མཽད་གལ་གྱི་བུ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­maudgalyāyana

A disciple of the Buddha. He is also referred to as “Maudgalyāyana” and “Kolita.”

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­97-100
  • 2.­318-320
  • 2.­324-327
  • 2.­329-331
  • 2.­336-337
  • 2.­341
  • 7.­18-20
  • 7.­22
  • 7.­25-27
  • 7.­29
  • 7.­32
  • 8.­141-142
  • 8.­292-293
  • 9.­1531-1538
  • 9.­1540-1541
  • 9.­1543
  • 9.­1610-1611
  • 10.­47
  • 10.­49
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­56
  • 11.­57-58
  • n.­101
  • n.­496
  • n.­964
  • g.­82
  • g.­312
  • g.­386
g.­361

Mahāpraṇāda

Wylie:
  • sgra chen
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpraṇāda

A king in the past.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­139
  • 3.­154-155
  • 3.­157
  • 3.­160-162
  • 3.­166-167
  • n.­145
  • g.­51
  • g.­498
g.­363

Mahāsammata

Wylie:
  • mang pos bkur ba
Tibetan:
  • མང་པོས་བཀུར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsammata

The first king of the world.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­67
  • 8.­2-3
  • n.­250
  • n.­452
  • n.­896
g.­364

Mahāsena

Wylie:
  • sde chen
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsena

(1) A householder and lay follower of the Buddha. (2) A householder in a former life of a person with the same name.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3-9
  • 2.­11-12
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18-22
  • 2.­24
  • g.­365
g.­365

Mahāsenā

Wylie:
  • sde chen ma
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་ཆེན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsenā

(1) The wife of the householder Mahāsena and lay follower of the Buddha. (2) The wife of a householder in a former life of a person with the same name.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18
g.­366

Mahāsudarśana

Wylie:
  • legs mthong chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་མཐོང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsudarśana

A wheel-turning king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­116
  • 3.­118-119
  • 3.­127
  • 3.­131
  • 9.­267
  • 9.­275-281
  • 9.­283-288
  • 9.­300-302
  • 9.­305
  • n.­144
  • n.­370
  • n.­662-663
  • n.­667
  • n.­671
g.­370

Maheśvara

Wylie:
  • dbang phyug chen po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཕྱུག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maheśvara

A yakṣa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­243-244
  • 2.­253-254
  • 2.­256
g.­373

Maitreya

Wylie:
  • byams pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maitreya

(1) A buddha in the future. (2) A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­169
  • 3.­171-173
  • 3.­201
  • 9.­1486
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­152
  • n.­154
  • n.­157
g.­381

Māndhātṛ

Wylie:
  • nga las nu
Tibetan:
  • ང་ལས་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • māndhātṛ

A wheel-turning king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 79 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­10-11
  • 9.­13
  • 9.­16
  • 9.­143-145
  • 9.­147
  • 9.­149
  • 9.­157
  • 9.­160-161
  • 9.­163-164
  • 9.­167
  • 9.­169-170
  • 9.­172
  • 9.­174-185
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­189
  • 9.­191-192
  • 9.­194-195
  • 9.­199-200
  • 9.­204
  • 9.­206
  • 9.­208-210
  • 9.­217
  • 9.­219
  • 9.­221
  • 9.­223
  • 9.­233-237
  • 9.­240-243
  • 9.­245-249
  • 9.­255
  • 9.­257-258
  • 9.­260-262
  • 9.­269
  • 9.­273
  • n.­562
  • n.­568
  • n.­574
  • n.­620
  • n.­656-657
  • g.­164
  • g.­419
  • g.­551
  • g.­689
g.­384

Māra

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Māra, literally “death” or “maker of death,” is the name of the deva who tried to prevent the Buddha from achieving awakening, the name given to the class of beings he leads, and also an impersonal term for the destructive forces that keep beings imprisoned in saṃsāra:

(1) As a deva, Māra is said to be the principal deity in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations (paranirmitavaśavartin), the highest paradise in the desire realm. He famously attempted to prevent the Buddha’s awakening under the Bodhi tree‍—see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.1‍—and later sought many times to thwart the Buddha’s activity. In the sūtras, he often also creates obstacles to the progress of śrāvakas and bodhisattvas. (2) The devas ruled over by Māra are collectively called mārakāyika or mārakāyikadevatā, the “deities of Māra’s family or class.” In general, these māras too do not wish any being to escape from saṃsāra, but can also change their ways and even end up developing faith in the Buddha, as exemplified by Sārthavāha; see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.14 and 21.43. (3) The term māra can also be understood as personifying four defects that prevent awakening, called (i) the divine māra (devaputra­māra), which is the distraction of pleasures; (ii) the māra of Death (mṛtyumāra), which is having one’s life interrupted; (iii) the māra of the aggregates (skandhamāra), which is identifying with the five aggregates; and (iv) the māra of the afflictions (kleśamāra), which is being under the sway of the negative emotions of desire, hatred, and ignorance.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­288
  • 3.­314
  • 4.­104
  • 6.­11
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­195
  • 9.­1453
  • 9.­1473
  • 9.­1866
  • 9.­2191
  • 9.­2318-2319
  • 11.­77
  • 11.­142
  • 11.­150
  • 11.­156
  • n.­208
  • n.­1042
  • g.­385
g.­386

Marīcika World

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gyi khams ’od zer can
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གྱི་ཁམས་འོད་ཟེར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • marīcikaḥ lokadhātuḥ

A world where Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s mother was reborn.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­327
  • 2.­329
  • g.­82
g.­393

Maudgalyāyana

Wylie:
  • maud gal gyi bu
Tibetan:
  • མཽད་གལ་གྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • maudgalyāyana

(1) A disciple of the Buddha Śākyamuni. (2) A disciple of a buddha in the past. (3) A disciple of a buddha in the future.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­100
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­324
  • 2.­328
  • 2.­337
  • 2.­340-341
  • 7.­18
  • 8.­196-197
  • 8.­230
  • 8.­238
  • 8.­292
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­1386
  • 9.­1531
  • 9.­1550
  • 9.­1559
  • 9.­1565
  • 9.­1570
  • 9.­1576-1577
  • 9.­2383
  • 9.­2387
  • 11.­59
  • 11.­64-65
  • 11.­180
  • n.­117
  • n.­547
  • g.­358
g.­394

meditation

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

In this text:

Also rendered in this translation as “samādhi.”

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­204
  • 4.­5-6
  • 4.­9-10
  • 4.­67
  • 4.­96
  • 4.­100
  • 4.­104-107
  • 6.­108-109
  • 8.­24
  • 8.­225
  • 9.­1742-1743
  • 9.­1747
  • 9.­1998-1999
  • 10.­49
  • 11.­11
  • 11.­104
  • 11.­144
  • 11.­184
  • n.­221-222
  • n.­225
  • n.­462
  • n.­955
  • n.­1009
  • g.­160
  • g.­560
g.­397

Miṇḍhaka

Wylie:
  • lug
Tibetan:
  • ལུག
Sanskrit:
  • miṇḍhaka

A householder.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­58-65
  • 10.­86-87
  • 10.­91
  • 10.­93
  • 10.­99
  • 10.­101-103
  • 10.­107
  • 10.­115
  • 10.­140
  • n.­386
  • n.­575
  • n.­814
  • n.­1097-1098
  • n.­1105
  • n.­1118-1119
g.­400

monk responsible for monastic property

Wylie:
  • dge skos
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སྐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • upadhivārika

One of the monastic administrative titles. See also n.­103

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­318-319
  • 2.­347-348
  • 9.­74
  • 10.­111
  • n.­103
g.­405

Mount Musalaka

Wylie:
  • gtun ri
Tibetan:
  • གཏུན་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • musalakaḥ parvataḥ

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­307-308
g.­406

Mount Sumeru

Wylie:
  • ri rab
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • sumeru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­253
  • 2.­329
  • 2.­357
  • 7.­164
  • 9.­156
  • 9.­184
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­195
  • 9.­197
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­217
  • 9.­221
  • 9.­704
  • 9.­1538
  • 9.­1540
  • 9.­2320
  • 11.­32
  • n.­637-639
  • g.­140
  • g.­375
  • g.­401
  • g.­404
  • g.­543
g.­411

Mountain

Wylie:
  • ri bo can
  • ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ་ཅན།
  • རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

(1) The son of the brahmin Agnidatta (ri bo can). (2) The son of the nāga Apalāla (ri bo).

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
  • 7.­233-234
g.­412

Mṛgāra

Wylie:
  • ri dags
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgāra

A lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­273
  • n.­93
g.­413

Mṛgāramātā

Wylie:
  • ri dags ’dzin gyi ma
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་འཛིན་གྱི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgāramātā

Another name for Viśākhā Mṛgāramātā, a lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2506
  • n.­93
g.­416

Mūkapaṅgu

Wylie:
  • lkugs ’phye
Tibetan:
  • ལྐུགས་འཕྱེ།
Sanskrit:
  • mūkapaṅgu

(1) Another name of Prince Water Born. (2) A non-Buddhist ascetic teacher.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1151
  • 9.­1155-1165
  • 9.­1168
  • 9.­1173
  • 9.­1180
  • 9.­1182
  • 9.­1184
  • 9.­1192
  • 9.­1195-1197
  • 9.­1243
  • 9.­1245-1246
  • 9.­1248-1249
  • 9.­1251-1254
  • n.­866
  • n.­884
g.­417

muni

Wylie:
  • thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • muni

An ancient title given to ascetics, monks, hermits, and saints, namely, those who have attained the realization of truth through their own contemplation and not by divine revelation. Here also used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 78 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­65
  • 2.­335
  • 3.­289
  • 3.­315
  • 4.­26
  • 6.­151
  • 8.­27-28
  • 8.­31-32
  • 8.­39
  • 8.­42-43
  • 8.­46
  • 8.­49
  • 8.­51
  • 8.­57
  • 8.­60
  • 9.­399
  • 9.­530
  • 9.­1044
  • 9.­1396
  • 9.­1403
  • 9.­1405
  • 9.­1435
  • 9.­1438
  • 9.­1441
  • 9.­1448
  • 9.­1458
  • 9.­1464
  • 9.­1468
  • 9.­1481
  • 9.­1499
  • 9.­1529
  • 9.­1588
  • 9.­1651
  • 9.­1719
  • 9.­1722
  • 9.­1763
  • 9.­1843
  • 9.­1856
  • 9.­1862-1865
  • 9.­1897
  • 9.­1908
  • 9.­1916-1918
  • 9.­1934
  • 9.­2011
  • 9.­2075-2076
  • 9.­2091
  • 9.­2178
  • 9.­2204
  • 9.­2210
  • 9.­2217
  • 9.­2271
  • 9.­2307
  • 9.­2453
  • 9.­2456
  • 9.­2471
  • 11.­85
  • 11.­94
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­112
  • 11.­123
  • 11.­125
  • 11.­127-128
  • 11.­130-131
  • 11.­135-136
  • 11.­178
  • n.­467
g.­418

Munigāthā

Wylie:
  • thub pa’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • munigāthā

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­422

Nadī-Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • chu klung ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ཀླུང་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • nadī-kāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1822-1824
  • n.­987
g.­424

Nādikā

Wylie:
  • sgra can
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • nādikā

A village.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­206-209
  • 3.­211-213
  • 3.­218
  • 3.­226
  • n.­166
  • g.­44
  • g.­81
  • g.­130
  • g.­221
  • g.­272
  • g.­294
  • g.­300
  • g.­445
  • g.­537
  • g.­620
  • g.­681
  • g.­685
  • g.­760
  • g.­761
  • g.­762
g.­425

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 154 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­3
  • 2.­31
  • 2.­34-39
  • 2.­287
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320-323
  • 2.­356-357
  • 2.­359-360
  • 2.­364-365
  • 2.­374-375
  • 2.­379
  • 2.­383-384
  • 2.­389-391
  • 2.­399-402
  • 2.­404
  • 2.­416-417
  • 2.­420-422
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­51-52
  • 3.­109
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­142
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­32
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­225-228
  • 7.­230
  • 7.­233-234
  • 7.­239
  • 7.­249
  • 7.­251-253
  • 7.­259
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­270-271
  • 8.­71
  • 8.­194
  • 9.­47
  • 9.­205-211
  • 9.­420-421
  • 9.­535
  • 9.­544-549
  • 9.­551
  • 9.­553-554
  • 9.­557
  • 9.­560-561
  • 9.­563-564
  • 9.­566
  • 9.­584
  • 9.­1217-1219
  • 9.­1530
  • 9.­1538
  • 9.­2458
  • 9.­2466
  • 10.­49-52
  • 10.­54
  • 11.­14
  • 11.­21
  • 11.­32
  • 11.­34-36
  • n.­41
  • n.­101
  • n.­108-109
  • n.­114
  • n.­128
  • n.­153
  • n.­343
  • n.­401
  • n.­423
  • n.­429
  • n.­443
  • n.­636
  • n.­645
  • n.­878-879
  • n.­1139
  • g.­34
  • g.­56
  • g.­123
  • g.­199
  • g.­200
  • g.­203
  • g.­207
  • g.­241
  • g.­261
  • g.­319
  • g.­367
  • g.­379
  • g.­380
  • g.­411
  • g.­431
  • g.­507
  • g.­591
  • g.­635
  • g.­643
  • g.­655
  • g.­664
  • g.­684
  • g.­708
g.­430

Nālandā

Wylie:
  • na lan da
Tibetan:
  • ན་ལན་ད།
Sanskrit:
  • nālandā

A village in Magadha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­54-55
  • n.­120
  • n.­129
  • g.­525
g.­431

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A herdsman. (3) A nāga king.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­357
  • 7.­25
  • 8.­249-253
  • 8.­259-262
  • 8.­267-268
  • 8.­271
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­1530
  • 9.­1538-1539
  • 9.­2037-2038
  • 9.­2051-2053
  • n.­109
  • n.­525
  • n.­529
  • n.­539
  • n.­636
  • n.­983
  • g.­215
g.­443

never-returner

Wylie:
  • mi ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anāgāmin

A person who has attained the third of the four stages of spiritual achievement and is considered to be free from future rebirth in the realm of desire.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­303
  • 2.­309
  • 2.­315
  • 3.­210-211
  • 7.­30
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­321-323
  • 9.­329
  • 11.­37
  • n.­1151-1152
g.­447

Nimi

Wylie:
  • mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • nimi

A wheel-turning king who is a descendant of Mahādeva and a former life of the Buddha.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­48-55
  • 4.­57-61
  • 9.­443-450
  • 9.­452-456
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­465
  • n.­194
  • n.­200
  • n.­202-203
  • n.­643
  • n.­687
  • n.­692-695
  • n.­697
g.­450

Nirmāṇarati

Wylie:
  • ’phrul dga’
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲུལ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇarati

A class of gods in the fifth of the six heavens in the desire realm.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
  • 9.­1238
g.­459

outer robe

Wylie:
  • snam sbyar
Tibetan:
  • སྣམ་སྦྱར།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅghāṭī

One of the three robes of a Buddhist monastic, which is worn on occasions such as almsbegging and the community’s formal meeting.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­213-214
  • 2.­304-305
  • 3.­234
  • 6.­98
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­117
  • 8.­132-133
  • 9.­1451
  • 9.­1531
  • 9.­1533
g.­467

Pāpā

Wylie:
  • sdig can
Tibetan:
  • སྡིག་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāpā

A city.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 4.­92
  • 4.­113
  • 11.­198-201
  • 11.­205-207
  • 11.­212-214
  • n.­1125
  • n.­1179
g.­468

Para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin

Wylie:
  • gzhan ’phrul dbang byed
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་འཕྲུལ་དབང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin

A class of gods who inhabit the highest of the six heavens of the desire realm. The inhabitants enjoy objects created by others, then dispose of them themselves.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­471

Pārāyaṇa

Wylie:
  • pha rol ’gro byed
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་འགྲོ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • pārāyaṇa

A lost verse text, which was possibly a Mūla­sarvāstivādin counterpart of the Pārāyanavagga of the Suttanipāta in the Pāli canon and included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­472

Parīttābha

Wylie:
  • ’od chung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttābha

The fourth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­473

Parīttaśubha

Wylie:
  • dge chung
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttaśubha

A class of gods who inhabit the seventh heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­477

Pāṭali

Wylie:
  • dmar bu can
Tibetan:
  • དམར་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṭali

A village which eventually became Pāṭaliputra, the capital of Magadha.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­76
  • 3.­81-83
  • 3.­94-96
  • 3.­98-100
  • 3.­105-106
  • n.­120
  • n.­129
  • g.­476
g.­480

perfume chamber

Wylie:
  • dri gtsang khang
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་གཙང་ཁང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gandhakuṭī

The special private dwelling of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­289-290
g.­482

phāṇita

Wylie:
  • bu ram gyi dbu ba
Tibetan:
  • བུ་རམ་གྱི་དབུ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • phāṇita

Thickened sugarcane juice.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • n.­35
  • n.­1103
  • g.­217
g.­485

Piṇḍavaṃśa

Wylie:
  • smyug sbams
Tibetan:
  • སྨྱུག་སྦམས།
Sanskrit:
  • piṇḍavaṃśa

A wheel-turning king in the past.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­302
  • 8.­313
  • n.­559
  • n.­566
  • g.­719
g.­489

poṣadha

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • poṣadha

A meeting of the community of monks held twice a month to recite the vinaya rules and confirm that the community is properly functioning in accordance with them.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­2-3
  • 8.­149
  • 9.­952
  • 9.­955
  • 9.­1217
  • 9.­1246-1248
  • n.­1080
g.­491

Powerful

Wylie:
  • nus pa can
Tibetan:
  • ནུས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A country.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­397
  • 2.­405
g.­493

Prabhākara

Wylie:
  • ’od byed
Tibetan:
  • འོད་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhākara

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2270
  • 9.­2290-2292
  • 9.­2504
  • n.­1033
g.­499

Prasenajit

Wylie:
  • gsal rgyal
Tibetan:
  • གསལ་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • prasenajit

The king of Kosala.

Located in 71 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46-49
  • 2.­68
  • 6.­10
  • 6.­146-147
  • 6.­180-183
  • 6.­186-189
  • 6.­193-196
  • 6.­220-223
  • 6.­225
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­229
  • 6.­232-233
  • 6.­235-237
  • 9.­48
  • 9.­97-98
  • 9.­100
  • 9.­106
  • 9.­108-110
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­125-126
  • 9.­128-129
  • 9.­137
  • 9.­139
  • 9.­1402
  • 9.­1524
  • 10.­55
  • n.­321
  • n.­329
  • n.­568-570
  • n.­572
  • n.­574
  • n.­613
  • n.­616
  • n.­619
  • n.­622
  • n.­687
  • n.­690
  • n.­697
  • n.­940
  • n.­960
  • g.­60
  • g.­731
g.­502

prātimokṣa

Wylie:
  • so sor thar pa
Tibetan:
  • སོ་སོར་ཐར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prātimokṣa

The collection of monastic rules, which is supposed to be recited at the formal meeting of monastics every fortnight.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­58
  • g.­541
g.­505

primary defilement

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kleśa

The afflictions that hold one back from awakening, often listed as desire (rāga), anger (pratigha), pride (māna), ignorance (avidyā), wrong views (kudṛṣti), and indecision (vicikitsā).

Located in 60 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­24
  • 2.­275
  • 2.­315
  • 2.­343
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­204
  • 4.­105
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­120-130
  • 6.­132-133
  • 6.­173
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­106
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­118
  • 8.­268
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­36
  • 9.­39
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­594
  • 9.­1044
  • 9.­1048
  • 9.­1050-1051
  • 9.­1379
  • 9.­1581
  • 9.­1593
  • 9.­1633
  • 9.­1638
  • 9.­1661
  • 9.­1698
  • 9.­1990
  • 9.­2039
  • 9.­2055
  • 9.­2213
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2355
  • 9.­2534
  • 11.­57
  • 11.­147
  • 11.­151
  • 11.­155
  • n.­369
  • g.­338
  • g.­640
g.­508

Puṇyaprasava

Wylie:
  • bsod nams skyes
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyaprasava

One of the levels in the highest heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­511

Pūrṇa

Wylie:
  • gang po
  • gang ba
  • rdzogs ldan
Tibetan:
  • གང་པོ།
  • གང་བ།
  • རྫོགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇa

(1) A disciple of the Buddha from Sūrpāraka (gang po). (2) A disciple of the Buddha from Kuṇḍopadhāna (gang po). (3) A haṃsa (gang ba). (4) A buddha in the past (rdzogs ldan).

Located in 137 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­103-104
  • 2.­110-113
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­121-123
  • 2.­126-128
  • 2.­130-131
  • 2.­134
  • 2.­137
  • 2.­140-142
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­147-156
  • 2.­158-161
  • 2.­163-165
  • 2.­167-168
  • 2.­170-171
  • 2.­175-176
  • 2.­179-180
  • 2.­182
  • 2.­184-198
  • 2.­200
  • 2.­203-207
  • 2.­209
  • 2.­211-213
  • 2.­215-222
  • 2.­224
  • 2.­226
  • 2.­228
  • 2.­230-234
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­238
  • 2.­250-256
  • 2.­258-260
  • 2.­262-263
  • 2.­267
  • 2.­272
  • 2.­274-276
  • 2.­279
  • 2.­283-286
  • 2.­289-291
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­343-344
  • 2.­347
  • 9.­1222-1223
  • 9.­1225
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­60
  • n.­80
  • n.­84
  • n.­92
  • n.­420
  • n.­699
  • g.­92
  • g.­94
  • g.­95
  • g.­96
  • g.­145
  • g.­610
  • g.­676
g.­516

Rājagṛha

Wylie:
  • rgyal po’i khab
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོའི་ཁབ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājagṛha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ancient capital of Magadha prior to its relocation to Pāṭaliputra during the Mauryan dynasty, Rājagṛha is one of the most important locations in Buddhist history. The literature tells us that the Buddha and his saṅgha spent a considerable amount of time in residence in and around Rājagṛha‍—in nearby places, such as the Vulture Peak Mountain (Gṛdhrakūṭaparvata), a major site of the Mahāyāna sūtras, and the Bamboo Grove (Veṇuvana)‍—enjoying the patronage of King Bimbisāra and then of his son King Ajātaśatru. Rājagṛha is also remembered as the location where the first Buddhist monastic council was held after the Buddha Śākyamuni passed into parinirvāṇa. Now known as Rajgir and located in the modern Indian state of Bihar.

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­70
  • 2.­40-41
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­355-356
  • 2.­375
  • 2.­390-391
  • 2.­393
  • 2.­396
  • 2.­405
  • 2.­409-410
  • 2.­416-417
  • 2.­421
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­4
  • 3.­7-8
  • 3.­10
  • 3.­13
  • 3.­15
  • 3.­17-19
  • 3.­22-23
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­28
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­53
  • 6.­265
  • 6.­275
  • 9.­1621
  • 9.­1727
  • 9.­1859
  • 9.­1862-1863
  • 9.­1905
  • 10.­54
  • n.­314
  • n.­343
  • n.­450
  • n.­935
  • g.­71
  • g.­134
  • g.­278
g.­521

Rāṣṭrapāla

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor skyong
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • rāṣṭrapāla

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 74 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­50
  • 7.­52
  • 7.­55-75
  • 7.­77-80
  • 7.­82-83
  • 7.­85-86
  • 7.­92-96
  • 7.­98-100
  • 7.­102-112
  • 7.­114
  • 7.­116-119
  • 7.­121-123
  • 7.­125-127
  • 7.­129-131
  • 7.­146
  • 9.­1875-1876
  • 9.­1902-1904
  • n.­366
  • n.­370
  • n.­983
  • n.­992
g.­524

Ratnaśikhin

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར།
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśikhin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­178
  • 3.­183
  • 3.­185
  • 3.­187-201
  • 9.­1412
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­158
  • n.­907-908
  • g.­153
  • g.­715
g.­531

Reviving

Wylie:
  • yang sos
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་སོས།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjīva

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­536

Ṛṣi Gargā Pond

Wylie:
  • drang srong gar ga’i rdzing
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་གར་གའི་རྫིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gargā puṣkariṇī

A pond in Campā

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­32
  • 2.­38-39
g.­539

Ṛṣivadana

Wylie:
  • drang srong smra ba
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་སྨྲ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣivadana

A park near Vārāṇasī where the Buddha gave the first sermon.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 3.­267
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2350
  • 9.­2408
g.­541

rule of training

Wylie:
  • bslab pa’i gzhi
Tibetan:
  • བསླབ་པའི་གཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • sikṣāpada

The prātimokṣa rules for monks and nuns, ten rules for novices, six rules for female probationers, and five rules for laypeople.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­85
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­322
  • 2.­358
  • 2.­386
  • 6.­58
  • 7.­220
  • 7.­231-234
  • 7.­248
  • 8.­82
  • 8.­246
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­298
  • 9.­40
  • 9.­328-329
  • 10.­98
  • 10.­105
  • 11.­32-33
  • 11.­35-36
  • n.­423
  • n.­496
  • n.­1107
g.­545

saffron

Wylie:
  • ngur smrig
Tibetan:
  • ངུར་སྨྲིག
Sanskrit:
  • kāṣāya

Located in 42 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­201
  • 2.­215
  • 4.­88
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­57
  • 7.­50
  • 7.­100
  • 7.­104-108
  • 7.­110
  • 7.­112-113
  • 7.­117
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­242
  • 8.­248
  • 8.­260
  • 9.­1039-1041
  • 9.­1046
  • 9.­1081
  • 9.­1083
  • 9.­1258
  • 9.­1260
  • 9.­1322
  • 9.­1333
  • 9.­1338-1344
  • 9.­2252
  • 11.­49-50
  • 11.­82
g.­549

Śailagāthā

Wylie:
  • ri gnas pa’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • རི་གནས་པའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śailagāthā

A verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins and preserved in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­198
  • n.­73
  • n.­1126
g.­551

Sāketā

Wylie:
  • gnas bcas
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བཅས།
Sanskrit:
  • sāketā

A country mentioned in the story of the physician Ātreya and the story of King Māndhātṛ.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­71
  • 9.­9
  • 9.­16
  • 9.­149
  • n.­568-569
g.­552

Śakra

Wylie:
  • brgya byin
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱ་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The lord of the gods in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three (trāyastriṃśa). Alternatively known as Indra, the deity that is called “lord of the gods” dwells on the summit of Mount Sumeru and wields the thunderbolt. The Tibetan translation brgya byin (meaning “one hundred sacrifices”) is based on an etymology that śakra is an abbreviation of śata-kratu, one who has performed a hundred sacrifices. Each world with a central Sumeru has a Śakra. Also known by other names such as Kauśika, Devendra, and Śacipati.

Located in 105 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 3.­146-148
  • 3.­150-151
  • 3.­157-158
  • 3.­160
  • 3.­183
  • 3.­185-187
  • 3.­291
  • 3.­317
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­51-54
  • 4.­58-60
  • 4.­88-89
  • 8.­142
  • 8.­266-267
  • 9.­84-85
  • 9.­88
  • 9.­90
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­95
  • 9.­144
  • 9.­174
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­180
  • 9.­191
  • 9.­195
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­235-237
  • 9.­239-240
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­258-260
  • 9.­337-339
  • 9.­347
  • 9.­392-393
  • 9.­396
  • 9.­444
  • 9.­446-449
  • 9.­453-454
  • 9.­456
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­811
  • 9.­813
  • 9.­824-826
  • 9.­829
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­895
  • 9.­902-903
  • 9.­905-907
  • 9.­930-931
  • 9.­937
  • 9.­1099
  • 9.­1129
  • 9.­1135
  • 9.­1203-1204
  • 9.­1523
  • 9.­1852
  • 9.­2190
  • 10.­75
  • 11.­5
  • n.­625
  • n.­629
  • n.­632
  • n.­643
  • n.­654
  • n.­675
  • n.­694
  • n.­716
  • n.­793
  • n.­803
  • g.­247
  • g.­303
  • g.­390
g.­554

Śākya

Wylie:
  • shAkya
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Name of the ancient tribe in which the Buddha was born as a prince; their kingdom was based to the east of Kośala, in the foothills near the present-day border of India and Nepal, with Kapilavastu as its capital.

Located in 65 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­62
  • 2.­39
  • 2.­201
  • 3.­30
  • 5.­3
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­18-24
  • 6.­32
  • 6.­38
  • 6.­141
  • 6.­242
  • 6.­276
  • 7.­175
  • 7.­183
  • 7.­198
  • 8.­39
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­92
  • 9.­78
  • 9.­1390
  • 9.­1605
  • 9.­1619
  • 9.­1697
  • 9.­1735
  • 9.­1774
  • 9.­1968
  • 9.­1987
  • 9.­1991
  • 9.­2016
  • 9.­2047
  • 9.­2049
  • 9.­2070
  • 9.­2129-2130
  • 9.­2134-2135
  • 9.­2145
  • 9.­2164
  • 9.­2217
  • 9.­2257-2258
  • 9.­2264
  • 9.­2266
  • 9.­2317
  • 9.­2441
  • 9.­2444
  • 9.­2490
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­84
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­117
  • 11.­220
  • n.­250
  • n.­1065
  • g.­245
  • g.­292
g.­555

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni

(1) The present Buddha. (2) A buddha in the past. (3) A buddha in the future.

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­173
  • 8.­110
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­1386
  • 9.­1388
  • 9.­1392
  • 9.­1394
  • 9.­1408
  • 9.­1421
  • 9.­1443
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­2106
  • 9.­2223
  • 11.­35
  • n.­157
  • n.­916
  • g.­200
  • g.­359
  • g.­384
  • g.­393
  • g.­417
  • g.­515
  • g.­554
  • g.­626
  • g.­631
g.­556

Sālā

Wylie:
  • sa la
Tibetan:
  • ས་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sālā

A village.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­71
  • 4.­73-75
  • 4.­78
  • 9.­2345
  • 9.­2351
  • n.­208
  • n.­1042
g.­557

Sālabalā

Wylie:
  • sa la stobs
Tibetan:
  • ས་ལ་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • sālabalā

A village. See also n.­567.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­6
  • n.­567
g.­558

Sālibalā

Wylie:
  • sa la’i stobs
Tibetan:
  • ས་ལའི་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • sālibalā

A village.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­7
  • n.­567
g.­560

samādhi

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

In this text:

Also rendered in this translation as “meditation.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1576
  • n.­955
  • n.­1009
  • g.­394
g.­567

saṃsāra’s ever-revolving five cycles

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba’i ’khor lo cha lnga pa g.yo ba dang mi g.yo ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བའི་འཁོར་ལོ་ཆ་ལྔ་པ་གཡོ་བ་དང་མི་གཡོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The five realms of gods, humans, animals, spirits, and hell-denizens. “Ever-revolving” is an adjective applied to saṃsāra with its constant fluctuations.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­306
g.­568

Saṃyuktāgama

Wylie:
  • yang dag par ldan pa’i lung
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་ལྡན་པའི་ལུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃyuktāgama

The Connected Discourses, one of the four divisions of the Sūtrapiṭaka.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • n.­186
  • n.­240-241
  • n.­344
  • n.­355
  • n.­361
  • n.­481
  • g.­648
  • g.­649
g.­569

Śaṅkara

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • śaṅkara

An epithet of Śiva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­247
g.­570

Śaṅkha

Wylie:
  • dung
Tibetan:
  • དུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śaṅkha

(1) A king in the future. (2) A ṛṣi.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­168-172
  • 3.­195
  • 9.­1561
  • 9.­1565
  • 9.­1567-1570
  • n.­152-153
  • g.­111
  • g.­733
g.­575

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A disciple of a buddha in the past. (3) A disciple of a Buddha in the future.

Located in 50 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­97
  • 1.­99
  • 8.­141-142
  • 8.­196-197
  • 8.­230
  • 8.­238
  • 8.­259-260
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­1386
  • 9.­1531-1533
  • 9.­1535-1538
  • 9.­1540-1541
  • 9.­1543
  • 9.­1550
  • 9.­1559
  • 9.­1565
  • 9.­1570
  • 9.­1576-1577
  • 9.­1597
  • 9.­1608-1610
  • 9.­2383
  • 9.­2387
  • 10.­47
  • 10.­49-50
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­56
  • 11.­57-59
  • 11.­64-65
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­180
  • n.­117
  • n.­496
  • g.­687
g.­576

śarkarā

Wylie:
  • sha kha ra
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་ཁ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • śarkarā

Candied sugar.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 2.­133-134
  • 10.­101
  • n.­1103
g.­583

Satyadṛś

Wylie:
  • bden pa mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • བདེན་པ་མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • satyadṛś

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­587

Scream

Wylie:
  • ngu ’bod
Tibetan:
  • ངུ་འབོད།
Sanskrit:
  • raurava

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1731
g.­588

self-awakened one

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyekabuddha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 87 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 2.­315
  • 3.­123
  • 3.­125
  • 3.­130-131
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­296
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­322
  • 4.­22
  • 6.­280-283
  • 7.­151-152
  • 7.­159
  • 8.­9-13
  • 8.­15-17
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­120-123
  • 9.­302
  • 9.­406-410
  • 9.­920
  • 9.­922-923
  • 9.­926-928
  • 9.­930-933
  • 9.­937
  • 9.­1576
  • 9.­1582
  • 9.­1598
  • 9.­1614
  • 9.­1728
  • 9.­1773
  • 9.­1917
  • 9.­1924
  • 9.­1934
  • 9.­2010
  • 9.­2042
  • 9.­2055
  • 9.­2090
  • 9.­2102
  • 9.­2120
  • 9.­2347-2351
  • 9.­2377
  • 9.­2382
  • 9.­2470
  • 9.­2587-2589
  • 9.­2592
  • 9.­2595
  • 10.­122
  • 10.­124
  • 10.­131
  • 10.­140
  • n.­608
  • n.­667
  • n.­1067
  • g.­139
  • g.­611
  • g.­642
  • g.­646
g.­590

sense sphere

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

These can be listed as twelve or as six sense sources (sometimes also called sense fields, bases of cognition, or simply āyatanas).

In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena.

In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­344
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­214-215
  • 3.­265
  • 8.­246
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­403
g.­595

Sikatin

Wylie:
  • bye ma can
Tibetan:
  • བྱེ་མ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sikatin

A village.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­14
  • n.­228
g.­599

Śiva

Wylie:
  • zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śiva

Major deity in the pantheon of the classical Indian religious traditions.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 9.­569
  • 9.­978
  • 9.­1135
  • n.­716
  • n.­830
  • g.­253
  • g.­569
g.­603

śramaṇa

Wylie:
  • dge sbyong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śramaṇa

A term used broadly to denote a spiritual practitioner.

Located in 168 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­62
  • 2.­53-54
  • 2.­201
  • 2.­234
  • 2.­296
  • 3.­60-61
  • 3.­74
  • 3.­86
  • 3.­91
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­227
  • 4.­74-75
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­111
  • 6.­3
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­18
  • 6.­76-96
  • 6.­136-139
  • 6.­155
  • 6.­180
  • 6.­186
  • 6.­192
  • 6.­197
  • 6.­220-221
  • 6.­223-225
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­233
  • 6.­242
  • 6.­271
  • 6.­282
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­24
  • 7.­71
  • 7.­145
  • 7.­162-163
  • 7.­166
  • 7.­170
  • 7.­172
  • 7.­174
  • 7.­176
  • 7.­178
  • 8.­18-19
  • 8.­62-64
  • 8.­83-84
  • 8.­92
  • 8.­95
  • 8.­113-114
  • 8.­120-121
  • 8.­123
  • 8.­132-134
  • 8.­192
  • 8.­235-236
  • 8.­246
  • 8.­277
  • 8.­282
  • 8.­297
  • 9.­78
  • 9.­114-115
  • 9.­301
  • 9.­515
  • 9.­522
  • 9.­535
  • 9.­540
  • 9.­568
  • 9.­578
  • 9.­757
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­839
  • 9.­894
  • 9.­910
  • 9.­1508
  • 9.­1510
  • 9.­1512-1516
  • 9.­1598
  • 9.­1625
  • 9.­1707-1708
  • 9.­1729
  • 9.­1758-1759
  • 9.­1772
  • 9.­1803-1804
  • 9.­1913
  • 9.­1990
  • 9.­2091
  • 9.­2122
  • 9.­2198
  • 9.­2321
  • 9.­2385-2386
  • 9.­2396-2397
  • 9.­2472
  • 9.­2480
  • 9.­2522-2523
  • 9.­2527-2528
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­68
  • 10.­71
  • 10.­82-83
  • 10.­89
  • 10.­95
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­139
  • 11.­220
  • n.­34
  • n.­267
  • n.­323
  • n.­481
  • n.­667
  • n.­806
  • n.­1162
g.­604

Śrāvastī

Wylie:
  • mnyan yod
Tibetan:
  • མཉན་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvastī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

During the life of the Buddha, Śrāvastī was the capital city of the powerful kingdom of Kośala, ruled by King Prasenajit, who became a follower and patron of the Buddha. It was also the hometown of Anāthapiṇḍada, the wealthy patron who first invited the Buddha there, and then offered him a park known as Jetavana, Prince Jeta’s Grove, which became one of the first Buddhist monasteries. The Buddha is said to have spent about twenty-five rainy seasons with his disciples in Śrāvastī, thus it is named as the setting of numerous events and teachings. It is located in present-day Uttar Pradesh in northern India.

Located in 61 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­23
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­60
  • 1.­82-83
  • 1.­90-91
  • 1.­96
  • 2.­26-27
  • 2.­44-46
  • 2.­83
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­202
  • 2.­207
  • 2.­232
  • 2.­263-264
  • 3.­6-7
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­17
  • 6.­238-239
  • 6.­244
  • 6.­248-249
  • 7.­65
  • 7.­70
  • 7.­169
  • 9.­17-18
  • 9.­71
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­1508
  • 9.­1526-1527
  • 9.­1930
  • 9.­2506-2507
  • 10.­2-3
  • 10.­27
  • 10.­33
  • 10.­36
  • 10.­39
  • 10.­41
  • 10.­44
  • 10.­46
  • 10.­49
  • 10.­53-55
  • 10.­57
  • 10.­68
  • 11.­217
  • n.­561
g.­605

Śreṇya Bimbisāra

Wylie:
  • bzo sbyangs gzugs can snying po
Tibetan:
  • བཟོ་སྦྱངས་གཟུགས་ཅན་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śreṇya bimbisāra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The king of Magadha and a great patron of the Buddha. His birth coincided with the Buddha’s, and his father, King Mahāpadma, named him “Essence of Gold” after mistakenly attributing the brilliant light that marked the Buddha’s birth to the birth of his son by Queen Bimbī (“Goldie”). Accounts of Bimbisāra’s youth and life can be found in The Chapter on Going Forth (Toh 1-1, Pravrajyāvastu).

King Śreṇya Bimbisāra first met with the Buddha early on, when the latter was the wandering mendicant known as Gautama. Impressed by his conduct, Bimbisāra offered to take Gautama into his court, but Gautama refused, and Bimbisāra wished him success in his quest for awakening and asked him to visit his palace after he had achieved his goal. One account of this episode can be found in the sixteenth chapter of The Play in Full (Toh 95, Lalitavistara). There are other accounts where the two meet earlier on in childhood; several episodes can be found, for example, in The Hundred Deeds (Toh 340, Karmaśataka). Later, after the Buddha’s awakening, Bimbisāra became one of his most famous patrons and donated to the saṅgha the Bamboo Grove, Veṇuvana, at the outskirts of the capital of Magadha, Rājagṛha, where he built residences for the monks. Bimbisāra was imprisoned and killed by his own son, the prince Ajātaśatru, who, influenced by Devadatta, sought to usurp his father’s throne.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­41-44
  • 2.­361
  • 2.­363-364
  • 2.­376
  • 9.­1859-1860
  • 9.­2019
  • 9.­2021
  • 10.­55
  • 11.­46-47
  • n.­123
  • n.­173
  • g.­17
  • g.­266
  • g.­697
g.­608

Śroṇāparāntaka

Wylie:
  • gro bzhin skyes gnas pa’i yul gyi mtha’
  • gro bzhin skyes gnas pa’i mtha’
Tibetan:
  • གྲོ་བཞིན་སྐྱེས་གནས་པའི་ཡུལ་གྱི་མཐའ།
  • གྲོ་བཞིན་སྐྱེས་གནས་པའི་མཐའ།
Sanskrit:
  • śroṇāparāntaka

A country.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­221-230
  • 2.­232-233
  • 2.­253
  • n.­80
g.­610

Stavakarṇin

Wylie:
  • rgya skegs kyi rna rgyan can
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་སྐེགས་ཀྱི་རྣ་རྒྱན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • stavakarṇin

Another name of Bhavatrāta, a half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­109
  • 2.­283
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­317
g.­614

Sthaviragāthā

Wylie:
  • gnas brtan pa’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བརྟན་པའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthaviragāthā

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­615

Sthavirīgāthā

Wylie:
  • gnas brtan ma’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བརྟན་མའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthavirīgāthā

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­618

sthūlātyaya offense

Wylie:
  • ltung ba sbom po
Tibetan:
  • ལྟུང་བ་སྦོམ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthūlātyaya

The third gravest type of offense for a monk or nun, which requires confession in the presence of another monk or nun. Attempting one of the two gravest offenses, pārājika and saṅghāvaśeṣa, constitutes this category. For instance, if a monk attempts to kill a person and does not succeed, his offense is categorised as sthūlātyaya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­15
g.­621

Śubhakṛtsna

Wylie:
  • dge rgyas
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • śubhakṛtsna

A class of gods who inhabit the ninth heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­622

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • shin du mthong ba
  • shin tu mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་དུ་མཐོང་བ།
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

A class of gods who inhabit the fourth of the “pure abodes.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­625

Sudatta

Wylie:
  • rab sbyin
Tibetan:
  • རབ་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • sudatta

Another name of Anāthapiṇḍada.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­273
g.­629

śūdra

Wylie:
  • dmangs rigs
Tibetan:
  • དམངས་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • śūdra

One of the four castes, that of commoners or servants.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­212
  • 9.­460
  • 9.­836
  • 9.­910
  • 11.­50
  • g.­131
g.­630

Sudṛśa

Wylie:
  • gya nom snang ba
Tibetan:
  • གྱ་ནོམ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudṛśa

A class of gods who inhabit the third of the “pure abodes.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­631

sugata

Wylie:
  • bde bar gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the standard epithets of the buddhas. A recurrent explanation offers three different meanings for su- that are meant to show the special qualities of “accomplishment of one’s own purpose” (svārthasampad) for a complete buddha. Thus, the Sugata is “well” gone, as in the expression su-rūpa (“having a good form”); he is gone “in a way that he shall not come back,” as in the expression su-naṣṭa-jvara (“a fever that has utterly gone”); and he has gone “without any remainder” as in the expression su-pūrṇa-ghaṭa (“a pot that is completely full”). According to Buddhaghoṣa, the term means that the way the Buddha went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su) and where he went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su).

In this text:

Here it is used as an epithet for the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­74
  • 2.­346
  • 3.­78
  • 3.­140
  • 3.­242
  • 3.­251
  • 3.­262
  • 3.­267
  • 4.­66
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­57
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­218
  • 7.­261
  • 7.­264
  • 8.­73
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­210
  • 8.­232
  • 8.­301
  • 9.­46
  • 9.­110
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­270
  • 9.­1642
  • 9.­1897
  • 9.­2158
  • 9.­2179
  • 9.­2504
  • n.­1067
g.­635

Sundara

Wylie:
  • rab mdzes
Tibetan:
  • རབ་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sundara

A nāga king.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­399-400
  • 2.­402
  • 2.­404
  • 2.­416-417
  • 2.­420
g.­639

Sunrise

Wylie:
  • ’char ka
Tibetan:
  • འཆར་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village or town in Kosala. See also n.­317.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­179-180
  • 6.­189
  • n.­314
  • n.­316
  • g.­75
  • g.­285
  • g.­638
g.­640

supernormal knowledge

Wylie:
  • mngon par shes pa
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་ཤེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhi­jñā

The six modes of supernormal cognition or ability, namely, clairvoyance, clairaudience, knowledge of the minds of others, remembrance of past lives, the ability to perform miracles, and the knowledge of the destruction of all mental defilements. The first five are considered mundane or worldly and can be attained to some extent by non-Buddhist yogis as well as Buddhist arhats and bodhisattvas. The sixth is considered to be supramundane and can be attained only by Buddhist yogis.

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­23-24
  • 2.­215
  • 2.­277-278
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­120-130
  • 6.­132
  • 8.­60
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­242
  • 8.­248
  • 9.­152
  • 9.­204
  • 9.­413
  • 9.­1100
  • 9.­1133
  • 9.­1195-1197
  • 9.­1243
  • 9.­1253
  • 9.­1785
  • 9.­1941
  • 9.­2023
  • 9.­2074
  • 9.­2107
  • 9.­2165
  • 9.­2214
  • 9.­2267
  • 9.­2365
  • 9.­2476
  • 11.­59
  • 11.­64
  • 11.­104
  • 11.­159
  • n.­293
  • n.­626
  • g.­671
g.­644

Śūrasena

Wylie:
  • dpa’ sde
Tibetan:
  • དཔའ་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • śūrasena

A country.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­2
  • 8.­18
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­119-120
  • g.­9
  • g.­421
g.­645

Sūrpāraka

Wylie:
  • slo ma lta bu
Tibetan:
  • སློ་མ་ལྟ་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrpāraka

A city.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­168
  • 2.­193-195
  • 2.­258
  • 2.­269-270
  • 2.­274
  • 2.­280
  • 2.­282-283
  • 2.­292
  • 2.­312-313
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320-321
  • g.­92
  • g.­94
  • g.­95
  • g.­96
  • g.­145
  • g.­511
  • g.­610
  • g.­676
g.­649

Sūtra of the Parable of the Axe

Wylie:
  • ste’u lta bu’i mdo
Tibetan:
  • སྟེའུ་ལྟ་བུའི་མདོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A sūtra in the section of the aggregates in the Saṃyuktāgama, which corresponds to SĀc 263, SN 22.101, etc.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­2
g.­662

tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A frequently used synonym for buddha. According to different explanations, it can be read as tathā-gata, literally meaning “one who has thus gone,” or as tathā-āgata, “one who has thus come.” Gata, though literally meaning “gone,” is a past passive participle used to describe a state or condition of existence. Tatha­(tā), often rendered as “suchness” or “thusness,” is the quality or condition of things as they really are, which cannot be conveyed in conceptual, dualistic terms. Therefore, this epithet is interpreted in different ways, but in general it implies one who has departed in the wake of the buddhas of the past, or one who has manifested the supreme awakening dependent on the reality that does not abide in the two extremes of existence and quiescence. It is also often used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 107 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­67
  • 2.­211
  • 2.­214
  • 2.­256
  • 2.­305
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­346
  • 3.­115
  • 3.­197
  • 3.­200-201
  • 3.­214
  • 3.­245
  • 3.­250-255
  • 3.­267
  • 4.­9-11
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­34-35
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­97
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­104-107
  • 4.­113
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­15
  • 6.­57
  • 6.­202-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­290
  • 6.­293
  • 7.­31
  • 7.­54
  • 7.­113
  • 7.­117
  • 7.­122
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­130
  • 7.­150
  • 7.­164
  • 7.­271
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­117
  • 8.­139
  • 8.­143-144
  • 8.­146
  • 8.­185
  • 8.­188
  • 8.­211
  • 8.­213
  • 8.­231-232
  • 8.­238
  • 9.­64
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­1503
  • 9.­1576
  • 9.­1592
  • 9.­1646
  • 9.­1659
  • 9.­2308
  • 9.­2328
  • 9.­2337
  • 9.­2339
  • 9.­2346
  • 9.­2353
  • 9.­2363
  • 9.­2367
  • 9.­2382
  • 9.­2384
  • 9.­2389
  • 9.­2437
  • 9.­2440
  • 9.­2442
  • 9.­2444
  • 9.­2446
  • 9.­2451
  • 9.­2503
  • 10.­65-66
  • 11.­35
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­77
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­166
  • n.­524
  • n.­934
  • n.­938
g.­664

the nāga of Campā

Wylie:
  • yul tsam pa’i klu
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་ཙམ་པའི་ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • cāmpeyo nāgaḥ

A nāga.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­33
  • 2.­37-39
g.­665

thirty-seven aspects of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi phyogs sum bcu rtsa bdun gyi chos
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཕྱོགས་སུམ་བཅུ་རྩ་བདུན་གྱི་ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • sapta­triṃśad­bodhi­pakṣa­dharmāḥ

Thirty-seven kinds of practices to be accomplished by those who seek awakening.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­123
  • 8.­15
  • n.­188
  • g.­173
  • g.­179
  • g.­180
  • g.­183
  • g.­184
  • g.­189
  • g.­592
g.­667

Thirty-Three Gods

Wylie:
  • sum cu rtsa gsum pa’i lha rnams
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ་པའི་ལྷ་རྣམས།
Sanskrit:
  • devās trayastriṃśāḥ

A class of gods who inhabit the heaven of the desire realm just above the heaven of the Four Great Kings atop Sumeru.

Located in 64 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­99
  • 3.­111
  • 3.­240
  • 3.­261
  • 3.­264
  • 3.­269-270
  • 4.­19
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­53
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­88-89
  • 6.­224-225
  • 7.­230
  • 8.­194
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­192-193
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­216
  • 9.­218
  • 9.­220
  • 9.­222
  • 9.­224-225
  • 9.­232-234
  • 9.­237
  • 9.­245-246
  • 9.­249
  • 9.­258-260
  • 9.­269
  • 9.­273
  • 9.­444
  • 9.­446
  • 9.­448
  • 9.­453
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­811
  • 9.­826
  • 9.­1584
  • 9.­1995
  • 9.­2276
  • 9.­2312
  • 9.­2537
  • n.­632
  • n.­636
  • n.­642
  • n.­645
  • n.­655
  • g.­474
  • g.­566
  • g.­624
  • g.­628
g.­671

threefold knowledge

Wylie:
  • rig pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • tisro vidyāḥ

Three supernormal knowledges: the knowledge of divine sight, the knowledge of former lives, and the knowledge of the extinction of impurity.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­236
  • 9.­1796
  • 9.­1994
  • 9.­2002
  • 9.­2321
g.­675

Toyikā

Wylie:
  • chu mangs
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་མངས།
Sanskrit:
  • toyikā

The place where the Buddha showed the skeleton of the Buddha Kāśyapa to monks.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­41-42
  • 9.­70
  • n.­561
  • n.­584
g.­676

Trapukarṇin

Wylie:
  • zha nye’i rna rgyan can
Tibetan:
  • ཞ་ཉེའི་རྣ་རྒྱན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • trapukarṇin

Another name of Bhavanandin, a half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­109
  • 2.­283
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­317
g.­677

Triśaṅku

Wylie:
  • phur bu gsum pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕུར་བུ་གསུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • triśaṅku

A king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­413
  • 9.­416
  • 9.­419
  • 9.­423
  • n.­814
g.­678

Tuṣita

Wylie:
  • dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • tuṣita

A class of gods in the desire realm among whom the Bodhisattva is supposed to be born in his penultimate life, before that in which he attains full awakening.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
  • 9.­83
  • 9.­87
  • 9.­96-97
  • 9.­1238
  • 9.­2216
g.­679

Udāna

Wylie:
  • ched du brjod pa
Tibetan:
  • ཆེད་དུ་བརྗོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • udāna

A verse text possibly included in the lost Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­682

Upagupta

Wylie:
  • nye sbas
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་སྦས།
Sanskrit:
  • upagupta

A monk who was predicted by the Buddha to appear in the future.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­6-7
  • 8.­17
  • n.­456
  • g.­222
g.­683

Upālin

Wylie:
  • nye ba ’khor
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་བ་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • upālin

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2227-2228
  • 9.­2268-2269
  • 9.­2504
  • 10.­105-106
  • 10.­110-111
  • n.­1033
  • g.­196
g.­684

Upananda

Wylie:
  • nye dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upananda

A nāga king.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­357
  • 7.­25
  • 9.­1530
  • 9.­1538-1539
  • n.­109
  • n.­636
  • g.­215
g.­688

Upendra

Wylie:
  • nye dbang po
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upendra

The younger brother of Indra.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­306
  • n.­40
g.­689

Upoṣadha

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong ’phags
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • upoṣadha

A king, the father of King Māndhātṛ.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2-3
  • 9.­9-12
  • 9.­142-143
  • 9.­145-146
  • n.­562-563
g.­692

Uruvilvā-Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • lteng rgyas ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ལྟེང་རྒྱས་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • uruvilvā-kāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1814
  • 9.­1822-1824
  • n.­987
g.­698

Vairambhya

Wylie:
  • yul dgra mtha’
  • dgra mtha’
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་དགྲ་མཐའ།
  • དགྲ་མཐའ།
Sanskrit:
  • vairambhya

A country.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­112
  • 8.­119-120
  • 8.­122
  • 8.­132-135
  • 8.­139
  • 8.­142
  • 8.­189
  • 8.­193
  • 8.­196
  • 8.­205
  • 8.­223
  • 8.­230
  • 8.­238
  • 9.­2383
  • 9.­2387
  • 9.­2493
  • n.­496
  • n.­512
  • n.­521
  • n.­1053
  • g.­421
g.­700

Vaiśālī

Wylie:
  • yangs pa can
Tibetan:
  • ཡངས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśālī

The city of the Licchavis.

Located in 61 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­71
  • 3.­28-32
  • 3.­35-36
  • 3.­38
  • 3.­41-43
  • 3.­45-46
  • 3.­53
  • 3.­108
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­218-219
  • 3.­223
  • 3.­229-231
  • 3.­239-241
  • 3.­246
  • 3.­248-249
  • 3.­264-265
  • 3.­272
  • 3.­298
  • 4.­3-4
  • 6.­259
  • 9.­152
  • 9.­2153
  • 9.­2538-2541
  • 9.­2565
  • 9.­2567
  • 9.­2574
  • 9.­2597-2599
  • 10.­23-24
  • n.­114
  • n.­126
  • n.­170
  • n.­177
  • g.­68
  • g.­335
  • g.­339
  • g.­674
g.­701

Vaiśravaṇa

Wylie:
  • rnam thos kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐོས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśravaṇa

One of the Four Great Kings and god of wealth.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92
  • 3.­22
  • 9.­610
  • 9.­613
  • 9.­918
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­15-16
  • 11.­22-23
  • 11.­27
  • 11.­36
  • n.­1140
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­702

vaiśya

Wylie:
  • rje’u rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྗེའུ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśya

One of the four castes, that of merchants.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­211
  • 9.­460
  • 9.­836
  • 11.­50
  • g.­131
g.­705

Vakkalin

Wylie:
  • shing gos can
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་གོས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • vakkalin

A ṛṣi who became the Buddha’s disciple. See also n.­100.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­308-309
  • 2.­311
  • n.­100
g.­708

Valguka

Wylie:
  • grog mkhar
Tibetan:
  • གྲོག་མཁར།
Sanskrit:
  • valguka

A nāga king.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­356-357
  • 2.­360
  • 2.­364
  • 2.­375
  • 2.­379
  • n.­128
g.­712

Vārāṇasī

Wylie:
  • bA rA Na sI
Tibetan:
  • བཱ་རཱ་ཎ་སཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • vārāṇasī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Also known as Benares, one of the oldest cities of northeast India on the banks of the Ganges, in modern-day Uttar Pradesh. It was once the capital of the ancient kingdom of Kāśi, and in the Buddha’s time it had been absorbed into the kingdom of Kośala. It was an important religious center, as well as a major city, even during the time of the Buddha. The name may derive from being where the Varuna and Assi rivers flow into the Ganges. It was on the outskirts of Vārāṇasī that the Buddha first taught the Dharma, in the location known as Deer Park (Mṛgadāva). For numerous episodes set in Vārāṇasī, including its kings, see The Hundred Deeds, Toh 340.

Located in 65 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­346
  • 3.­170
  • 3.­267-268
  • 7.­154-155
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­414
  • 9.­422
  • 9.­916-918
  • 9.­920
  • 9.­933
  • 9.­968
  • 9.­1000
  • 9.­1016
  • 9.­1106
  • 9.­1134
  • 9.­1156
  • 9.­1159
  • 9.­1162
  • 9.­1185
  • 9.­1195
  • 9.­1208
  • 9.­1224
  • 9.­1226-1227
  • 9.­1232
  • 9.­1352
  • 9.­1561-1562
  • 9.­1751
  • 9.­1768
  • 9.­2044
  • 9.­2141
  • 9.­2228
  • 9.­2241
  • 9.­2243
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2364-2366
  • 9.­2368
  • 9.­2407-2408
  • 9.­2585
  • 9.­2588
  • 10.­117
  • 10.­119-120
  • 10.­122
  • 10.­133-134
  • 11.­78
  • 11.­233
  • g.­146
  • g.­539
g.­714

Varuṇa

Wylie:
  • chu lha
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • varuṇa

A god.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 9.­569
  • 9.­978
  • 9.­1135
  • n.­716
g.­715

Vāsava

Wylie:
  • gos sbyin
  • nor lha
Tibetan:
  • གོས་སྦྱིན།
  • ནོར་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • vāsava

(1) A king at the time of the Buddha Ratnaśikhin (gos sbyin). (2) A god (nor lha).

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 3.­176
  • 3.­178
  • 3.­180
  • 3.­182
  • 3.­184-185
  • 3.­187-188
  • 3.­190-196
  • 9.­569
  • n.­158
  • n.­830
g.­719

Velāma

Wylie:
  • dus dpog
Tibetan:
  • དུས་དཔོག
Sanskrit:
  • velāma

(1) A brahmin living in the country of King Piṇḍavaṃśa. (2) A brahmin who is the Buddha in a past life.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­313-315
  • 9.­308
  • 9.­314-316
  • 9.­329
  • 9.­331
  • 9.­334
  • 9.­1491
  • n.­557
  • n.­559
  • n.­668
g.­721

Veṇu

Wylie:
  • ’od ma can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇu

A village.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­2-4
g.­722

Veṇuyaṣṭikā

Wylie:
  • ’od ma’i dbyug pa can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མའི་དབྱུག་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇuyaṣṭikā

The residence of a king.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­77
  • n.­120
  • n.­129
g.­725

viḍālapada

Wylie:
  • pho sum gang
Tibetan:
  • ཕོ་སུམ་གང་།
Sanskrit:
  • viḍālapada

A measure of weight.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­260
g.­731

Virūḍhaka

Wylie:
  • ’phags skyes po
  • lus ’phags po
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་སྐྱེས་པོ།
  • ལུས་འཕགས་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • virūḍhaka

(1) A general, son of King Prasenajit. (2) One of the Four Great Kings. The Tib. lus ’phags po is probably erroneous; see n.­321 and n.­329.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 6.­193
  • 6.­220-221
  • 6.­234
  • 9.­48
  • 9.­2490
  • 11.­13
  • 11.­16
  • 11.­18-19
  • 11.­25
  • 11.­36
  • n.­321
  • n.­329
  • n.­590
  • n.­960
  • n.­1139
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­732

Virūpākṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi bzang
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • virūpākṣa

One of the Four Great Kings.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 11.­14
  • 11.­16
  • 11.­20-21
  • 11.­26
  • 11.­36
  • n.­1140
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­734

Viśākhā Mṛgāramātā

Wylie:
  • ri dags ’dzin gyi ma sa ga
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་འཛིན་གྱི་མ་ས་ག
Sanskrit:
  • viśākhā mṛgāramātā

A lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­48
  • 9.­2507-2508
  • g.­413
g.­735

Viṣṇu

Wylie:
  • khyab ’jug
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱབ་འཇུག
Sanskrit:
  • viṣṇu

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2190
  • g.­226
g.­740

Viśvantara

Wylie:
  • thams cad sgrol
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་སྒྲོལ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvantara

A prince who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 48 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­717
  • 9.­719
  • 9.­721
  • 9.­724
  • 9.­728-729
  • 9.­748-749
  • 9.­751
  • 9.­753
  • 9.­757
  • 9.­759
  • 9.­763
  • 9.­769-770
  • 9.­788
  • 9.­816
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­839
  • 9.­843
  • 9.­846
  • 9.­848-851
  • 9.­855-857
  • 9.­868
  • 9.­872
  • 9.­883-885
  • 9.­889
  • 9.­913
  • n.­769
  • n.­775
  • n.­778
  • n.­781-782
  • n.­785
  • n.­791
  • n.­802
  • n.­813
  • g.­255
  • g.­319
  • g.­351
  • g.­580
g.­742

Vṛji

Wylie:
  • spong byed
Tibetan:
  • སྤོང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vṛji

A country.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­204
  • 3.­207
  • 3.­218
  • 3.­230-231
  • 3.­239
  • 4.­3-4
  • 4.­73
  • 9.­2538-2540
  • n.­166
  • g.­221
  • g.­537
g.­744

Water Born

Wylie:
  • chu skyes
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A prince who was the Buddha in a former life. See also n.­869.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1146-1151
  • g.­416
g.­746

Water Lily

Wylie:
  • ut+pala ltar gas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཨུཏྤལ་ལྟར་གས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • utpala

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­748

wheel-turning king

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ideal monarch or emperor who, as the result of the merit accumulated in previous lifetimes, rules over a vast realm in accordance with the Dharma. Such a monarch is called a cakravartin because he bears a wheel (cakra) that rolls (vartate) across the earth, bringing all lands and kingdoms under his power. The cakravartin conquers his territory without causing harm, and his activity causes beings to enter the path of wholesome actions. According to Vasubandhu’s Abhidharmakośa, just as with the buddhas, only one cakravartin appears in a world system at any given time. They are likewise endowed with the thirty-two major marks of a great being (mahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa), but a cakravartin’s marks are outshined by those of a buddha. They possess seven precious objects: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the wish-fulfilling gem, the queen, the general, and the minister. An illustrative passage about the cakravartin and his possessions can be found in The Play in Full (Toh 95), 3.3–3.13.

Vasubandhu lists four types of cakravartins: (1) the cakravartin with a golden wheel (suvarṇacakravartin) rules over four continents and is invited by lesser kings to be their ruler; (2) the cakravartin with a silver wheel (rūpyacakravartin) rules over three continents and his opponents submit to him as he approaches; (3) the cakravartin with a copper wheel (tāmracakravartin) rules over two continents and his opponents submit themselves after preparing for battle; and (4) the cakravartin with an iron wheel (ayaścakravartin) rules over one continent and his opponents submit themselves after brandishing weapons.

Located in 84 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 2.­256
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­116
  • 3.­131
  • 3.­168
  • 3.­175
  • 3.­191
  • 3.­194-197
  • 4.­22
  • 4.­36
  • 4.­46
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­276
  • 6.­284
  • 6.­292
  • 8.­148-151
  • 8.­153-154
  • 8.­156-173
  • 8.­179-181
  • 8.­184
  • 8.­187
  • 8.­197-198
  • 8.­315
  • 9.­275
  • 9.­305
  • 9.­426
  • 9.­437
  • 9.­440
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­527
  • 9.­531
  • 9.­570
  • 9.­971
  • 9.­973-974
  • 9.­1136
  • 11.­93
  • 11.­139
  • n.­48
  • n.­193
  • n.­197-198
  • n.­453
  • n.­501
  • n.­503
  • n.­674
  • n.­1163
  • g.­356
  • g.­366
  • g.­381
  • g.­419
  • g.­447
  • g.­485
  • g.­593
  • g.­749
g.­749

wheel-turning king of power

Wylie:
  • stobs kyi ’khor los sgyur ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཀྱི་འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bala­cakravartin

A kind of inferior wheel-turning king.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 4.­22
  • 9.­396
  • 9.­400
  • 9.­410
g.­750

Where There Is a City

Wylie:
  • grong khyer can
Tibetan:
  • གྲོང་ཁྱེར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A city. See also n.­341.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­264
  • n.­340
g.­754

wind illness

Wylie:
  • rlung nad
Tibetan:
  • རླུང་ནད།
Sanskrit:
  • vāyvābādhika

A disease caused by an imbalance of wind as one of the humors of the body.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­24
  • 1.­97
  • 2.­76
  • 7.­121
  • 8.­141
  • 9.­1386-1387
  • 9.­2445
  • 9.­2451
g.­755

yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 102 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­243-244
  • 2.­246
  • 2.­253-254
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­51
  • 6.­36-37
  • 7.­200-202
  • 7.­204
  • 7.­207-208
  • 7.­213-214
  • 7.­216-217
  • 7.­220
  • 7.­222-223
  • 7.­225
  • 7.­227-228
  • 7.­235
  • 7.­238
  • 7.­240
  • 7.­248
  • 7.­250
  • 7.­259
  • 7.­266
  • 8.­31-32
  • 8.­47
  • 8.­66-72
  • 8.­76-77
  • 8.­114
  • 8.­194
  • 9.­16
  • 9.­149
  • 9.­175
  • 9.­178
  • 9.­181
  • 9.­184
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­192
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­217
  • 9.­221
  • 9.­225
  • 9.­239
  • 9.­610
  • 9.­612-613
  • 9.­636
  • 9.­641
  • 9.­684
  • 9.­689
  • 9.­1024
  • 9.­1028
  • 9.­1528
  • 9.­1778
  • 9.­1916
  • 10.­97
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­15
  • 11.­23
  • n.­403
  • n.­411
  • n.­424
  • n.­436
  • n.­445
  • n.­471
  • n.­473-475
  • n.­634
  • n.­638
  • g.­35
  • g.­39
  • g.­66
  • g.­157
  • g.­164
  • g.­171
  • g.­176
  • g.­198
  • g.­212
  • g.­220
  • g.­370
  • g.­466
  • g.­572
  • g.­704
  • g.­711
  • g.­756
g.­757

Yāma

Wylie:
  • ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma

A class of gods who inhabit the third of the six heavens of the desire realm, characterized by freedom from difficulty.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­760

Yaśas

Wylie:
  • grags pa
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśas

(1) A disciple of the Buddha who was a son of a wealthy householder. (2) A disciple of the Buddha whose right hand was impaired. (3) A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
  • 9.­1740-1741
  • 9.­1765-1767
  • 9.­1824-1825
  • 9.­1839-1841
  • n.­987
g.­764

Yijing

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • —

A seventh-century Chinese Buddhist monk, who studied in Nālandā monastery in India and translated many texts including the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • n.­186
  • n.­424
  • n.­485
  • n.­603
  • n.­1078
  • n.­1088
g.­765

yojana

Wylie:
  • dpag tshad
Tibetan:
  • དཔག་ཚད།
Sanskrit:
  • yojana

An Indian measure of distance equal to 16,000 cubits, or about 4.5 miles (7.4 km), or approximately 4000 fathoms (Rangjung Yeshe Dictionary).

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­264
  • 2.­270
  • 2.­274
  • 3.­19
  • 8.­169
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­225-226
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­289-290
  • 9.­293
  • 9.­298
  • 9.­717
  • 9.­743
  • 9.­1005
  • 9.­1446
  • 9.­2277
  • 9.­2318
  • 10.­97
  • n.­642
  • n.­783-784
0
    You are downloading:

    The Chapter on Medicines

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). Translated by Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-chapter-2.Copy
    84000. The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). Translated by Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-chapter-2.Copy
    84000. (2025) The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). (Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-chapter-2.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from Chapters on Monastic Discipline
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy